Quantum Data 881 User Manual Download Page 116

Page: 116 / 1144

104

Chapter 3

Administrative Tasks

Setting the PC’s network settings

To establish a local ethernet connection between PC and generator, follow these steps to

configure a static IP address on your PC and connect using a crossover cable.

To connect directly to the generator:

1. Determine the IP address of the generator by pressing the

Tools

key, choosing the

System

item, and then choosing the

Network

item. The IP address of the generator

appears on the generator’s display. Refer to the procedures above “

Setting the 882’s

IP address

” on page 131 for more details on accessing this display.

2. Configure the IP address of your PC. To enter the IP address, open Windows Control

Panel, and then open the Network Connections window.

3. In the Network Connections window, right click the connection that represents your

Ethernet card and select

Properties

. Select the

Internet Protocol TCP/IP

connection,

and then click

Properties

Note: If you have more than one Ethernet card make sure you configure the select the

correct one.

Summary of Contents for 881

Page 1: ...881 882 Video Test Instrument User Guide 882E for HDMI ...

Page 2: ... or publications without the expressed written consent of Quantum Data Quantum Data reserves the right to make changes to its products to improve performance reliability producibility and or marketability Information furnished by Quantum Data is believed to be accurate and reliable However no responsibility is assumed by Quantum Data for its use Updates to this manual are available at http www qua...

Page 3: ...5 Browse mode 15 Web interface 20 Working with the Virtual Front Panel 20 Working with the CMD Command Terminal 22 Working with the 882 FTP Browser 23 Copying files between 882s 27 Command line interface 30 Working with the serial interface 30 Working with the network interface 33 Sending commands interactively 34 Sending command files serial interface only 34 Working with user profiles 36 Chapter...

Page 4: ...r 75 Calibrating signal level 75 Calibrating frequency 76 Auto Upgrade 78 Auto upgrade Network Method 78 Auto upgrade PCMCIA Compact Flash Method 85 Upgrading the generator locally 97 Manually upgrading using PCMCIA Compact Flash card 97 Manually upgrading the generator without using PC Card 100 Connecting generator directly to a PC 102 Reconfiguring and booting a stalled generator 107 Cloning gen...

Page 5: ...ce 139 Upgrading 882s over a network 140 Upgrade options and procedures 140 Backing up the current files on the file server 140 Copying files to the PC file server 141 Removing current files from the 882s 142 Copying the new files to each 882 142 Reboot the 882s 142 Cloning 882s using the 882 FTP Browser 143 Chapter 5 Working with Formats Overview 146 Format library 147 Composite television format...

Page 6: ...and line interface 198 Format catalogs 199 Using format catalogs 199 Creating format catalogs 200 Deleting format catalogs 201 Chapter 6 Using GPIB Interface Overview 206 Setting the GPIB port address 207 Queries and commands 209 Commands 209 Queries 210 Sending commands and queries 211 Status queries and control 213 Status byte 213 Bus commands 215 Chapter 7 Working with Images Overview 218 Viewi...

Page 7: ...sequence using the command line interface 244 Editing a test sequence XML file 248 Deleting a test sequence 251 Chapter 9 Testing HDMI Sink Devices Overview of HDMI display testing 254 Physical connections 254 Format selection 255 Image selection 258 Setting up the 882 for HDMI testing 259 Selecting video format 260 Testing HDMI displays 264 Testing HDMI 1 3 displays 266 Testing Deep Color 266 Tes...

Page 8: ...s 3 Viewing EDID from a display 882 only 3 Generating an EDID Information Report 6 Modifying EDID in a display 8 Capturing and storing EDID from display device 9 Creating or editing EDID contents 10 Testing EDID for HDMI compliance in display sink devices 12 Testing HDMI sink device for EDID compliance 12 Verifying pixel encoding and rate support 31 Using the EDID Editor tool 34 Loading EDIDs with...

Page 9: ...07 Testing HDMI displays with HDCP 109 Running HDCP test in step mode 112 Running an HDMI HDCP self test 114 Understanding the HDCP test 115 HDMI HDCP test sequence 115 Running the HDCP compliance test for HDMI devices with the 882EA 116 Overview 116 Encryption Status Tester 117 List of Tests 118 Running HDCP compliance test on HDMI transmitters 122 Running HDCP compliance tests on HDMI receivers ...

Page 10: ...xecuting a script 133 ScriptSDK API functions by category 137 Control functions 137 Command functions 137 Response functions 138 Front panel functions 138 Operator functions 138 ScriptSDK API functions by name 139 ScriptSDK commands 167 Sample ScriptSDK programs 174 Appendix A Command Reference Commands by category 194 System 194 GPIB IEEE 488 2 standard 196 Gating Controls 196 Images 197 Formats ...

Page 11: ... Format errors 658 3000 3999 Image errors 673 4000 4999 Test sequence errors 674 5000 5999 Directory errors 676 6000 6999 Bitmap errors 676 7000 7999 LUT errors 677 8000 8999 Font errors 677 9000 9999 System errors 678 10000 10999 System errors 683 Appendix D Format Reference SDTV Formats 687 HDTV Formats 690 VESA DMT Formats 691 VESA CVT Formats 692 Game Formats 696 Medical Formats 697 Military F...

Page 12: ...10 Contents ...

Page 13: ...e Rev A 35 1 1 Getting Started Topics in this chapter Introduction Video interfaces Computer interfaces Front panel interface 882 file system and media 882 operational modes Web interface Command line interface Working with user profiles ...

Page 14: ...t you must us a PCMCIA card that is formatted in FAT16 filesystem If you use an card that is formatted in FAT32 the 882 will not boot 882E features The following are the standard and optional features of the 882E Image Control Tool to fine tune deep color images 882E only DTV ready Pre programmed standard DTV formats are ready for immediate use Digital outputs support YCbCr color encoding Analog o...

Page 15: ...lowing are the optional features available with the 882E For the 882E one of the two following options must be selected HDMI 1 3 Transmitter Advanced E EDID parsing Deep Color at 24 30 36 bit pixel 4 4 4 RGB YCbCr 16 20 24 bit pixel 4 2 2 YCbCr High level Active Format Description AFD controls AFD test suite Pixel repetition test suite Automatic and manual InfoFrame setup Compressed Dolby Digital ...

Page 16: ...4 Chapter 1 Getting Started Measure source timing and source pixel errors Also useful for testing cables Test results can be issued as formatted reports Emulate EDIDs Dual HDMI Tx and dual HDMI Rx ports ...

Page 17: ...ls 2 HDMI OUT 2 connector outputs full single link HDMI 1 3 video as well as DVI and modern HDMI compatible digital video signals 3 HDMI IN 1 connector accepts full single link HDMI 1 3 video as well as DVI and modern HDMI compatible digital video signals 4 HDMI IN 2 connector accepts full single link HDMI 1 3 video as well as DVI and modern HDMI compatible digital video signals 5 SPECIAL connecto...

Page 18: ...ulse For more information see Chapter 14 Using Special Sync Output Pin Signal Pin Signal Pin Signal 1 TMDS Data 2 7 TMDS Data0 13 CEC 2 TMDS Data2 Shield 8 TMDS Data0 Shield 14 Reserved N C 3 TMDS Data2 9 TMDS Data0 15 SCL 4 TMDS Data1 10 TMDS Clock 16 SDA 5 TMDS Data1 Shield 11 TMDS Clock Shield 17 DDC SEC Ground 6 TMDS Data1 12 TMDS Clock 18 5 V Power 19 Hot Plug Detect ...

Page 19: ...erial interface on page 30 The pinouts for the RS 232 connector are shown in the following table Connector Description 1 SERIAL connector provides RS 232C serial data communication interface for the 882 2 DEBUG connector is for Quantum Data use only 3 ETHERNET connector is used to connect the 882 with a TCP IP network for remote administration and control and for sharing resources from a file serv...

Page 20: ...larger automated test system The GPIB connector pinouts are listed in the following table Pin Signal Pin Signal Pin Signal Pin Signal 1 DIO1 7 NRFD 13 DIO5 19 Shield 2 DIO2 8 NDAC 14 DIO6 20 Shield 3 DIO3 9 IFC 15 DIO7 21 Shield 4 DIO4 10 SRQ 16 DIO8 22 Shield 5 EOI 11 ATN 17 REN 23 Shield 6 DAV 12 Shield 18 Shield 24 Signal Ground ...

Page 21: ...ack about the operational status of the 882 The graphic below shows the location of the status indicators RecentFolder Folder Tool Setting Rejected Selected Disabled Enabled Item Display Menu Selection Keys Soft Keys Status Indicators Ethernet connection active Multi link video active Digital video active Browse mode active Output encrypted HDCP Packet video active Output contains data InfoFrames ...

Page 22: ... s display Pressing a soft key either selects an item enables or disables the item or causes additional information about the item to appear on the 882 s display An icon located next to an item provides additional information about the item Following is a list of icons and their meanings Icon Meaning Folder containing related items Recently visited folder Displays information about UUT Select devi...

Page 23: ...ay be activated by pressing soft key Value may be increased by pressing Up key or decreased by pressing Down key Page down to view more items Scroll left to previous option or right to next option Selecting this item will cause an action Icon Meaning ACS DCS AFD 1 PR 5 DSS Pedestal This represents a setting that is changed using the spot keys This represents an option that is enabled or disabled u...

Page 24: ...ignal of a format To change the value of the XVSI AVSI or DVSI setting press the soft keys next to the arrows on the bottom row of the 882 s display until the blinking cursor is on the value you want to change Increment the value up or down by pressing the and keys To see other settings for the format press the soft key adjacent to the arrows If you press the soft key next to the arrow by Video Si...

Page 25: ... Library folder contains the following resource files Fonts Object files used to define the font types Formats XML files defining the format parameter settings FormatLib XML files for configuring the source list of formats Images C object files executables bitmaps and XML files for rendering images ImageLib XML files for configuring the content list of images Sequences XML files with instructions ...

Page 26: ... 882 boots from in instances where the default location is either inaccessible or known to have a suspect application file Follow the procedure below to boot the 882 To boot the 882 1 Apply power to the 882 The following display appears If you are sure you want to boot from the current storage location you can let the system boot automatically a To boot from an alternative device press any key wit...

Page 27: ...The Basic mode is the main operating mode of the 882 Typically you will use the Basic mode when testing displays and sources In Basic mode you can select formats and images create and run test sequences view and edit object properties and so on In the Basic mode you make selections in the front panel with the item selection keys and the soft keys The function of the menu selections key is describe...

Page 28: ... in the 882 s flash memory a network file server the 882 s PC card or the 882 s cache memory To choose the medium to browse 1 Press the soft key adjacent to the medium you want to browse A list of folders on that medium appears on the 882 s display as shown below Go to root folder To previous folder Jump to preset location Open selected folder Page up Page down Flashmem NetPlace PCCard Cache Mediu...

Page 29: ... front panel To set the 882 s path using the front panel 1 Place the 882 in Browse mode by holding down the Tools key until the media menu appears on the 882 s display as shown below 2 Choose the desired medium by pressing the adjacent soft key The folders on the selected medium for example flash memory appear on the 882 s display as shown below 3 Press the soft key adjacent to the Library folder ...

Page 30: ...r each file type format image and sequence set the path parameter to the corresponding folder on local 882 media using the following commands FMTP medium Library Formats IMGP medium Library Images SEQP medium Library Sequences For example the medium name for the PC card is card0 So you would enter the following command to set the image path to the image directory on the PC card IMGP card0 Library ...

Page 31: ...der shortcut 1 Browse to the folder to which you want to create a shortcut 2 Hold down a function key F1 F2 F3 or F4 to assign the key to the folder Switching from Browse mode to Basic mode To switch from Browse mode to Basic mode Press and hold the Tools key The message Hold to enter Basic Mode appears on the 882 s display Continue holding the Tools key until the Browse Mode status indicator turn...

Page 32: ...Virtual Front Panel The Virtual Front Panel enables you to perform remotely the same tasks as you would with the 882 s front panel To use the Virtual Front Panel you must have a PC connected to a 882 either through an Ethernet LAN or locally through an Ethernet crossover cable connected between the Ethernet ports on the 882 and the PC These configurations are described in more detail in Establishi...

Page 33: ...acent soft key The 882 s IP address appears on the 882 s display as shown below To use the Virtual Front Panel 1 Open a Web browser such as Internet Explorer and type the 882 s IP address in the address entry field For example enter the following http 192 168 254 1 The 882 home page appears in the browser Clock Clone CalFactor Server Network About Serial GPib IP Address 192 168 254 1 Subnet Mask 2...

Page 34: ...ront Panel appears 3 Use your mouse to click the virtual keys which function the same as if you pressed the physical keys on the 882 Working with the CMD Command Terminal The CMD Terminal allows you to send commands to the 882 using the command line interface To use the CMD Terminal 1 Access the Virtual Front Panel page See To use the Virtual Front Panel on page 21 2 Click the CMD Terminal link Th...

Page 35: ...s on a PC such as images or formats you can use the 882 FTP Browser to copy these objects to a 882 You can also use the 882 FTP Browser to copy objects between media in a 882 and to copy objects from one 882 to another Copying files from a PC to a 882 To copy files from a PC to a 882 1 Access the 882 s FTP browser by choosing the FTP Browser menu item from the main web page The 882 FTP Browser app...

Page 36: ...Look in box click the down arrow and select the medium where you want to copy the file Select tffs0 for the 882 s flash memory or card0 for the 882 s PC card b In the list of files open the destination folder 5 In the Host Files area click Download The Transfer Files dialog box appears 6 Verify that the source file or folder and the destination folder are correct and then click OK 7 The Copying Fi...

Page 37: ...ws the files stored on the PC 2 In the Instrument Files area locate and select the file or folder you want to copy as follows a In the Look in box click the down arrow and select the medium where the file is located Select tffs0 for the 882 s flash memory or card0 for the 882 s PC card b In the list of files select the file or folder you want to copy 3 In the Host Files area open the destination f...

Page 38: ...the 882 s FTP browser by choosing the FTP Browser menu item from the main web page The 882 FTP Browser appears The Instrument Files area shows the files stored on the 882 The Host Files area shows the files stored on the PC 2 In the Instrument Files area click the down arrow by the Look in box and select tffs0 This is the 882 s flash memory 3 Repeat step 2 to open a second 882 FTP Browser In the I...

Page 39: ...o copy in the source window 5 Locate and open the destination folder in the destination window 6 Drag the file or folder from the Instrument Files area of the source window to the Instrument Files area of the destination window Copying files between 882s To copy files between 882s 1 Open a Web browser such as Internet Explorer and type the source 882 s IP address in the address entry field The sou...

Page 40: ...FTP Browser running one for the source 882 and one for the target 882 4 In the 882 FTP Browser window for the source 882 locate the file or folder you want to copy as follows a In the Look in box click the down arrow and select the medium where the file or folder is located Select tffs0 for the 882 s flash memory or card0 for the 882 s PC card Note Please note that you must us a PCMCIA card that i...

Page 41: ... for the 882 s PC card b In the list of files open the destination folder 6 Drag the file or folder from the Instrument Files area to the Host Files area of the source window A confirmation dialog box appears 7 Click OK to copy the files 8 Locate the file or folder in the Host Files area in the target window Drag the file or folder from the Host Files area to the destination folder in the Instrume...

Page 42: ...82 using a terminal emulator such as HyperTerminal and how to change serial port settings To connect the 882 to the PC To set up the 882 to use the serial interface connect a serial null modem cable from the serial port of the PC to the SERIAL connector on the rear of the 882 Establishing a terminal session with the 882 The following procedure describes how to establish a terminal session with the...

Page 43: ...following a Position the blinking cursor on the baud rate setting To do this press the soft key adjacent to the arrow by the baud rate setting to move the cursor left or right until it appears on the baud rate setting b Press the or keys to adjust the baud rate setting up or down 6 To change the flow control state do the following a Position the blinking cursor on the flow control setting To do th...

Page 44: ...OP setting To do this press the soft keys adjacent to the arrow by the STOP setting until the cursor appears on the current stop bits setting b Press the or keys to adjust the setting up or down 10 To save the changes press the Enter Options key The following choices appear on the 882 s display To save the changes choose the Yes item by pressing the adjacent soft key To exit without saving the cha...

Page 45: ...a an Ethernet LAN and how to establish a Telnet session with the 882 To connect the 882 to a PC over an Ethernet LAN 1 Connect the Ethernet cable between the PC s Ethernet port and an active Ethernet jack 2 Connect an Ethernet cable between the 882 s ETHERNET port and an active Ethernet jack Establishing a Telnet session with the 882 The following procedure describes how to establish a Telnet sess...

Page 46: ...ands To apply an image and format to the 882 hardware enter ALLU To display the name of the format currently in the format buffer enter FMTL To load a format enter FMTL format_name To apply the format to the 882 hardware enter FMTU To load an image enter IMGL image_name To apply the image to the 882 hardware enter IMGU Sending command files serial interface only When developing more complex custom...

Page 47: ...e C prompt transfer the text file to the 882 For example to transfer a file using HyperTerminal do the following a On the Transfer menu click Send Text File The Send Text File dialog box appears b Select the text file you want to send and then click Open HyperTerminal displays the commands as they are sent c Press Enter once to ensure that the last command is sent ...

Page 48: ...sly or press USER on the Virtual Front Panel to access the list of user profiles The following is an example of a set of user profiles that might appear on the 882 s display Note that User1 is active which is indicated by the sign wr 2 Choose another user by pressing the adjacent soft key For example to change to User5 press the soft key adjacent to User5 This will save the configuration settings ...

Page 49: ...anumeric characters For example to set up a user profile called User3 enter USRA User3 xml USRU User3 xml A new user profile is created with default configuration settings and becomes the active profile on the 882 While active the 882 tracks subsequent format and format options format catalogs interface and content selections made by the user These configuration settings are saved to the active pr...

Page 50: ...38 Chapter 1 Getting Started ...

Page 51: ...ays Topics in this chapter General video display testing procedures Testing digital computer IT FPDs Testing digital component video HDTV CE FPDs Using the Image Caching feature Using the AuxTest image Using the ImageShift utility Adjust Frequency Function Keypad Utility ...

Page 52: ...82C 882E 881C or 882E generator to the display under test Display type Signal type Port Interface Cable Information Technology IT Computer VESA DMT CVT Analog component RGB VGA VGA to VGA Computer VESA DDWG Digital component RGB HDMI OUT HDMI D HDMI to DVI DisplayPort 882E only Digital component RGB DisplayPort OUT DisplayPort Consumer Equipment CE SDTV ITU 470 6 baseband Analog composite CVBS CVB...

Page 53: ...g component RGB DVI A with DVI to VGA adapter VGA to VGA Computer VESA DDWG Digital component RGB DVI for single and dual link or HDMI OUT HDMI D for single link only DVI to DVI cable for DVI connector or HDMI to DVI for HDMI D con nector Consumer Equipment CE SDTV ITU 470 6 baseband Analog composite CVBS CVBS BNC to RCA 75 Ohm SDTV ITU 470 6 baseband Analog composite S Video SVIDEO S Video miniDi...

Page 54: ...o define the display size Once you have selected the interface you can change the parameters specifying the physical size of the display if your application calls for that 1 After selecting the interface press the Sink key and then the Settings key The following information appears on the 882 s display 2 Navigate to the other parameters for physical size VSIZ and USIZ to set the display size for y...

Page 55: ...h formats are listed To automatically set Source list of formats for EDID compatible display When testing EDID compatible displays the 882 can automatically update the Source list to include only formats supported by the display under test To do this 1 Connect the 882 to the display you want to test 2 Press the Sink key The following information appears on the 882 s display Note If there are two d...

Page 56: ...formats suitable for a particular interface type For example if you select CVBS the Source list does not include the VESA formats The 882 s format library is comprised of a set of format catalogs You can set up the 882 to show only the formats you want in the order you want when you browse through the Source list See Format catalogs on page 199 for details To use Emulate mode Emulate mode automati...

Page 57: ...equipment or other specialty display Note The 882 has a library of standard formats For a description of how the library is organized see Understanding the format library on page 46 2 For non EDID compliant displays check the specifications of your display for supported formats 3 Press the Source key to access the list of formats A list of formats appears on the 882 s display as shown below To see...

Page 58: ...nt standard definition TV video format is 480i2x30 for a vertical resolution of 480 pixels with interlaced scanning and a 30 Hz frame refresh rate 2x indicates that the pixels are double clocked for DVI compatibility Component high definition television formats Component high definition television formats like the standard definition television formats are named by their vertical resolution scanni...

Page 59: ...will apply a series of images suitable for evaluating the display Of primary importance is determining what type of display you are testing for example CRT or digital flat panel display You must also determine if you are testing composite TV and use images appropriate for these formats and video types Each image in the 882 s library is intended to test one or more attributes of a particular displa...

Page 60: ...ges Hatch TVHatch Hatch_16 Hatch_20 Cir clesL Geom_1 Geom_5 SMPTE133 Focus Focus_ 6 Focus_ 7 Focus_ 8 Focus_ 9 Text_9 Text_9T Text_11 Text_12T Text_16 Photometry chrominance contrast levels Flat Flat07 Flat13 Flat20 Flat27 Flat33 Flat40 Flat47 Flat53 Flat60 Flat67 Flat73 Flat80 Flat87 Flat93 FlatGray Flat_01 Flat_02 Flat_03 Flat_04 Flat_05 Flat_06 Flat_07 Flat_08 Flat_09 Flat_10 Flat_11 Flat_12 Fl...

Page 61: ...l display Pixel anomalies stuck pixels misc sampling Flat Raster Ramp_B Ramp_G and Ramp_R Focus_ 6 Focus_ 7 Focus_ 8 Focus_ 9 Text_9 Text_9T Text_11 Text_12T Text_16 Photometry chrominance contrast levels Flat Flat07 Flat13 Flat20 Flat27 Flat33 Flat40 Flat47 Flat53 Flat60 Flat67 Flat73 Flat80 Flat87 Flat93 FlatGray Flat_01 Flat_02 Flat_03 Flat_04 Flat_05 Flat_06 Flat_07 Flat_08 Flat_09 Flat_10 Fla...

Page 62: ...ss the and keys to advance through the image versions Each version shows the format parameters for a different format in the Source list Alternatively to enable and view image versions using the command line interface enter the following commands ISUB 1 Enables sub images IVER 1 Specifies the first image version IMGU Activates the image version IVER 2 Specifies the second image version IMGU Activa...

Page 63: ...ically want to select images to test for pixel anomalies persistence photometry and resolution related problems For more information see Selecting image on page 47 or Appendix B Image Reference To activate the HDMI D interface on the output port 1 Press the Interface key A listing of signal interfaces appears on the 882 s display as shown below 2 Choose the DVI D item by pressing the adjacent soft...

Page 64: ... dead or unconnected channel Also look at the transitions between the bars they should be sharp and distinct Each bar also should be uniform in color and intensity across its entire width To test luminance you can use the SMPTE133 grayscale portion image To test gamma correction you can use the SMPTE133 checkerbox portion image The detailed methods for verifying these parameters on the SMPTE133 im...

Page 65: ...ted images for example Cubes and Persist look for bleeding or trails in the wake of the moving object Note You can customize your 882 to run through a specified set of formats and images automatically or manually by creating test sequences See Chapter 8 Working with Test Sequences for details ...

Page 66: ...n with the first format 720p in the range of high definition component television formats See Setting Source list of formats on page 43 3 Determine additional formats to test based on the resolution of the television display The television product specification sheet will provide information on what resolutions to test It is necessary to test only those resolutions with the supported scanning type...

Page 67: ...t key Alternatively you can load the image with the following command IMGL SMPTE133 IMGU To test the display 1 Press the Source key and select the first test format Alternatively you can load the format with the following command FMTL format_name FMTU 2 Press the Content key and select the first test image Alternatively you can load the image with the following command IMGL image_name IMGU 3 Repea...

Page 68: ...ences See Chapter 8 Working with Test Sequences for details HDMI interface testing To set up the 882 to test a digital HDMI component video HDTV display 1 Connect an HDMI to HDMI cable between the HDMI OUT 1 or 2 connector on the 882 and the HDMI connector on the television display under test 2 Identify the high definition component television formats to test These formats are listed after the com...

Page 69: ... definition component format for example 720p50 by pressing the adjacent soft key Alternatively you can load the format with the following command FMTL 720p50 FMTU 3 Press the Content key to access the list of images 4 Choose a suitable image for example SMPTE133 by pressing the adjacent soft key Alternatively you can load the image with the following command IMGL SMPTE133 IMGU To test the display...

Page 70: ... verifying centering with the Outline images Outline0 Outline1 Outline2 Outline3 are provided in Appendix B Image Reference When testing resolution with the Grill images you should be able to see individual and distinct stripes in all areas of the display at all four resolutions When testing for pixel anomalies use the Flat Raster and Ramp images Use the Raster and Flat images to look for pixels t...

Page 71: ...elow to render images quickly with the Image Cache feature To test a sink with the Image Caching feature 1 Load the cache with some images in 2 different formats IMGX SRC Render specify normal render mode ICHC clear the cache FMTL DMT0660 select first format FMTU use this format IMGL SmpteBar load image SmpteBar IMGU use this image ICHA IMG1 save this image to cache as IMG1 for DMT0660 IMGL Master...

Page 72: ...display of SmpteBar from cache ICHL IMG5 load cached Ramp_B for 720p60 ICHU fast display of Ramp_B FMTL DMT0660 load format DMT0660 FMTU 0 use format without redrawing ICHL IMG2 load cached Master for DMT0660 ICHU fast display of Master FMTU revert to normal rendering reset cache 3 Return to normal rendering mode IMGX SRC Render specify normal render mode ...

Page 73: ...f signal interfaces appears on the 882 s display as shown below 3 Choose the HDMI H item by pressing the adjacent soft key The interface is activated and the port outputs the currently selected image and format Alternatively to activate the interface through the command line interface enter the following commands XVSI 4 Selects the HDMI H interface ALLU Applies the interface setting to the 882 4 P...

Page 74: ...splays device The section in the center shows the step by step results 11 steps of the first phase of the HDCP authentication Below that is the ongoing test results of the third phase of authentication i e exchanging the Ri values ...

Page 75: ...function can be configured and run either through the front panel or the command line Procedures for both are provided Using the ImageShift utility through the front panel The procedure for configuring and running the ImageShift utility is provided below To use the ImageShift utility through the front panel 1 Physically connect a monitor to the 882 at any of the interfaces using a suitable cable 2...

Page 76: ...The following settings appear on the 882 s display You can set the starting coordinates of the image shift as follows a To specify the X Start Point position the blinking cursor on the digits of the X coordinate you wish to change To do this press the soft key adjacent to the arrow Parameter Action Line Selects image shifting pattern This can be either Reverse or Repeat Reverse moves the image in ...

Page 77: ...ion the blinking cursor on the digits of the Y coordinate you wish to change To do this press the soft key adjacent to the arrow by the coordinates to move the cursor left or right until it appears on the digit in the Y coordinate Adjust the value of the setting up or down by pressing the or keys Note The movement that you see may not always correspond to the settings for HInc and VInc The reason ...

Page 78: ...hown in the example below ISHB begins an imageshift editing session XISH SRCN cache0 images SMPTEBar selects the SMPTEBar image XISH PATH 0 0 150 20 sets the imageshift path x y coordinates XISH TTYP 1 sets the trace type to Repeat 1 XISH HINC 4 sets the horizontal shift increment to 4 XISH VINC 2 sets the vertical shift increment to 2 XISH TINC 5 sets the time shift value to 5 ISHE ends the image...

Page 79: ...mageshift function ISHU Applies the values to the hardware 5 Apply the imageshift file to the hardware using the ISHU command For example ISHU applies the imageshift file to the hardware To stop the ImageShift utility through the command line interface 1 To stop the Imageshift enter the following command ISHG 0 Stops gates off the imageshift function ...

Page 80: ...quency of the active format To utilize the AFC function 1 Physically connect a monitor to the 882 at any of the interfaces using a suitable cable 2 Press the Tools key The Tools menu appears on the 882 s display as shown below 3 Choose AFC by pressing the adjacent item selection key The following display appears on the 882 s display This display enables you to increase or decrease the horizontal f...

Page 81: ...al port on the 882 The serial port is on the back of the 882 on the lower panel It is labeled Serial 3 Press the Tools key The Tools menu appears on the 882 s display as shown below 4 Choose System pressing the adjacent item selection key The following display appears on the 882 s display 5 Choose Serial to access the menu for enabling the Keypad The following display appears on the 882 s display ...

Page 82: ... indicated by an arrow key If you scroll down using the key the following menu appears 2 Select the Keypad item to view the keypad status The screen shown below appears This display shows the Mode which is either normal or Sequence and the current format and image The Exit enables you to exit from the menu without disabling the keypad function Sequence Probe AFC Keypad Analyzer ImgShift Mode Norma...

Page 83: ...r e t l a t c e l e S e l b a l i a v a f i y e k l e D s s e r P g n i t a g o e d i v G B R e g n a h C h g u o r h t e l c y c o t y e k s s e r P s n o i t a n i b m o c g n i t a g t s i l t n e r r u c m o r f t a m r o f y n a t c e l e S o t s y e k c i r e m u n e s u y e k s s e r P n e h t d n a r e b m u n t a m r o f y f i c e p s r e t n E s s e r p t a m r o f t x e n t c e l e S 2 ...

Page 84: ...72 Chapter 2 Testing Video Displays ...

Page 85: ...dministrative Tasks Topics in this chapter Overview Calibrating the generator Auto Upgrade Upgrading the generator locally Reconfiguring and booting a stalled generator Cloning generators Resetting a generator Viewing generator configuration information ...

Page 86: ... Administrative Tasks Overview This section describes how to accomplish administrative tasks including calibrating the generator upgrading a generator cloning a generator and maintaining the generator s file system ...

Page 87: ...d using two independent zero calibration points and two independent slope calibration points Interpolation equations for the different video types are used to set the caldac values that control the output sync and voltage levels to the correct values You can calibrate the generator using the front panel keys or the command line interface Follow the procedures below to calibrate the generator To se...

Page 88: ...n with the 882 on page 30 or Establishing a Telnet session with the 882 on page 33 2 At the prompt enter the following command SCAL The generator begins the calibration procedure To view analog calibration factors Enter the following command to view the analog video red green blue calibration factors CALF The generator presents the following in response 1089 2589 1993 3223 1148 2633 2059 3279 1000...

Page 89: ... pressing the adjacent soft key The System menu appears Press the key to scroll down until the CalFactor item appears 7 Choose the CalFactor item by pressing the adjacent soft key The following items appear on the generator s display 8 Choose the Edit Factors item by pressing the adjacent soft key The following items appear on the generator s display a Edit the RATC factor by pressing the soft key...

Page 90: ...rmware It guides the user through the upgrade process checking the Quantum Data website for the latest version and installing all files in the correct location on the generator The Auto Update utility provides for two methods of copying the firmware files into the generator 1 The network method and 2 the PCMCIA Compact Flash method These are provided below Auto upgrade Network Method The first met...

Page 91: ...oading and installing the Auto Update utility The Auto Update utility is java based and requires the Java Virtual Machine Java runtime to be installed on the computer This can be obtained from http www java com The Auto Update utility can be downloaded from the downloads section of the Quantum Data website at http www quantumdata com downloads index asp After downloading the Auto Update ZIP file i...

Page 92: ...80 Chapter 3 Administrative Tasks Running the Auto Update utility Network Upgrade 1 Run the utility by double clicking on AutoUpdate jar You will be presented with the following screen ...

Page 93: ...ppear 3 Make sure you have network access to the generator then select Next Next you will have the opportunity to back up the files in the generator If you have any custom images formats reports or other files stored on the tffs0 flash drive within the generator they will be lost unless you choose to back up the files ...

Page 94: ...strative Tasks 4 Optionally browse to a new backup directory then click Next to begin the backup If you don t want to back up any files from the generator click on Skip Backup 5 Next enter the IP address for the generator ...

Page 95: ...882 Video Test Instrument User Guide Rev A 35 83 6 Click Next to continue 7 If you see this screen click Continue With Upgrade ...

Page 96: ...ite to download the current firmware version for this generator then display the version number and wait for your confirmation 9 Click Yes to continue The utility will extract the downloaded files back up the generator s current files to the PC and finally transfer the new files to the generator Please don t disconnect or turn off the generator or PC until you see the final screen ...

Page 97: ...ing the generator using the auto upgrade feature is the PCMCIA Compact Flash upgrade This method is used when you connect the generator to the network and you cannot connect the PC to the generator but requires that you have a PC that is connected to the network Internet This method uses the PCMCIA Compact Flash card or compact flash with the PCMCIA Compact Flash adapter to transport the ...

Page 98: ...or The Auto Upgrade utility prompts the user when the PCMCIA Compact Flash card must be moved between the computer and the generator Running the Auto Update utility PCMCIA Upgrade 1 Run the utility by double clicking on AutoUpdate jar You will be presented with the following screen ...

Page 99: ...882 Video Test Instrument User Guide Rev A 35 87 ...

Page 100: ...screen The button How To Get Genstats Manually will show you the method for reading genstats on an attached display You can also generate an HTML genstats report by pressing TOOLS Reports Misc Genstats You can view this report by selecting the Generated Reports link from the generator s home page then select GenStats 4 Enter the information exactly as presented in the genstats report Following is ...

Page 101: ...ility will download the new firmware files from the Quantum Data website and report the version number of the release 7 Click on Yes and the utility will extract the individual files from the downloaded release archive Then you will be prompted to insert a blank PCMCIA Compact Flash card into the generator ...

Page 102: ...90 Chapter 3 Administrative Tasks ...

Page 103: ...files to the PCMCIA Compact Flash card When this process is complete insert the card into the computer and click on Next 9 Then you will be asked to specify the location of the PCMCIA Compact Flash drive on the computer You can type the drive letter into the space provided such as G or you can browse to the location In either case you must specify the root of the PCMCIA Compact Flash card ...

Page 104: ...2 Chapter 3 Administrative Tasks 10 When the drive address is selected click Next and the backup files will be copied from the card onto the PC When the backup is completed the new release files will be ...

Page 105: ...A 35 93 copied onto the card Then you will be prompted to insert the card back into the generator 11 Click Next and you will see the following screen instructing you to initiate the clone restore process by pressing Tools System Clone Restore ...

Page 106: ...94 Chapter 3 Administrative Tasks 12 After the clone restore is complete you will again see the menu on the generator s screen Then click on Next ...

Page 107: ...882 Video Test Instrument User Guide Rev A 35 95 ...

Page 108: ...96 Chapter 3 Administrative Tasks 13 Power cycle the generator and it will boot the upgraded firmware ...

Page 109: ...rd then use the Restore function to transfer the files from PCMCIA Compact Flash card PC Card to flash memory on the generator Note Please note that you must us a PCMCIA card that is formatted in FAT16 filesystem If you use an card that is formatted in FAT32 the 882 will not boot Important If you have custom files stored in flash memory or PC card you must back them up to your PC before upgrading ...

Page 110: ...ove the PC card from your PC and insert into the generator s PC card slot 3 If your PC does not have access to a PCMCIA slot or device use the following procedure You can skip this step if you performed Step 2 above a Access the generator s main web page For details on this see To connect directly to the generator on page 104 b Access the generator s FTP browser by choosing the FTP Browser menu it...

Page 111: ...tor files on the PC card you want to save to a backup folder on the PC e In the Instrument Files area delete all files stored on the PC card f In the Host Files area locate and select the new release files System and Library directories to transfer to the PC card g In the Host Files area click Download The Transfer Files dialog box appears h Verify that the source file or folder and the destinatio...

Page 112: ...layed 9 Restart the generator while booting from flash memory 10 Restore any custom files to flash memory or PC card Manually upgrading the generator without using PC Card This procedure allows you to transfer copy the new release files System and Library directories directly to flash memory without using a PC Card Follow this procedure to upgrade a generator without using a PC Card 1 Download the...

Page 113: ... click the down arrow by the Look in box and select tffs0 This is the generator s flash memory 7 In the Instrument Files area select all of the folders or only the specific files in the lower pane that you want to backup 8 Click Upload A Transfer Files dialog box appears 9 Verify that the source file or folder and the destination folder are correct and then click OK The Copying Files dialog box ap...

Page 114: ...click Done 19 Restart the generator while booting from flash memory 20 Restore any custom files to flash memory from backup Connecting generator directly to a PC This section describes how to connect your generator directly to a PC using a crossover cable For instructions on connecting to an Ethernet LAN see Connecting 882s to the network on page 130 Use the procedures below to set the IP addresse...

Page 115: ...r on the address digit you want to change To do this press the soft key adjacent to the arrow by the address to move the cursor left or right until it appears on the digit you want to change b Adjust the value of the digit up or down by pressing the or keys Repeat for each IP address digit you want to change 6 To save the changes press the Enter Options key The following choices appear on the gene...

Page 116: ...The IP address of the generator appears on the generator s display Refer to the procedures above Setting the 882 s IP address on page 131 for more details on accessing this display 2 Configure the IP address of your PC To enter the IP address open Windows Control Panel and then open the Network Connections window 3 In the Network Connections window right click the connection that represents your E...

Page 117: ...the address depending on the network class The host component is the last 3 digits The network component of the IP address you enter for the PC must match the network component of the generator s IP address The host component of both IP addresses must be different You do not have to specify the DNS server 5 Enter the subnet mask such that the network portion of the address is masked to a value of ...

Page 118: ...trative Tasks 7 Open a Web browser such as Internet Explorer and type the generator s IP address in the address entry field For example enter the following http 206 135 215 189 The generator web page appears in the browser ...

Page 119: ...hin three seconds The following display appears Note that you can also obtain this screen by powering up the generator and holding down any key e g Tools key 2 Choose the BootDev item by pressing the adjacent soft key 3 Do one of the following To boot from the file server press the soft key adjacent to Network Boot To boot from the generator s flash memory press the soft key adjacent to Internal F...

Page 120: ...atted in FAT16 filesystem If you use an card that is formatted in FAT32 the 882 will not boot 2 Insert the PCcard in the generator s card slot 3 Power down the generator hold down the Tools key and then re apply power to the generator The following screen appears on the generator s display 4 Choose the BootDev item and then choose the PCMCIA Boot item from the menu below 5 Press the Options Enter ...

Page 121: ...stem item by pressing the adjacent soft key The System menu appears on the generator s display as shown below ite 13 Choose the Clone item by pressing the adjacent soft key The Clone menu appears on the generator s display as shown below 14 Choose the Restore item by pressing the adjacent soft key A progress indicator appears This will take some time FileName Other InetAddr TrgtName HostAddr BootN...

Page 122: ...tName item by pressing the adjacent soft key The following appears on the generator s display 4 Change the host name as follows a Position the blinking cursor on the character you want to change To do this press the soft key adjacent to the arrow by the host name to move the cursor left or right until it appears on the character you want to change b Select the desired character by pressing the or ...

Page 123: ...etAddr 2 Choose the InetAddr by pressing the adjacent item selection key The generator s IP address and subnet mask appear on the generator s display as shown below If the IP Address configuration option is not visible press the soft key adjacent to the arrow symbol by SubnetMask until IP Address appears 3 Change the host IP address as follows a Position the blinking cursor on the digit of the IP ...

Page 124: ...tion or Telnet over an Ethernet LAN See Establishing a terminal session with the 882 on page 30 or Establishing a Telnet session with the 882 on page 33 2 Insert the PC card into the source generator 3 Press the Tools key The Tools menu appears on the generator s display as shown below 4 Choose the System item by pressing the adjacent soft key The System menu appears on the generator s display as ...

Page 125: ...a generator with a PC directly connected to a generator You will find this cloning method procedure useful if you do not have a PC Card To complete this procedure you connect the Ethernet crossover cable to the Ethernet ports of both the PC and the generator If your generators are networked over an Ethernet LAN see Cloning 882s using the 882 FTP Browser on page 143 During this procedure you will c...

Page 126: ...ndow click the down arrow by the Look in box and select tffs0 FlashMem b Select the system and library folders in the lower pane c In the Host Files area open the folder where you want to copy the files To create a new folder click New d In the Instrument Files area click Upload A confirmation dialog box appears e Click OK to copy the files 4 Close the Generator FTP Browser Note If both generators...

Page 127: ...ct tffs0 FlashMem b Select all of the files in the lower pane c Click the Delete button A confirmation dialog box appears d Click OK to delete the files 8 Copy the source system and library folders from the PC to the target generator s flash memory as follows a In the Host Files area open the folder containing the system and library folder b Select the system and library folders in the lower pane ...

Page 128: ...reset a generator To reset the generator using the command line interface 1 Establish a session with the generator using either HyperTerminal over a serial connection or Telnet over an Ethernet LAN See Establishing a terminal session with the 882 on page 30 or Establishing a Telnet session with the 882 on page 33 2 Enter one of the following commands To reset the generator enter RST To reset and c...

Page 129: ...se methods of accessing generator configuration information To view generator configuration information using the front panel 1 Press the Tools key The Tools menu appears on the generator s display as shown below 2 Choose the System item by pressing the adjacent soft key The System menu appears on the generator s display 3 Choose the About item by pressing the adjacent soft key A following message...

Page 130: ...a standard format such as DMT0660 Alternatively enter the following commands to load the format FMTL DMT0660 xml FMTU 2 Press the Content key and select the GenStats image Alternatively enter the following commands to load the GenStats image IMGL GenStats img IMGU The GenStats image appears as shown below 3 Establish a session with the generator using either HyperTerminal over a serial connection ...

Page 131: ... the System directory The second listing is for the transmitter and the third listing is for the receiver if the analyzer option is present To get a report of the genstats image or any active image 1 Press the Tools key The Tools menu appears on the generator s display as shown below 2 Choose the Reports item by pressing the adjacent soft key The Report menu appears on the generator s display 3 Ch...

Page 132: ...generator s IP address in the address entry field For example enter the following http 206 135 215 189 The generator home page appears in the browser Note You can add the page to your list of favorite pages in your Web browser to avoid retyping the IP address each time you want to access the page ...

Page 133: ...882 Video Test Instrument User Guide Rev A 35 121 6 Choose the Generated Reports item The Generator the provides a list of reports currently available as shown below ...

Page 134: ...122 Chapter 3 Administrative Tasks 7 Select the GenStats report The GenStats report then appears in the browser window as shown below You can then save the report as an web page file for distribution ...

Page 135: ...Rev A 35 123 4 Networking 882s Topics in this chapter Overview Configuring a file server Establishing a network environment Network operations Controlling a 882 remotely Upgrading 882s over a network Cloning 882s using the 882 FTP Browser ...

Page 136: ...file server This ensures that each 882 on the network is using the most current system and library files when booting and accessing files locally Control and maintain your network of 882s remotely from a single host PC You can manage the 882s through the command line interface through the Virtual Front Panel in a Web browser or by transferring files using the 882 FTP Browser 882 file system The 88...

Page 137: ... MB SDRAM 20 MB of free disk space Note If you will be using the Software Development Kit and gcc compiler to create custom images an additional 100 MB of free disk space is required Ethernet card and a connection to the corporate LAN CD ROM drive for loading the 882 system and resource files and documentation from the ResourceCD Java Runtime Environment 1 5 or later Installing an FTP server Setti...

Page 138: ...le server PC and create the FTP site directory You can use Microsoft Internet Information Services shown below 2 Configure the FTP site properties a On the Home Directory tab enter the name of the Local Path your default directory for the FTP server By default Microsoft Internet Information Services ...

Page 139: ... Inetpub ftproot as the local path as shown below You can use this path or click Browse to select a different path b On the Home Directory tab specify read write access c On the Security Accounts tab select Allow only anonymous connections and then click OK ...

Page 140: ...the FTP site on the file server To copy 882 system and resource files to the file server 1 Create a download folder in a convenient location on your PC 2 Access the download page of the Quantum Data Web site at http www quantumdata com support downloads 3 Copy the contents of the 882 folder from the download folder to the root folder on the FTP server The resulting folder structure on the file ser...

Page 141: ...882 Video Test Instrument User Guide Rev A 35 129 4 Move the vxWorks file out of the System folder and into the ftproot folder ...

Page 142: ...hernet port on the 882 and a LAN access jack The file server is also connected to the LAN in the same manner Another type of network scenario is to directly connect a single 882 to a file server For a direct connection you must use a crossover Ethernet cable and connect it from the Ethernet port on the file server to the 882 Ethernet port as shown below Note If you are using a PC that is connected...

Page 143: ...o control the 882 over a network or want the 882 to share resources located on a file server Typically your site s LAN administrator will provide you with IP addresses for each 882 Depending on how your site s LAN is configured your LAN adminstrator may also provide you with a subnet mask To set the IP address of the 882 1 Press the Tools key The Tools menu appears on the 882 s display as shown be...

Page 144: ...le press the soft key adjacent to the arrow symbol by IP Address until SubnetMask appears b Position the blinking cursor on the subnet mask digit you want to change To do this press the soft key adjacent to the arrow by the subnet mask to move the cursor left or right until it appears on the digit you want to change c Adjust the value of the digit up or down by pressing the or keys Repeat for each...

Page 145: ... as shown below 4 Press the Settings key The Network Connection screen appears on the 882 s display as shown below If the DHCP configuration option is not visible press the soft key adjacent to the arrow symbol by SubnetMask or IP Address until the DHCP configuration screen appears 5 Change the setting to YES by pressing the key System Sequence Probe AFC Analyzer Reports ImgShift CEC Clock Clone C...

Page 146: ...ver in each 882 so the 882 can communicate with the file server In addition you can also enter a name called the Host Name for the file server To specify the IP address and host name of the file server 1 Press the Tools key The Tools menu appears on the 882 s display as shown below 2 Choose the System item by pressing the adjacent soft key The System menu appears on the 882 s display as shown belo...

Page 147: ...ress the soft key adjacent to the arrow symbol by Host Address until Host Name appears b Position the blinking cursor on the character you want to change To do this press the soft key adjacent to the arrow by the name to move the cursor left or right until it appears on the character you want to change c Select the desired character by pressing the or keys to scroll through uppercase letters lower...

Page 148: ... procedures to boot a stalled 882 refer to Reconfiguring and booting a stalled generator on page 107 To configure the 882 to boot from the file server 1 Copy the vxWorks folder into the ftproot folder using the procedures described in Copying resource files to the FTP site on the file server on page 128 2 Press the Tools key The Tools menu appears on the 882 s display as shown below 3 Choose the S...

Page 149: ...ands FMTP hostname Library Formats IMGP hostname Library Images SEQP hostname Library Sequences For example if your file server host name is Host01 you would enter the following command to set the format path to the Formats directory on the file server FMTP Host01 Library Formats Note The hostname portion of the path is case sensitive The 882 will now display the formats on the file server when yo...

Page 150: ...er you want to use For example to use the Formats folder press the soft key adjacent to Formats The contents of the selected folder appears on the 882 s display 5 Choose an item by pressing the adjacent soft key The path is now set to the selected folder on the file server ...

Page 151: ...rmats you can copy these objects to a 882 if you want the 882 to load them locally For example you may want to create a new image on the file server PC and then copy the image to certain 882s in your production environment The 882 FTP Browser enables you to copy files between the file server PC and the 882s You can also use the 882 FTP Browser to copy files between media in the 882 For example you...

Page 152: ...own operational state should the upgrade fail To begin an upgrade you must either have a CD ROM containing the new files or download the files from the Quantum Data Web site You will copy the new files to your file server PC which must be connected to the LAN through the Ethernet cable Overview of upgrade procedures The following are the high level steps for performing a complete upgrade system an...

Page 153: ... page 140 for instructions You might want to back up only the custom files on the 882 to a custom folder on the file server you create Alternatively if you are sure you want to restore a 882 with its current set of library files you can simply backup its entire library folder to a custom folder on the file server Copying files to the PC file server After you have backed up your existing files you ...

Page 154: ...ing the generator locally on page 97 If you are also installing the new files on the 882 s PC card you must also remove the current files from the PC card Copying the new files to each 882 Now you are ready to copy the new updated system and firmware gateware and library resource files to the 882s to complete the upgrade See Working with the 882 FTP Browser on page 23 for instructions Reboot the 8...

Page 155: ...2 This section describes how to clone 882s by copying system and library files over the network using the 882 FTP Browser To clone a 882 1 Access the 882 s FTP browser by choosing the FTP Browser menu item from the main web page The 882 FTP Browser appears The Instrument Files area shows the files stored on the 882 The Host Files area shows the files stored on the PC 2 Open a second Web browser Yo...

Page 156: ...nfirmation dialog box appears d Click OK to delete the files 4 Copy all of the files in the source 882 s flash memory to the target 882 s flash memory as follows a In the Instrument Files area of source 882 s 882 FTP Browser window click the down arrow by the Look in box and select tffs0 This is the source 882 s flash memory b Select the System and Library folders in the lower pane c Hold down the...

Page 157: ...th Formats Topics in this chapter Overview Format library Viewing the source list of formats Configuring format parameters Format Editor Overview Creating a new format using the Format Editor Creating custom formats using the command line interface Format catalogs ...

Page 158: ...mmand line interface and the format editor to view formats create and customize formats and create format catalogs The following functions are described in this chapter Viewing the Source list of formats You can view the Source list of formats using the front panel or the command line interface Creating formats You can create new formats through the format editor or the command line interface View...

Page 159: ... to five character color coding scheme indicator followed by optional characters that indicate format adjustments Example Color coding schemes NTSC PAL Adjustments to the format 4x sampling rate is four times the color sub carrier frequency 44 NTSC with color sub carrier frequency of 4 43361875 MHz as opposed to 3 58 sampling rate is reduced in order to make pixels square jp NTSC Japan NTSC withou...

Page 160: ...s indicate the active vertical lines in the format the next characters indicate the frame tracing method and the last two optional characters indicate the frame rate Example Active vertical lines 480 active lines with 525 total lines 1035 active lines with 1125 total lines Frame tracing methods p progressive i interlaced s segmented frame interlace e g 1080s24 where a 24p frame is segmented into t...

Page 161: ...indicate the vendor ID using the EISA ID for example IBM SUN VSC or the display type the next two characters indicate the approximate horizontal resolution the next two digits indicate the frame rate which will be half the field rate with interlace scanning and the final character designates the aperture used only when the aperture is not A Example Vendor ID EISA SMT for VESA digital Safe Mode Tim...

Page 162: ...1 25 1 Graphics workstation 5x4 1280x1024 1600x1280 A 1 33 1 Academy 4x3 640x480 800x600 1024x768 1280x960 1600x1200 B 1 44 1 Big 13x9 IMAX T 1 50 1 Three halves 3x2 1152x768 Apple Computer V 1 56 1 PALplus WWS case 2 14x9 see ITU R BT 1119 D 1 60 1 VESA CVT proposed 16x10 1728x1080 1280x800 E 1 67 1 European film 15x9 or 5x3 1200x720 1280x768 1800x1080 a k a 1 66 H 1 78 1 High definition image 16...

Page 163: ...lly J Justify non linear horizontal expand more near edges K Keep safe shrink to avoid cropping provide safe title P Pan Scan truncate M Mirror horizontally rear projection Other modifiers I Inverse undo operator for example S Scope and SI Inverse Scope O Orthogonally rotate operator effect or aperture 90 degrees X Wildcard or special ...

Page 164: ...ist using the front panel Press the Source key The list of formats appears on the generator s display as shown below To see all of the formats press the and keys to scroll through the list To view the formats in the Source list using the command line interface 1 Establish a session with the generator using either HyperTerminal over a serial connection or Telnet over an Ethernet LAN See Establishin...

Page 165: ...ider range of values Note that format setting and option changes made through the front panel do not persist through power cycles or changes in formats If you make a change to a format parameter then choose another format and then go back to the format you changed you will find that the parameter has been reset to the default value for that format To view and modify a format s options using the fr...

Page 166: ...ey 2 Press the Settings key The format settings appear on the generator s display as shown below Press the soft keys adjacent to the arrows to see all of the format settings Refer to the table below to locate the setting you want to change 3 To change a setting value a Position the blinking cursor on the value you want to change To do this press the soft key adjacent to the arrow by the setting va...

Page 167: ...rection GAMA GAMC Active Format CXAR EXAR SXAR EXCX SXEX SXCX XAFD Manual Border XLBW XRBW XTBH XBBH Canvas PELD NPPP Analog Video AVST AVSS AVSB AVPS AVPG AVCS Analog Sync ASSS ASCT EQUF Analog Sync Gates ASRG ASGG ASBG TSPG Digital Video DVST DVQM NCPP NBPC NLNK CTLM BALG PREG DVSP DVPT DVSM DVSS Digital Sync DSST DSCT Digital Sync Polarity HSPP VSPP CSPP FSPP PSPP Digital Sync Gates HSPG VSPG C...

Page 168: ...y 2 Press the Content key and choose the Format image The format parameters appear on the connected display To view format parameters for all formats in the Source list 1 Display the Format image as described above Encoding DAST NDAS NDAC NBPA Components DAXG DAXA Mix SDMG DADG DALS Channels DACA DACG Audio Timing Sampling Rate ARAT BRAT Parameter Class Parameter Type Parameters ...

Page 169: ...ssing the Options key and choosing More until a appears next to it Alternatively to disable image versions using the command line interface enter the following command ISUB 0 Disables sub images Viewing and modifying format parameters via the command line Procedures for viewing and modifying the format parameters through the command line are provided below To view and modify a format s options usi...

Page 170: ...30 or Establishing a Telnet session with the 882 on page 33 2 Load the format whose parameters you want to view by entering the following command FMTL format Specify a valid format name FMTU 3 To view parameters enter the commands for the format settings you want to view For example to view the horizontal resolution vertical resolution horizontal period and analog video sync type enter the followi...

Page 171: ...from your PC to the generator See Copying files from a PC to a 882 on page 23 for instructions A sample format XML is shown below xml version 1 0 encoding UTF 8 DATAOBJ HEADER TYPE FMT VERSION 1 0 HEADER DATA AVPS 7 5000000E 00 AVPS GAMA 2 2000000E 00 GAMA AVSS 0 7000000E 00 AVSS ASSS 0 3000000E 00 ASSS HSIZ 1 1200000E 01 HSIZ VSIZ 8 3999996E 00 VSIZ HRAT 3 1500000E 04 HRAT TUNE 1 0000000E 00 TUNE...

Page 172: ... original version of the application The information below pertains to the new Format Editor This Format Editor requires Internet Browser version 6 x or newer If you have Internet Browser version 5 x you will need to upgrade The main screen of the Format Editor is shown below Format Editor Basic Window Configuration and Operation The Format Editor is a windowing application You can open up many wi...

Page 173: ...will close the window Format Editor Top Level Menus The top level menus of the Format Editor are shown below The following table describes the top level menus in the Format Editor Menu Description File New Format Opens up the New Format Timing window Enables you to create new formats equivalent to clicking on the New Format activation button New Report Opens up the Report Format window equivalent ...

Page 174: ...it Closes out the Format Editor Instrument Connect Enables you to establish a connection between the Format Editor and the 882E A dialog pops up to enable you to enter the IP address of the 882E you wish to connect to FTP Browser Opens up the FTP browser application which enables you to transfer files between your host PC and the 882E generator that you are connected to CMD Terminal Opens up the C...

Page 175: ...ect pull down menu New Format Opens up the New Format at the Timing tab Enables you to create new formats This is equivalent to selecting the New Format from the File menu New Report Opens up the Report Format window This is equivalent to selecting New Report from the File menu Enables you to view list of formats and their primary parameters New Source Menu Opens up the Source Menu This is equival...

Page 176: ...at Timing Tab on page 166 below for details on each of the parameters General Selecting the General tab opens up an application screen that enables you to define the sync level pixel depth gamma and pedestal parameters for a custom format or modify these parameters of an existing format See New Format General Tab on page 170 below for details on each of the parameters Digital Video Selecting the G...

Page 177: ...ou to select the type of 882 unit that you are viewing problems for Options are C CA 882C or 882CA D 882D E 882E EA DP 882E HDMI 882EA HDMI 882E DisplayPort Interface Pull down menu Enables you to select the type of interface you are defining a format for Options are Analog Component analog RGB or YPbPr CVBS Composite Video Baseband Signal S Video Y C DVI DVI from the DVI output HDMI D DVI from th...

Page 178: ...ter 5 Working with Formats New Format Timing Tab The Timing window of the Format Editor Timing is shown below This window is activated by pressing the Timing tab The main panel of the Timing tab is shown below ...

Page 179: ...r of pixels Machine or microseconds Time in the blanking preceding the horizontal sync pulse Parameter HSPD Pulse Width The number of pixels Machine or microseconds Time of the horizontal sync pulse Parameter HSPW Vertical Rate The vertical frame rate of the format Parameter VRAT Active The number of active lines machine or milliseconds Time of the vertical video Parameter VRES Blank The number of...

Page 180: ...modified Field Description Serration with Adjustment Sets the length of the serration period on composite video to a given number of pixels from the format s nominal default value as required by some military STANAG video formats Valid range is in pixels with integer values from 0 to less than HSPW in pixels Parameter HVSA H to V Delay Displays the current value for the pixel delay between horizon...

Page 181: ...nes Time Activates the fields in the timing tab window such that the timing parameter values are expressed and settable in terms of time increments such as milliseconds and microseconds Scan Type Progressive Sets the format scan type to Progressive Parameter SCAN 2 Interlace Sets the format scan type to Interlaced Parameter SCAN 1 check boxes Back Porch Toggles the Pulse Delay field so that the va...

Page 182: ...ort LVDI outputs DC Balance Not used Flat Front Porch Determines if composite sync will have all equalization pulses removed in the vertical sync front porch delay period as required by certain military HOBO and Maverik video formats Parameter EQUF Tri Level Sync Enables or disables Tri Level sync Parameter TSPG Repeat Field Determines if identical video information is output for each field of an ...

Page 183: ...ption Function Horizontal Entry field The horizontal aperture of the display under test Vertical Entry field The vertical aperture of the display under test Unit Size Radio Buttons inches Selects the unit size of the Horizontal and Vertical Size entities to be expressed in inches mm Selects the unit size of the Horizontal and Vertical Size entities to be expressed in millimeters Field Entity Type ...

Page 184: ...172 Chapter 5 Working with Formats New Format General Tab Center Panel The center panel of the General tab in the Format Editor is shown below ...

Page 185: ... Digital Direct VI MDA Digital Direct RGB Digital Direct RGBI CGA Digital Direct RrGgBb EGA Digital Component YYY Digital Component RGB Digital Component YCbCr SDTV ITU R BT 601 5 Digital Component YCbCr HDTV Legacy SMPTE 240M Digital Component YCbCr HDTV Modern ITU R BT 709 5 Digital BT 601 xvYCC Digital BT 709 xvYCC Sync Type Sets the sync type of the format The parameter is SSST The following a...

Page 186: ...R BT 470 6 PAL SMPTE 296M EIA CEA HDTV Double Serrated ref SMPTE 296M SMPTE 295M EIA CA HDTV Double Serrated ref SMPTE 295M SMPTE 274M EIA CA HDTV Double Serrated ref SMPTE 240M 260M 274M DCS Type Sets the digital composite sync type of the format The parameter is DSCT The following are the selections None American ORed American Single Serrated American Double Serrated ref SMPTE 170M NTSC Australi...

Page 187: ...arate American Separate HDTV European Separate HDTV Japanese Separate HDTV Australian AS 493 1 200X HS VS IEC 62315 1 Australian AS 493 1 200X HS VS SubCarrier Sets the composite video subcarrier type Only valid when the color encoding parameter AVST is set to Analog Composite with Subcarrier The parameter is AVSC The following are the selections None NTSC M NTSC 443 PAL BDGHI PAL NC PAL N PAL M P...

Page 188: ...to set the Pedestal once the Pedestal check box above is enabled checked The allowable ranges of values is 0 IRE to 100 IRE Parameter AVPS Analog Cal Mode Pull down select Sets the analog calibration mode Determines how the generator tests and calibrates its analog video outputs Parameter AVCM The following are the selections Interpolate Measure Interpolate Measure Set Absolute Test Levels Analog ...

Page 189: ...must be selected with the SSST command Parameter VSPG C Enables and disables the digital vertical sync output To use digital composite sync the digital composite sync must be selected with the SSST command Parameter CSPG Digital Sync Polarity Select buttons H Determines whether the digital horizontal sync pulse polarity is positive going or negative going To set the digital horizontal sync polarit...

Page 190: ...xel double clocking factor for whole line This parameter is used to boost the clock rate to the minimum supported by TMDS interface Allowable values are 1 one clock per pixel 2 two clocks per pixel Parameter NCPP Pixels per Pixel Entry field Specifies the number of pixels per pixel This parameter specifies the pixel repetition factor for the active portion of the line Allowable values are 0 disabl...

Page 191: ...t half the pixel rate Luminance is sampled at the full pixel rate Requires that the YCbCr color mode be selected with the DVST command 4 4 4 Color difference components and luminance component is sampled at the full pixel rate Requires that the YCbCr color mode be selected with the DVST command Parameter DVSM Bits per Color Component Pull down select Specifies the number of bits per component Allo...

Page 192: ...180 Chapter 5 Working with Formats New Format Digital Audio Tab The Format Editor Digital Audio tab is shown below The table that follows describes each of the fields in the tab ...

Page 193: ...nal LPCM IEC 61937 w AC 3 Dolby Digital MP2 Video CD not used MP3 MPEG1 Layer 3 not used MPEG2 5 1 channels Advanced Audio Coding AAC MPEG2 7 1 channel CBR or VBR IEC 61937 w DTS ATRAC Parameter is DAST Level Shift Entry field Sets the digital audio level shift value The valid values are 0 15 dBFS Parameter is DALS Sampling Rate Entry field Sets the digital audio sampling rate The valid values are...

Page 194: ... audio content available The valid values are 0 through 4095 Refer to EIA CEA 861 x Parameter is DAXA Mix Down Gate Check box Sets the digital audio down mix gate The valid values are enabled or disabled Parameter is DADG Channels Available Entry field Sets the digital audio channels available The valid values are 0 through 255 Refer to EIA CEA 861 x Parameter is DACA Channels Gated Entry field Se...

Page 195: ...D tab Heading Field Description Function Active Format Content Aspect Ratio Sets the aspect ratio of the source image content The valid parameter range is 0 75 to 2 39 Parameter CXAR Embedded Aspect Ratio Sets the aspect ratio of the extended image content The valid parameter range is 0 75 to 2 39 Parameter EXAR Signal Aspect Ratio Sets the aspect ratio of the video signal image content The valid ...

Page 196: ...EXCX Signal from Extended Apert Map Enables you to set the mapping type for mapping EXAR shaped image content into the SXAR shaped signal interface Parameter SXEX Bars Left Sets the left side letterbox bars in pixels Right Sets the right side letterbox bars in pixels Top Sets the top letterbox bars in pixels Bottom Sets the bottom letterbox bars in pixels Heading Field Description Function ...

Page 197: ...882 Video Test Instrument User Guide Rev A 35 185 Format Editor New Report This subsection defines the New Report screen The contents of the New Report tab is shown below ...

Page 198: ...h Entry Field The path to the directory where the list of formats used to configure a format list Edit Path Activation Button Enables you to change the path to a list of formats Button Description Function Configure Clicking on the Configure button will open up a dialog box that enables you to configure which format parameters appear in the report and in what order Fill Cancel Clicking on the Fill...

Page 199: ...ber of active pixels Machine or microseconds Time of the horizontal video The total is the sum of the Active and Blanking Parameter HTOT Horizontal Active The number of active pixels machine or microseconds Time of the horizontal video Parameter HRES Horizontal Sync Pulse Polarity Indicates whether the digital horizontal sync pulse polarity is positive going or negative going Parameter HSPP Horizo...

Page 200: ... you to move format parameters from the Column Choices to the Columns in the Table that will appear in the reports Remove Activation Button Enables you to remove format parameters from the Columns that will appear in the table Remove All Activation Button Enables you to remove all the format parameters currently shown in the Column in the Table field Move Up Activation Button Enables you to change...

Page 201: ...nect Activation Button Enables you to connect to an 882 generator When clicked a dialog box will pop up enabling you to specify an IP address to connect to Save and Use Activation Button Enables you to save the format source list to the generator you are connected to and then apply this list to the current generator configuration Reset Source Menu Activation Button Type Pull down menu Always set t...

Page 202: ...y i e set by the Path entry field Remove Activation Button Enables you to remove formats from the Source Menu Listing fields so that they will not appear in a particular format directory set by the Path entry field Remove All Activation Button Enables you to remove all the formats currently shown in the Source Menu Listing field Move Up Activation Button Enables you to change the order move up the...

Page 203: ...de Rev A 35 191 Format Editor Open This subsection defines the Open File dialog box The Open dialog box is shown below This enables you to open an existing format file either from your PC Local tab or from the 882 instrument Remote tab ...

Page 204: ...at Editor Save This subsection defines the Save File dialog box The Save dialog box is shown below You use the Save function to store a format that you have defined You can either save it to your PC Local tab or the 882 instrument Remote tab ...

Page 205: ...at Editor 1 Open a Web browser such as Internet Explorer and type the generator s IP address in the address entry field For example enter the following http 206 135 215 189 The generator home page appears in the browser Note You can add the page to your list of favorite pages in your Web browser to avoid retyping the IP address each time you want to access the page 2 Select Format Editor The Forma...

Page 206: ...194 Chapter 5 Working with Formats 3 Click New Format The Timing tab of the format definition page appears as shown below ...

Page 207: ...t you will have to edit the path by clicking on the Edit Path activation button on the right side of the Path field 5 Navigate and select a format file to use as a starting point for defining your new format or to make simple modifications on an existing format 6 The format parameters of the selected format will appear in the new format Timing window as shown below 7 Modify the parameters as requi...

Page 208: ... applies the new value to the timing algorithm and updates any values dependent on the value you entered or changed For example to change the horizontal resolution to 660 enter the value in the Active field under Pixels in the Horizontal area You will notice that the Format Editor has calculated and written values to the Blank and Period fields as indicated by the red calculator symbol Although th...

Page 209: ...882 Video Test Instrument User Guide Rev A 35 197 Note It is recommended that you save custom formats in a directory on the PCcard because of file storage limitations in the flash memory ...

Page 210: ...ollowing procedure to create a new format using interactive commands To create a new format using the command line interface 1 Establish a session with the generator using HyperTerminal over a serial connection or Telnet over an Ethernet LAN For instructions see Establishing a terminal session with the 882 on page 30 and Establishing a Telnet session with the 882 on page 33 2 Set the format path t...

Page 211: ...can configure the generator to show only the formats contained in the catalogs you use regularly Furthermore you can create your own catalogs and enable them With 2 5 x an enhancement has been made to the format catalog function You can now configure the generator such that your custom formats appear in the Source list along with the 882 s default formats Use the following procedures to create and...

Page 212: ...0659 DMT00675 DMT0685 DMT0856 DMT0860 2 Establish a session with the generator using HyperTerminal over a serial connection or Telnet over an Ethernet LAN For instructions see Establishing a terminal session with the 882 on page 30 and Establishing a Telnet session with the 882 on page 33 3 Verify or set directory path is set to the FormatLib directory using the following command DIRP to view the ...

Page 213: ... repeatedly until the Library listing is shown and select Library c Enable the User catalog by pressing the adjacent softkey such that it has a plus sign next to it The custom formats that you saved in the Userdata directory will now appear in the Source list with other default formats that have been enabled To remove a format from a format catalog 1 Establish a session with the generator using Hy...

Page 214: ...ing command DIRK tffs0 Library FormatLib Vesa1 xml deletes catalog named Vesa1 3 Power cycle the generator To delete a format catalog through the Generator FTP Browser 1 Access the source generator s Virtual Front Panel See Front panel interface on page 9 2 From the Options menu upper left corner of the Virtual Front Panel choose the FTP Browser menu item The Generator FTP Browser appears 3 In the...

Page 215: ...882 Video Test Instrument User Guide Rev A 35 203 5 Select the catalog you want to delete 6 Click the Delete button to delete the catalog ...

Page 216: ...204 Chapter 5 Working with Formats ...

Page 217: ...882 Video Test Instrument User Guide Rev A 35 205 6 Using GPIB Interface Topics in this chapter Overview Setting the GPIB port address Queries and commands Status queries and control ...

Page 218: ...rator from an external computer or terminal using the optional IEEE 488 GPIB interface The GPIB interface enables the generator to be used as a programmable video signal source for integration into automated test systems that use IEEE 488 or GPIB communications between instruments ...

Page 219: ...t to change c Adjust the value of the digit up or down by pressing the or keys Repeat for each address digit you want to change 4 To save the changes press the Enter Options key The following choices appear on the generator s display To save the changes choose the Exit Save Change item by pressing the adjacent soft key To exit without saving the changes choose the Exit No Change item To return to ...

Page 220: ...208 Chapter 6 Using GPIB Interface 3 Enter the following command to set the address GPIB address When the address is changed with the GPIB command the change takes place as soon at the command is issued ...

Page 221: ...s illustrated in the following figure Commands Commands instruct the generator to set a parameter to the value given or perform some function not requiring any additional data Commands which have an asterisk as their first character are common commands as defined by the IEEE 488 2 standard and generally operate the same in all instruments All commands are listed and described in Appendix A Command...

Page 222: ...t can be read by the controller The generator has an output queue that is 255 bytes long When a message is present in the output buffer the MAV message available bit in the Status Byte register is set This varies slightly from the 488 2 standard in that the MAV bit will be set only when at least one complete response message is present in the output queue A complete response message consists of re...

Page 223: ... cr lf R R Where cr and lf are the carriage return and line feed characters respectively Note Handshaking routines should only look for and not R In the future the R part of the prompt may change for example may be expanded to indicate the current path Bench top generators output the following prompt on their serial port after finishing the power on procedure R This feature allows ATE systems to k...

Page 224: ...also works with GPIB and RS 232 protocols as well Completion handshake The generator returns a prompt immediately after an FMTU IMGU ALLU BOOT INIT or SCAL command is received even if these commands have not finished executing If the system controlling the generator must know when the process started by one of these commands has been completed then append OPC to the command string For example the ...

Page 225: ...m the controller There are many conditions which may cause the generator to request service For more information about these conditions see the SRE command description page 472 The table below lists the status commands and queries Status commands and queries Definition ESE Sets the Event Status Enable register to the given mask value When a bit in the Event Status register goes high and the corres...

Page 226: ...tatus Indicates that the generator has a reason for requesting service RQS Request service This bit is read only by executing a serial poll of the generator 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Logical OR 7 6 ESB MAV 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 RQS MSS Service Request Generation 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Logical OR Power On User Request Command Error Execution Error Device Dependent Error Query Error Request Control Operation Complet...

Page 227: ...ates that all operations have been completed RQC Request control Indicates that a device is requesting control The generator will never request control so this bit will always be 0 QYE Query error Indicates that a query request was made while the generator was in deadlock DDE Device dependent error Indicates that the generator encountered an error exe cuting a command EXE Execution error Indicates...

Page 228: ...CS the generator is under local control and all front panel controls are enabled Any remote messages received are stored for processing when the generator enters the remote state again The generator enters the remote state REMS if the REN line is true and the generator is addressed to listen In the local with lockout state LWLS the generator is under local control and all front panel controls are ...

Page 229: ...Video Test Instrument User Guide Rev A 35 217 7 Working with Images Topics in this chapter Overview Viewing the Content list of images Creating custom images Rendering bitmap images Creating image catalogs ...

Page 230: ...render them by selecting the image through the front panel or through the command line interface When you select one of these images it gets linked compiled and stored in the generator s cache Please refer to the SDK manual for details on creating custom images using the API You can create static images through the command line interface using the image primitive commands such as RECT draw rectang...

Page 231: ...the front panel Press the Content key A list of images appears on the generator s display as shown below You can scroll through the list using the and keys Viewing and modifying image options Procedures for viewing and modifying the image options through the front panel are provided below To view and modify a format s options using the front panel 1 Press the Contents key and choose an image by pr...

Page 232: ...ersions in the Content list 1 Select an image by pressing the Content key 2 Enable and view image versions as follows a Press the Options key The following menu appears on the generator s display b Choose the More item by pressing the adjacent soft key until a and Rendition appears next to the item c Press the and keys to advance through the image versions Alternatively to enable and view image ve...

Page 233: ...1 3 When you are finished disable image versions by pressing the Options key and choosing More until a appears next to it Alternatively to disable image versions using the command line interface enter the following command ISUB 0 Disables sub images ...

Page 234: ... to 480 image drawing primitives IMGE ends an image editing session IMGA path new_image saves image as new_image in specified path OUTG 1 gates all video and sync outputs on IMGU draws the image ALLU applies buffer to the generator hardware 2 Save the text file with a txt extension 3 Set the image path to the image folder where you want to store your image IMGP tffs0 Library Images sets image path...

Page 235: ...OS White TRIA Magenta50 319 38 254 133 383 133 GrayPat100 OVAL Green50 129 97 256 192 GrayPat100 RECT White 129 97 8 376 GrayPat75 RECT White 129 97 502 9 GrayPat50 RECT White 129 97 503 374 GrayPat100 OVAL Blue50 129 97 426 191 GrayPat100 OVAL Red50 129 97 84 192 GrayPat100 LINE White 256 352 384 352 TEXT White 253 393 sys16 TEST IMAGE IMGE ends an editing session IMGA tffs0 Library Images MyImag...

Page 236: ...DATA PRIM RECT White 129 97 7 8 graypat25 PRIM PRIM GRID White 3 3 PRIM PRIM LIMI White PRIM PRIM CROS White PRIM PRIM TRIA Magenta50 319 38 254 133 383 133 graypat100 PRIM PRIM OVAL Green50 129 97 256 192 graypat100 PRIM PRIM RECT White 129 97 8 376 graypat75 PRIM PRIM RECT White 129 97 502 9 graypat50 PRIM PRIM RECT White 129 97 503 374 graypat100 PRIM PRIM OVAL Blue50 129 97 426 191 graypat100 ...

Page 237: ...necessary place the generator in Basic mode by pressing and holding the Tools key 4 Press the Content key A list of images appears on the generator s display 5 Press the soft key adjacent to the desired image to render the bitmap on the display To render a bitmap image using the command line interface 1 Copy the bitmap image to the Image folder on either the file server or the generator s flash me...

Page 238: ...226 Chapter 7 Working with Images 4 Enter the following commands to select and render the image from flash memory or PC card IMGL image_name Select the test image IMGU Draw the selected test image ...

Page 239: ...DVST 10 is digital RGB color mode If you have a format and configuration with color difference YPbPr or YCbCr you see a reduction or increase of the chrominance difference values but the Y component values will remain Therefore as your reduce the color component values for red green and blue you will see a pronounced green image This subsection describes these procedures To increment or decrement ...

Page 240: ...modify by pressing the Content key Alternatively you can enter the following command IMGL SMPTEBar Loads the SMPTEbar test image IMGU Renders the test image that is loaded 2 Enter the following commands to select and render the image LEVP R 33 Sets the red component at 33 of maximum color LEVP G 50 Sets the green component at 50 of maximum color LEVP B 66 Sets the blue component at 66 of maximum c...

Page 241: ...mage catalogs is a two step process The first step is to create the catalog The second step is to add the catalog to the Content library Once in the Content library you can enable one or more catalogs to control which images appear when you press the Content key Creating an image catalog The process for creating image catalogs is somewhat different than creating format catalogs The generator is no...

Page 242: ...l Front Panel See Working with the Virtual Front Panel on page 20 2 From the Options menu upper left corner of the Virtual Front Panel choose the FTP Browser menu item The Generator FTP Browser appears 3 In the Instrument Files area click the down arrow by the Look in box and select tffs0 This is the generator s flash memory ...

Page 243: ...te a catalog that includes the following images for testing CRT televisions SMPTE133 SMPTEBar TVBar100 PulseBar Regulate Geom_1 Or you may want to create a catalog that includes custom images created using the SDK or the command line Ramp Flat barpulse myimage SMPTE133 Grays32 2 Establish a session with the generator using either HyperTerminal over a serial connection or Telnet over an Ethernet LA...

Page 244: ...ne NAMI 4 tffs0 Library Images barpulse o adds a custom image created through the SDK NAMI 4 Cache0 Images SMPTE133 NAMI 6 Cache0 Images Grays32 add Grays32 to catalog DIRE ends the directory editing session DIRA tffs0 Library ImageLib FPDImages saves the catalog DIRL tffs0 Library ImageLib FPDImages loads the FPDImages catalog DIRU applies FPDImages catalog To restore the default image library 1 ...

Page 245: ...er HyperTerminal over a serial connection or Telnet over an Ethernet LAN see Establishing a terminal session with the 882 on page 30 or Establishing a Telnet session with the 882 on page 33 2 To remove an image from a catalog enter the following commands DIRL tffs0 Library ImageLib TVImages loads the TVImages catalog DIRT ContentLib identifies directory as a content directory DIRB begins a directo...

Page 246: ...l Front Panel on page 20 2 From the Options menu upper left corner of the Virtual Front Panel choose the FTP Browser menu item The Generator FTP Browser appears 3 In the Instrument Files area click the down arrow by the Look in box and select tffs0 This is the generator s flash memory 4 Double click the Library folder and then double click the ImageLib folder to open it ...

Page 247: ...Video Test Instrument User Guide Rev A 35 235 5 Select the catalog file you want to delete and then click the Delete button A message appears asking you to confirm that you want to delete the file Click OK ...

Page 248: ...236 Chapter 7 Working with Images ...

Page 249: ...eo Test Instrument User Guide Rev A 35 237 8 Working with Test Sequences Topics in this chapter Overview Viewing the test sequence list Running a test sequence Creating a test sequence Deleting a test sequence ...

Page 250: ...ages Test sequences provide a way to progress through a pre defined sequence of format and images either manually or automatically Multiple test sequences can be stored in the generator and selected by the operator This section describes how to create and run test sequences New test sequences are created through the command line interface and stored as XML files Existing sequences can be modified ...

Page 251: ...st sequence list using the command line interface Use the following procedure to view the test sequence list using the command line interface To view the sequence list using the command line interface 1 Establish a session with the generator using either HyperTerminal over a serial connection or Telnet over an Ethernet LAN See Establishing a terminal session with the 882 on page 30 or Establishing...

Page 252: ...Chapter 8 Working with Test Sequences SEQP card0 Library Sequence 3 List the contents of the sequence folder by entering the following command SEQQ 1 4 lists test sequences from the first through the fourth ...

Page 253: ... it continuously loops repeats the sequence steps Automatic mode which enables automatic progression through the sequence list with continuous looping The instructions for running test sequences using the front panel and command line interface are provided below Running a test sequence using the front panel To run a sequence using the front panel 1 Press the Tools key The Tools menu appears as sho...

Page 254: ...ge the sequence mode 1 With a sequence running press the Options key The mode menu appears as shown below 2 Choose the desired mode by pressing the adjacent soft key 3 Press the Options key to return to the sequence settings Running a test sequence using the command line interface To run a sequence using the command line interface 1 Establish a session with the generator using either HyperTerminal...

Page 255: ...utput status appear on the right and the color gate status appears on the left as shown below If the sequence is set to auto it begins running Otherwise press the and keys to move through the sequence steps To stop a sequence Enter the following command SMOD 0 SEQU To run a sequence at power up 1 Run the sequence in the desired mode 2 Cycle the power to the generator Depending on the selected mode...

Page 256: ...rly When a format is loaded during a test sequence its video type defaults to analog So if you want to create for example a test sequence for HDMI for testing high definition televisions you will need to create the HDMI version of the format setting DVST appropriately Examples are provided below Use the following procedure to create a test sequence and save it to the sequence directory on the gene...

Page 257: ...ent step to five seconds FMTL 480p59 loads a format IMGL SMPTEbar loads an image STEP 2 selects a step to be edited SDLY 5 0 sets the delay for the current step to five seconds FMTL 720p60 loads a second format same image IMGL Outline1 loads an image STEP 3 selects a step to be edited SDLY 5 0 sets the delay for the current step to five seconds FMTL 1080i29 loads a third format IMGL Geom_4 loads a...

Page 258: ...the generator using either HyperTerminal over a serial connection or Telnet over an Ethernet LAN See Establishing a terminal session with the 882 on page 30 or Establishing a Telnet session with the 882 on page 33 5 Transfer the text file to the generator For example to transfer the file using HyperTerminal do the following a On the Transfer menu click Send Text File The Send Text File dialog box ...

Page 259: ...1080p60 you might name the new format as 1080p60h 2 Using a text editor open a text editor on your computer and enter the following commands to create a three step sequence named MySeq SEQN initializes the sequence edit buffer SEQB begins a sequence editing session STEP 1 selects a step to be edited SDLY 5 0 sets the delay for the current step to five seconds FMTL 1080p60h loads an HDMI digital fo...

Page 260: ...the following a On the Transfer menu click Send Text File The Send Text File dialog box appears b Select the text file you want to send and then click Open HyperTerminal displays the commands as they are sent c Press Enter once to ensure that the last command is sent Editing a test sequence XML file You can modify an existing test sequence by copying the sequence XML file from the generator to a P...

Page 261: ...3 img IMG DELY 3 0000000E 00 DELY STEP STEP FMT tffs0 Library TestAnalog DMT0685 xml FMT IMG Flat img IMG DELY 3 0000000E 00 DELY STEP STEP FMT tffs0 Library TestAnalog DMT0856 xml FMT IMG Grill_11 img IMG DELY 3 0000000E 00 DELY STEP STEP FMT tffs0 Library TestAnalog DMT0680 xml FMT IMG Hatch4x3 img IMG DELY 3 0000000E 00 DELY STEP STEP FMT tffs0 Library TestAnalog DMT0872 xml FMT IMG ColorBar im...

Page 262: ...E 00 DELY STEP After modified text in bold STEP FMT tffs0 Library TestAnalog DMT0856 xml FMT IMG PulseBar img IMG DELY 4 0000000E 00 DELY STEP 4 Save the text file as an XML file 5 Using the Generator FTP Browser download the format XML file from your PC to the generator See Copying files from a PC to a 882 on page 23 for instructions ...

Page 263: ...Ethernet LAN See Establishing a terminal session with the 882 on page 30 or Establishing a Telnet session with the 882 on page 33 2 Set the sequence path to the medium and location you want to query For example if you want to delete the sequence files in the generator s flash memory enter the following command SEQP tffs0 Library Sequence To delete sequence files on the PC card enter the following ...

Page 264: ...252 Chapter 8 Working with Test Sequences ...

Page 265: ...ices Topics in the chapter Overview of HDMI display testing Setting up the 882 for HDMI testing Testing HDMI displays Testing HDMI 1 3 displays Testing HDMI 1 4 displays with 3D Testing HDMI video pixel repetition 882 only Testing HDMI audio Testing HDMI InfoFrames 882 only ...

Page 266: ...pliance in display sink devices on page 492 The HDMI option provides the following features Advanced E EDID parsing Generation of all EIA CEA 861 D formats below 165 MHz Deep Color supports TMDS rates up to 225MHz Pixel repetition test capabilities Internal sine wave 882 up to 8 channels and external SPDIF audio input for audio testing AFD test capabilities Automatic and manual InfoFrame configura...

Page 267: ... video signals 2 HDMI OUT 2 connector outputs full single link HDMI 1 3 video as well as DVI and modern HDMI compatible digital video signals 3 HDMI IN 1 connector accepts full single link HDMI 1 3 video as well as DVI and modern HDMI compatible digital video signals 4 HDMI IN 2 connector accepts full single link HDMI 1 3 video as well as DVI and modern HDMI compatible digital video signals 5 SPEC...

Page 268: ...2xL2 240p2xL3 240p2xL4 9 240p2xS1 240p2xS4 240p2xS3 240p2xS4 10 480i4x29 480i4x30 480i4xL1 480i4xL2 11 480i4xS1 480i4xS2 12 240p4x_1 240p4x_2 240p4x_3 240p4x_4 240p4xL1 240p4xL2 240p4xL3 240p4xL4 13 240p4xS1 240p4xS2 240p4xS3 240p4xS4 14 480p2x59 480p2x60 480p2xL1 480p2xL2 15 480p2xS1 480p2xS2 16 1080p59 1080p60 17 576p50 576p50LH 18 576p50SH 19 720p50 20 1080i25 21 576i2x25 576i2xLH 22 576i2xSH 2...

Page 269: ...p100 576p100L 43 576p100S 44 576i2x50 576i2xL1 45 576i2xS1 46 1080i59 1080i60 47 720p119 720p120 48 480p119L 480p120L 480p119 480p120 49 480p119S 480p120S 50 480i2xL3 480i2xL4 480i2x59 480i2x60 51 480i2xS3 480i2xS4 52 576p200 576p200L 53 576p200S 54 576i2x_1 576i2xL2 55 576i2xS2 56 480p239 480p240 480p239L 480p240L 57 480p239S 480p240S 58 480i2x_1 480i2x_2 480i2xL5 480i2xL6 59 480i2xS5 480i2xS6 60...

Page 270: ...861 E Video Identification Code Quantum Data format Display type Display test Recommended images Digital flat panel fixed pixel dis play Pixel anomalies stuck pixels misc sampling Flat Raster Ramp_B Ramp_G and Ramp_R Focus_ 6 Focus_ 7 Focus_ 8 Focus_ 9 Text_9 Text_9T Text_11 Text_12T Text_16 Photometry chrominance contrast levels Flat Flat07 Flat13 Flat20 Flat27 Flat33 Flat40 Flat47 Flat53 Flat60 ...

Page 271: ...of signal interfaces appears on the 882 s display as shown below b Choose the HDMI H item by pressing the adjacent soft key The interface is activated and the port outputs the currently selected image and format Alternatively to select the interface through the command line enter the following commands XVSI 4 Selects the HDMI H interface ALLU Applies the interface setting to the 882 3 Optional Dis...

Page 272: ...3 Press the Content key to access the list of images 4 Choose a suitable image for example ColorBar by pressing the adjacent soft key Alternatively you can load the image with the following command IMGL ColorBar IMGU 5 Verify that the image appears on the display under test Selecting video format Once you have selected the interface type for the display under test you need to select a video output...

Page 273: ...rmation appears on the 882 s display 4 Choose the EDID Formats item by pressing the adjacent soft key A appears next to EDID Formats indicating enabled The 882 loads the Source list with formats supported by the connected display hot plug formats read via EDID structure of attached display 5 To redisplay all formats press the soft key adjacent to EDID Formats A minus sign next to EDID Formats indi...

Page 274: ... catalogs on page 199 for details To use Emulate mode Emulate mode automatically sets color space synchronization type and other settings based on the interface and format selected For VGA interface synchronization type and color space are automatically set and are not changeable For HDMI interface synchronization type and color space are automatically set but color space can be changed 1 Connect ...

Page 275: ...t displays check the specifications of your display for supported formats 3 Press the Source key to access the list of formats A list of formats appears on the 882 s display as shown below To see all of the formats press the and keys Note The list of formats displays when pressing the Source key may be a filtered or abbreviated list Formats not suitable for the selected interface type will not app...

Page 276: ...te You can customize your 882 to run through a specified set of formats and images automatically or manually by creating test sequences See Creating a test sequence on page 244 Use the following guidelines to verify proper operation When testing photometry such as chrominance use the ColorBar SMPTE133 or SMPTEbar images Look for missing bars which may indicate a dead or unconnected channel Also lo...

Page 277: ...aster and Flat images to look for pixels that may be stuck on or off respectively The luminance should increase uniformly for the Ramp image Also look for sparkles indicating problems with sampling When testing for persistence with the animated images Cubes and Persist look for bleeding or trails in the wake of the moving object ...

Page 278: ...created to test HDMI 1 3 deep color displays and there is an Image Control Tool accessible from the 882E web page interface that enables you to control these images Testing Deep Color Image Control Tool There are four images that can be controlled from the Image Control Tool but only three are used to test HDMI 1 3 deep color displays These are listed and described below Ramp12 RampDif Checkers ...

Page 279: ...used to view a specific range of grayscale levels ranges up to 1024 throughout the entire range allowed by deep color support in the 882 i e 36 bit pixel or 12 bit component 4096 If you set the ramp to display the maximum color depth supported by the display under test you will see a nearly uniform ramp depending on the horizontal resolution of the active format Tab Function Reset to Saved Resets ...

Page 280: ... Chapter 9 Testing HDMI Sink Devices The following is a sample of the RampDif image is rendered on a display Refer to the image and table below to better understand the configuration and use of this image ...

Page 281: ...ber of colors available to the 882 for rendering simultaneously on an image The valid values for the PELD pulldown select box are 8 and 32 A setting of 8 means there is a maximum of 256 on screen luminance levels A setting of 32 means there is a maximum of 1024 on screen luminance levels Gamut Range Sets the number gamut range of the output levels This corresponds to the DVQM parameter The values ...

Page 282: ... example you can specify that the top ramp use 12 bit component deep color and the bottom ramp 10 bit color You can then view the image and see whether banding occurs and how pronounced in the either of the ramps If the display under test supports 12 bit component color the top ramp will show a near uniform ramp on the top depending on the horizontal resolution of the active format The bottom ramp...

Page 283: ...Bits per Component NBPC from 0 to 100 For example if NBPC is 12 the total range is 4096 with a full gamut setting Note that the 882E can only display up to 512 colors simultaneously for each ramp on this RampDif image if PELD 32 Color 2 These slide bars set the ending color component and grayscale level right most value of the top and bottom ramps This is expressed as a percentage of the total ran...

Page 284: ... default for TV formats Clr Color Space This pulldown select box specifies the color space When you change this field the setting is applied to the 882 This field corresponds to the DVST and DVSM commands Valid values are RGB DVSM 0 YCbCr4 2 2 DVSM 2 YCbCr4 4 4 DVSM 4 NBPC This pulldown select box specifies the color depth per component on the top ramp By setting this value to 12 the 882 will put ...

Page 285: ...s you would see bands of 2 5 pixels each 1280 512 2 5 Since the bottom ramp can render 256 distinct levels you would see bands of 5 0 pixels each 1280 256 5 0 Checkers image This image has two color checker or tile types arranged in a checker board pattern It enables you to show a contrast in the tiles at a specified color depth You can move the slide bars of each color such that they are close in...

Page 286: ...its per Component NBPC from 0 to 100 For example if NBPC is 12 the total range is 4096 Color 2 These slide bars set the color component and grayscale level for one the other set of tiles This is expressed as a percentage of the total range defined by the setting of Number of Bits per Component NBPC from 0 to 100 For example if NBPC is 12 the total range is 4096 PELD This is the pixel depth within ...

Page 287: ...l This corresponds to the DVQM parameter The values are Max DVQM 0 MaxTV DVQM 1 and NomTV DVQM 2 this is the default for TV formats Clr Color Space This pulldown select box specifies the color space This field corresponds to the DVST and DVSM commands Valid values are RGB DVSM 0 YCbCr4 4 2 DVSM 2 YCbCr4 4 4 DVSM 4 NBPC This pulldown select box specifies the color depth per component on the top ram...

Page 288: ...n page 259 2 Press the Source key and select the desired format Alternatively you can load the format with the following command FMTL format_name FMTU 3 Open a Web browser such as Internet Explorer and type the 882 s IP address in the address entry field For example enter the following http 206 135 215 189 The 882 home page appears in the browser ...

Page 289: ...C color space uses the full range of values 1 to 254 in an 8 bit space to represent colors The Munsell Color System provides a standard way of describing colors and can be applied to video systems The Munsell Color System is shown in the figure below A single color is represented by three separate parameters of color 1 Hue 2 Value and 3 Chroma There are ten hues consisting of 5 basic hues and 5 in...

Page 290: ...only 55 of these colors can be mapped to the sRGB color space The 882E instrument provides Munsell images for testing displays that support xvYCC color space The following images are used MnslGM This is a color checker image with 24 colors arranged in a checker board MnslCLR There are a series of these images 40 in total that are accessible as sub images through the 882E front panel Each hue in th...

Page 291: ...the sub hues which is labeled on the left Each such horizontal set of color blocks is a cancatenation of the value and chroma variations for that particular hue These cancatenations can be derived from the MnslCLR images In other words the MnslPG image is a concatenation of 8 of the MnslCLR images The MnslGM Image is shown below Note The image as shown in this User Guide is not representative of h...

Page 292: ... and value variances of one of these sub hues Each sub image provides a color block for each chroma and value level for that sub hue The value varies along the vertical axis and the chroma varies along the horizontal axis Note The image as shown in this User Guide is not representative of how it will actually appear on an xvYCC display When examining this image on an xvYCC display the differences ...

Page 293: ... value level for that sub hue The value varies along the vertical axis and the chroma varies along the horizontal axis Note The image as shown in this User Guide is not representative of how it will actually appear on an xvYCC display When examining this image on an xvYCC display the differences between adjacent colors should be preceived to be the same Note that this depends on how you have imple...

Page 294: ...ppears on the 882 s display b Choose the More item by pressing the adjacent soft key until a appears next to More and Rendition appears on the other side of the menu c Press the and keys to advance through the image versions Each version shows the format parameters for a different format in the Source list Alternatively to enable and view image versions using the command line interface enter the f...

Page 295: ... the image version 6 When you are finished disable image versions by pressing the Options key and choosing More until a appears next to it Alternatively to disable image versions using the command line interface enter the following command ISUB 0 Disables sub images ...

Page 296: ...D images Prerequisites for testing with the 3D images In order to use the 3D utility to test your display you will need to ensure that the following prerequisites are met Upgrade your 88x to the current release Read the Release Notes to verify which release supports the 3D images Locate the Quantum Data 3D bitmaps or use your own 3D bitmaps The Quantum Data bitmaps are available from the Quantum D...

Page 297: ... Use the following procedures to create the 3D ready images from two stereographic bitmaps using the Quantum Data 3D Bitmap Conversion Tool Note If you have your own 3D bitmap images or if you are using the bitmap images provided by Quantum Data you do not need to use this procedure 1 Acquire 3D stereographic image pairs left and right and place them in a convenient directory in your PC 2 Download...

Page 298: ...ing convention that identifies the format resolution of the image including the frame rate and the 3D structure You are limited to using only 8 characters which is all that can be shown in the 88x front panel LCD For example you could use a naming convention as follows FFFF are four characters for the number of lines in the format timing typically either 0720 for 720 or 1080 for 1080 3D Structure ...

Page 299: ...e Half Quincunx matrix Odd left Even right HQOO for Side by Side Half Quincunx matrix Odd left Odd right For example 1080HQEO would represent a 1080p format using the Side by Side structure using Quincunx matrix with Even left eye and Odd right eye 8 Specify whether you want to save the resulting 3D ready image as a bitmap BMP using the checkbox provided JPEG is not recommended 9 Click on the Conv...

Page 300: ... a Press the Source button and then select the format Be sure and select the format that is associated with the 3D ready bitmap image you are intending to render Note that the 88x should be in the Basic mode when you select the format b Press the Options button repeatedly until the 3D menu appears Select the desired 3D Structure as shown below To load the format through the command line Enter the ...

Page 301: ...Enable or disable 3D 0 Disable 1 Enable 2 3D Method 0 Frame Packing 2 Line Alternative 3 Side by Side Full 4 L Depth 6 Top and Bottom 8 Side by Side Half 3 Applies to Side by Side half only Horizontal Sub Sampling 0 Odd Left picture Odd Right picture 1 Odd Left picture Even Right picture 2 Odd Left picture Odd Right picture 3 Odd Left picture Even Right picture Quincunx Matrix 4 Odd Left picture O...

Page 302: ... PCCard and then navigate to the Library UserData directory d Select the 3D ready image using the blue button adjacent to the desired 3D ready image in the list Return to the Basic mode after making your selection When you select a 3D capable format and 3D ready image the 88x transmits the image out the HDMI output port and also sends the HDMI vendor specific infoframe with the necessary 3D metada...

Page 303: ...e visible on overscanned HDMI displays Note This feature is not supported on the 881 generator To support HDMI gaming format and pixel repetition testing the 882 allows you to sequentially apply pixel repetition up to 10 times to a unique image As the pixel repetition factor is increased the horizontal resolution of the displayed image will decrease as shown in the table below To test HDMI video p...

Page 304: ...the Source key and select the first test format Note Gaming formats on the 882 have the characters 4x in their names such as 480i4x29 or 576i4x25 For a listing of all HDMI formats see the table on page 256 If you have auto configured the formats through the EDID you may have to disable this feature Alternatively to select the format through the command line interface enter the following commands F...

Page 305: ... Activates the PixelRep image 5 Enable and view image versions for the PixelRep image as follows a Press the Options key The following menu appears on the 882 s display b Choose the More item by pressing the adjacent soft key until a and Rendition appears next to the item c Press the and keys to advance through the image versions Alternatively to enable and view image versions using the command li...

Page 306: ...the left and right of the default 2880 pixel image The white vertical borders and circles in the active area appear thicker The white text in the center of the active area appears stretched and bigger 7 Select additional pixel repetition factors as desired to verify proper handling of the selected HDMI gaming format using variable horizontal resolutions 8 When testing is complete disable image ver...

Page 307: ...nnels at different amplitudes and frequencies as well as test using the different supported sampling rates The sampling rate for all channels is completed through a single image AudioRAT The following table lists the images used to perform HDMI audio testing using an internal audio source To test an HDMI display using HDMI audio from the 882 1 Set up the 882 for HDMI output See Setting up the 882 ...

Page 308: ...oLR image IMGU Activates the AudioLR image 4 Enable and view image versions for the AudioLR image as follows a Press the Options key The following menu appears on the 882 s display b Choose the More item by pressing the adjacent soft key until a and Rendition appears next to the item c Press the and keys to advance through the image versions Note Depending on the selected image pressing the and ke...

Page 309: ... appears on the connected HDMI display The image shows the current settings for the HDMI audio output Note that the sampling rate image AudioRAT applies to all audio channel Alternatively to select the AudioRAT image using the command line interface enter the following commands IMGP tffs0 Library Images Set image path to 882 memory IMGL AUDIORAT Loads the AudioRAT image IMGU Activates the AudioRAT...

Page 310: ...definition format Only two channels are guaranteed at the 192kHz sampling rate These two channels must be from the 882 s internal sine wave 882 as the SPDIF input is only guaranteed to 96kHz Note also that your receiving device must support 8 channel audio The following table lists the images used to perform HDMI audio testing using an internal audio source for 8 channels Note Selecting any of the...

Page 311: ...choose one of the audio images used for amplitude adjustment for example Audio_1 The image appears on the connected HDMI display The image shows the current settings for the HDMI audio output For example the Audio_1 image is shown below Alternatively to select the audio image using the command line interface enter the following commands IMGP tffs0 Library Images Set image path to 882 memory IMGL A...

Page 312: ...pending on the selected image pressing the and keys will change the amplitude or frequency of the HDMI audio output Alternatively to enable and view an image version using the command line interface enter the following commands ISUB 1 Enables sub images IVER 1 Specifies the first image version IMGU Activates the image version 5 To verify proper HDMI audio handling check the following on the HDMI d...

Page 313: ...U Activates the Audio_1f image 7 To verify proper HDMI audio handling check the following on the HDMI display Audio is output from the proper channels left right or both When frequency is adjusted the pitch is subsequently changed 8 Press the Content key and choose the AudioRAT image to test the sampling rate The AudioRAT image appears and shows the current settings for the HDMI audio output Note ...

Page 314: ...vely to disable image versions using the command line interface enter the following command ISUB 0 Disables sub images 11 To test another HDMI audio output channel or format repeat the procedure Testing multi channel compressed HDMI audio formats The 882E instrument enables you to test HDMI compressed audio formats such as AC3 EAC3 and the HDMI 1 3 high bit rate lossless compressed audio such as D...

Page 315: ...ternal sine wave 882 as the SPDIF input is only guaranteed to 96kHz Note Unlike the uncompressed formats linear PCM the compressed audio test signals are generated from a file As a result the amplitude and frequency cannot be adjusted through the audio test images To test compressed audio formats on an HDMI device from the 882 1 Set up the 882 for HDMI output See Setting up the 882 for HDMI testin...

Page 316: ...the command line without selecting the Dolby image To do this you enter the following command CAUD Queries for the list of stored compressed audio clip configurations 1 DTS 5 1 48000 00 dts 48kHz 1509kbps 51ch wav pcm 2 DTS ES 6 1 48000 00 DTES ES 48kHz 1509kbps 61ch wav pcm 3 DTS HDHRA 7 1 192000 00 dtshdhra 48kHz 5376kbps 71ch wav pcm 4 DTS HDHRA 5 1 192000 00 dtshdhra 48kHz 3840kbps 51ch wav pc...

Page 317: ...nsity Note Depending on the selected image pressing the and keys will change the amplitude or frequency of the HDMI audio output Alternatively to enable and view an image version using the command line interface enter the following commands ISUB 1 Enables sub images IVER 1 Specifies the first image version IMGU Activates the image version 5 To verify proper HDMI audio handling check the following ...

Page 318: ...I display using HDMI audio from an external source 1 Set up the 882 for HDMI output See Setting up the 882 for HDMI testing on page 259 2 Connect the external audio source to the SPDIF A V connector on the 882 as follows a For the 882CA using the RCA to VGA cable provided with the 882 connect the J1 connector to the SPDIF A V connector on the 882 Then connect the red RCA connector to the external ...

Page 319: ...Note The default frequency is 48 kHz which is used by DVD players However if the external source is an audio CD played on a DVD player the player will output SPDIF with a sampling rate of 44 1 kHz not 48 kHz In this case set the sampling frequency to 44 1 kHz or reload the format which will detect the sampling frequency automatically 7 Turn on the external audio source The external audio signal wi...

Page 320: ...e are five different types of InfoFrames auxiliary video information AVI audio AUD source product description SPD MPEG information MPG generic vendor specific information GIF Each type carries information regarding a different aspect of the HDMI audio video transmission The procedures below can be performed using the front panel or the command line interface Viewing InfoFrame contents 882 only The...

Page 321: ... PacketTx image IMGU Activates the PacketTX image The PacketTx image appears on the connected HDMI display The image shows the current settings for the AVI InfoFrame output 4 Enable and view image versions for the PacketTx image as follows a Press the Options key The following menu appears on the 882 s display b Choose the More item by pressing the adjacent soft key until a and Rendition appears n...

Page 322: ...to it Alternatively to disable image versions using the command line interface enter the following command ISUB 0 Disables sub images To generate a report for the PacketTx image 1 Press the Tools key The Tools menu appears on the 882 s display as shown below 2 Choose the Reports item by pressing the adjacent soft key The Reports menu appears on the 882 s display as shown below 3 Choose the Packets...

Page 323: ...he display Alternatively you can generate this report from the command line using the following command IFGX RPTU Initiates the Packet Tx report 5 Open a Web browser such as Internet Explorer and type the 882 s IP address in the address entry field For example enter the following http 206 135 215 189 The 882 home page appears in the browser TX PACKETS Finished ...

Page 324: ...312 Chapter 9 Testing HDMI Sink Devices 6 Choose the Generated Reports item The 882 the provides a list of reports currently available as shown below ...

Page 325: ... below Testing with Active Format Description AFD 882 only When transporting HDMI video images from a source to a display different formats may be used between the content transmission signal and display To provide compatibility between the different formats Active Format Description AFD is used Note This feature is not supported on the 881 generator ...

Page 326: ... Setting up the 882 for HDMI testing on page 259 2 Press the Source key and choose a format suitable for the HDMI display for example DMT0660 Alternatively to select the format using the command line interface enter the following commands FMTP tffs0 Library Formats Set format path to 882 memory FMTL DMT0660 Loads the DMT0660 format FMTU Activates the DMT0660 format 3 Press the Content key and choo...

Page 327: ... appears next to the item c Press the key to advance through the image versions Note Select the image version that corresponds to the AFD case or code you want to test See the table on page 314 for a list of the image numbers that correspond with each AFD case Alternatively to enable and view the image versions using the command line interface enter the following commands ISUB 1 Enables sub images...

Page 328: ...de frequency or sampling rate based on the selected image of the HDMI audio output The contents of the appropriate InfoFrame output appears on the HDMI display For example the image representing AFD case 11 image version 4 on a 4 3 display is shown in the example below 7 When testing is complete disable image versions by pressing the Options key and choosing More until a appears next to it Alterna...

Page 329: ...882 Video Test Instrument User Guide Rev A 35 317 10 Testing Lipsync Topics in this chapter Overview Testing display sink devices Testing source devices ...

Page 330: ...from the EDID of a connected display generate a test image with audio video latency correction applied and view the image on the display device to determine correct audio video synchronization With the analyzer option you can test the lipsync correction feature of a HDMI source device The analyzer can emulate a display device with audio and video latency Using a test image the source device applie...

Page 331: ...e beep the lipsync test image allows you to assess proper audio video synchronization at the display The illustration below depicts this application To test display device auto lipsync correction 1 Establish a session with the 882 using either HyperTerminal over a serial connection or Telnet over an Ethernet LAN See Establishing a terminal session with the 882 on page 30 or Establishing a Telnet s...

Page 332: ...line interface enter the following commands XVSI 4 Selects the HDMI H interface ALLU Applies the interface setting to the 882 4 Read the EDID from the display as follows a Press the Sink key The following information appears on the 882 s display b Press the Options key The following information appears on the 882 s display c Choose the EDID Formats item by pressing the adjacent soft key A appears ...

Page 333: ...cursor appears on the digit Press the or keys to adjust the setting up or down e Press the Enter Options key to save the new setting Alternatively to enable the 882 to measure lipsync correction through the command line interface enter the following command LSGX LSGM 1 Enables lipsync testing LSGX LSGU Activates lipsync testing 6 Press the Content key The following information appears on the 882 s...

Page 334: ...ible click to verify correct audio video synchronization For more detailed testing choose the LipSync test image on display device is similar to shown below The LipSync image utilizes a moving box with audible beep to verify correct audio video synchronization When the moving box s right edge touches the middle of a vertical line in the image an audible beep is sent to the display ...

Page 335: ...ted moving time for white box between two lines Alternatively to adjust vertical line intercal using the command line interface enter the following commands ISUB 1 Enables sub images IVER 1 Specifies the first image version IMGU Activates the image version c When you are finished disable image versions by pressing the Options key and choosing More until a appears next to it Alternatively to disabl...

Page 336: ...first by pressing the soft keys adjacent to the bottom row until the cursor appears on the digits Press the or keys to adjust the settings up or down g To adjust audio video latency edit the TLAT setting between 0 0 and 0 5 seconds by pressing the soft keys adjacent to the bottom row until the cursor appears on the digits Press the or keys to adjust the settings up or down h Press the Enter Option...

Page 337: ... a connected HDMI source device To use analyzer to test source device auto lipsync correction handling 1 Establish a session with the 882 using either HyperTerminal over a serial connection or Telnet over an Ethernet LAN See Establishing a terminal session with the 882 on page 30 or Establishing a Telnet session with the 882 on page 33 2 Set EDID audio video latency values on analyzer using the ED...

Page 338: ...e is connected by pressing the adjacent soft key 5 Connect an HDMI to HDMI cable between the HDMI IN connector on the analyzer and HDMI Port on the source device The EDID is read from emulated display on the analyzer and lipsync latency values are processed by the source device 6 From source device generate supplied lipsync test image 7 On the 882 press the Tools key The Tools menu appears on the ...

Page 339: ...w Alternatively to measure audio video latencies in the test image through the command line interface enter the following command LSAX TLAT Returns audio video latency in milliseconds LSAX PLAT Returns which data stream was received first 0 Video 1 Audio LSAX LSGU Updates hardware 11 Press Stop to halt lipsync measurements Generating an HDMI source Lipsync data report Follow the procedure to gener...

Page 340: ...wise generating a new report overwrites the existing report 6 Choose Report item by pressing the adjacent soft key A Lipsync Measurements Report is generated and stored on the PCMCIA card in the card0 Library Reports LipSync_Data htm file Alternatively to generate a lipsync measurement report through the command line interface enter the following command LSAX RPTG 1 generate lipsync measurement re...

Page 341: ...882 Video Test Instrument User Guide Rev A 35 329 Note Make sure to change the names of any existing reports in the directory on your PC to avoid overwritting existing reports ...

Page 342: ...330 Chapter 10 Testing Lipsync 9 Navigate to your PC and double click on the report A sample is shown below ...

Page 343: ...est Instrument User Guide Rev A 35 1 11 Testing EDID for HDMI Topics in this chapter Overview Testing with display sink devices Testing EDID for HDMI compliance in display sink devices Using the EDID Compare tool ...

Page 344: ...y device With the 882 you can both view EDID from a display and write EDID to a display device with writable EEPROM In addition you can test a display device s EDID structure and transmission in accordance with the HDMI Compliance Test Specification 1 2 Additional EDID tests require the analyzer option These include testing the EDID handling capabilities of a source device and the HDMI compliance ...

Page 345: ...ID data received from a DDC compliant VGA HDMI DisplayPort or DVI display connected to the 882 Note that HDMI EDIDs are used in the examples in this procedure Note This feature is not supported on the 881 generator To view EDID data received from a connected display device 1 Connect the display under test to the 882 2 Press the Source key and choose a suitable format for the display for example DM...

Page 346: ...ot plug formats read via EDID structure of attached display Note To disable hot plug formats press the soft key adjacent to EDID Formats A next to EDID Formats indicates it is disabled 4 Press the Content key A list of images appears on the 882 s display 5 Choose the EdidData image by pressing the adjacent soft key The image appears on the display as shown below Alternatively to select the image u...

Page 347: ...sions Alternatively to enable and view image versions using the command line interface enter the following commands ISUB 1 Enables sub images IVER 1 Specifies the first image version IMGU Activates the image version 7 When you are finished disable image versions by pressing the Options key and choosing More until a appears next to it Alternatively to disable image versions using the command line i...

Page 348: ...to the command description identify the arguments of this query Generating an EDID Information Report Follow the procedure to generate an HTML report of EDID data received from a DDC compliant VGA HDMI DisplayPort or DVI display connected to the 882 Note HDMI EDIDs are shown in the examples in this procedure To generate a report of EDID data received from a connected display device 1 Connect the d...

Page 349: ... key An EDID Information Report is generated and stored on the PCMCIA card in the card0 Library Reports Edid_Data htm file 6 Open the FTP Browser on the 882 and select a suitable directory on your PC to store the report 7 Using the FTP Browser transfer the report from the 882 PCMCIA card to your PC like shown below Note Make sure to change the names of any existing reports in the directory on your...

Page 350: ...ure to save a backup copy of the EDID stored on the display device Writing an EDID using this procedure will overwrite the EDID currently stored on the display device To write an EDID to the display device 1 Establish a session with the 882 using either HyperTerminal over a serial connection or Telnet over an Ethernet LAN See Establishing a terminal session with the 882 on page 30 or Establishing ...

Page 351: ...ge 30 or Establishing a Telnet session with the 882 on page 33 2 Connect the 882 HDMI output Tx port to the display device whose EDID you wish to capture 3 Activate the HDMI H or HDMI D interface on the output port a Press the Interface key to access the list of interfaces A listing of signal interfaces appears on the 882 s display as shown below b Choose the HDMI H or HDMI D item by pressing the ...

Page 352: ...ional Use the captured EDID to emulate the display device on the analyzer by entering the following command EDE port DIDU Where port is the HDMI input Rx port 1 or 2 that you want to configure to emulate the EDID For example the command below loads the EDID stored in the EDID edit buffer for emulation into the HDMI input Rx port 2 EDE2 DIDU Creating or editing EDID contents You can create or modif...

Page 353: ...ify an existing EDID stored on the 882 follow these steps a Load an EDID from the 882 s internal file system DIDL filename Where filename is the name of a file in a the default directory identified by DIDP For example the command below loads an EDID from the default EDID path DIDL myedid1 If the EDID you want to load is not in the default path you can either list the path explicitely on the DIDL c...

Page 354: ...ree ways 1 through the front panel using the EDIDHDMI image 2 using the EDID Compliance report also available through the front panel or 3 using the Compliance Controller The Compliance Controller is an application available in release 2 18 or later that is available on the 882 web home page This section includes procedures for running the EDID compliance test in all of the three ways Defining the...

Page 355: ...es and for no 60Hz Indicates whether the device supports formats with 60Hz frame rate The values are for yes and for no 50Hz Indicates whether the sink under test supports formats with 50Hz frame rate The values are for yes and for no 640x480p 60 Indicates whether the sink supports the DMT0660 for mat The values are for yes and for no 720x480p 60 4 3 Indicates whether the sink supports the 480p60 ...

Page 356: ...Indicates whether the sink under test supports the 480i2x50 format with double clocking at 16 9 aspect ratio The values are for yes and for no 720p 60 On Other Indicates whether the sink under test supports the ana log component video input for 720p60 The values are for yes and for no 1080i 60 On Other Indicates whether the sink under test supports the ana log component video input for 1080i60 The...

Page 357: ...t Indicates whether the sink under test supports deep color at 30 bits per pixel The values are for yes and for no DC 36 Bit Indicates whether the sink under test supports deep color at 36 bits per pixel The values are for yes and for no DC 48 Bit Indicates whether the sink under test supports deep color at 48 bits per pixel The values are for yes and for no DC YCbCr 4 4 4 Indicates whether the si...

Page 358: ...alid HDMI format for example DMT0660 by pressing the adjacent soft key Alternatively to select the format through the command line interface enter the following command FMTL DMT0660 FMTU 3 Activate the HDMI H interface on the output port as follows Dual Link DVI Indicates whether the sink under test supports dual link DVI The values are for yes and for no Lipsync Indicated Indicates whether the ED...

Page 359: ... key and then press the Options key The following menu appears on the 882 s display Cho 5 Choose the CDF item by pressing the adjacent soft key The CDF parameters appear on the 882 s display as shown below Cho 6 Set characteristics of the display under test using CDF parameters Scroll through the list by pressing the key Refer to Defining the capabilities of the display device under test on page 1...

Page 360: ...testing displays connected to HDMI output 1 usee EDIDHDM2 image for HDMI output 2 by pressing the adjacent soft key Alternatively to select the image through the command line interface enter the following command IMGL EdidHDMI IMGU 3 Enable image versions for the EdidHDMI EdidHDM2 image as follows a Press the Options key The following menu appears on the 882 s display b Choose the More item by pre...

Page 361: ...882 Video Test Instrument User Guide Rev A 35 19 Testing EDID readability Test ID 8 1 this test verifies that the EDID can be read properly ...

Page 362: ...sting EDID for HDMI Testing EDID VESA structure Test ID 8 2 this test verifies that the data in the base EDID 1 3 block and basic EDID Extension handling is correct and meets all aspects of the relevant specifications ...

Page 363: ... User Guide Rev A 35 21 Testing CEA timing extension structure Test ID 8 3 this test verifies that the data in any CEA Timing Extension present in EDID is formatted properly and meets all aspects of the relevant specifications ...

Page 364: ...22 Chapter 11 Testing EDID for HDMI Testing 861C format support requirements Test ID 8 17 this test verifies that no 861D defined video format is declared only in a Detailed Timing Descriptor ...

Page 365: ...Video Test Instrument User Guide Rev A 35 23 Testing HDMI format support requirements Test ID 8 18 this test verifies that the display under test indicates support for all required video formats in its EDID ...

Page 366: ...rior to running this test you will need to configure the 882 for the test Refer to Setting up 882 for HDMI sink device EDID compliance testing on page 16 for instructions on setting up the 882 for the EDID test To generate a report of EDID compliance test results 1 Press the Tools key The Tools menu appears on the 882 s display as shown below 2 Press the Reports key The Reports menu appears on the...

Page 367: ...ing to test by selecting the EditCDF item Select the adjacent soft key Refer to Defining the capabilities of the display device under test on page 12 for instructions on defining the CDF 5 Choose CompRpt item by pressing the adjacent soft key An HDMI EDID Compliance Report is generated and stored on the PCMCIA card in the card0 Library Reports Edid_Compliance htm file 6 Open the FTP Browser on the...

Page 368: ...26 Chapter 11 Testing EDID for HDMI Note Make sure to change the names of any existing reports in the directory on your PC to avoid overwritting existing reports ...

Page 369: ...he Compliance Controller Follow the procedure below to run the EDID HDMI compliance test using the Compliance Controller available in release 2 18 or later Prior to running this test you will need to configure the 882 for the test Refer to Setting up 882 for HDMI sink device EDID compliance testing on page 16 for instructions on setting up the 882 for the EDID test ...

Page 370: ...D HDMI compliance test using the Compliance Controller 1 Open a Web browser such as Internet Explorer and type the 882 s IP address in the address entry field For example enter the following http 206 135 215 189 The 882 home page appears in the browser ...

Page 371: ...ng Refer to Defining the capabilities of the display device under test on page 12 for information on the EDID parameters used in defining the CDF 5 Optional You can expedite the CDF definition process by reading the EDID directly from the display device under test using the Auto Generate CDF feature Please note however that the specifications of the display may differ from the implementation That ...

Page 372: ...ottom of the interface to load the CDF defined in the screen for use in the test 7 Click the Run Test actitivation button to run the EDID compliance test The test runs without interruption 8 Select the Report tab on the Compliance Controller interface to view the list of reports as shown below ...

Page 373: ...sting each format with both YCbCr 4 4 4 and YCbCr 4 2 2 pixel sampling while test ID 8 20 requires testing each format listed in the EDID at both minimum and maximum pixel clock frequencies permitted by the source device Pixel clock rate values are as follows For 50 Hz formats the values are 49 75 Hz and 50 25 Hz 50 Hz 0 5 For 59 94 Hz or 60 Hz formats the frequencies are 59 64 Hz 59 94 Hz 0 5 and...

Page 374: ...or example 01 02 06 etc listed on page 256 H Indicates the format is using the maximum H High frequency required by the compliance test L indicates the format is using the minimum L Low frequency required by the compliance test 01 Represents the index of the format as listed under video identification code on page 256 To verify proper pixel encoding and pixel rate support 1 Connect the 882 to the ...

Page 375: ...wing information appears on the 882 s display 6 Select an image suitable for testing the display type such as Master by pressing the soft key adjacent to the image Alternatively to select the image using the command line interface enter the following command IMGL Master IMGU 7 Press the Source key and select a format beginning with SVD by pressing the adjacent soft key 8 On display under test veri...

Page 376: ...882EA HDMI interface display must have writable EEPROM 4 For source testing applying an EDID to one of the HDMI DisplayPort Rx ports for emulation Note When creating EDIDs for source testing for computer monitors in the IT market or TV displays in the CE market it is important to understand the specifications which define the structure of the EDID you are creating The EDID structure is defined by ...

Page 377: ... the port outputs the currently selected image and format Alternatively to select the interface through the command line enter the following commands XVSI 4 Selects the HDMI H interface ALLU Applies the interface setting to the 882 3 Press the Source key and choose a valid HDMI format for example DMT0660 by pressing the adjacent soft key Alternatively to select the format through the command line ...

Page 378: ... the 882 s IP address in the address entry field For example enter the following http 206 135 215 189 The 882 home page appears in the browser 5 Click the EDID Editor link The EDID Editor appears as shown below Note The EDID Editor is provisioned with the default Quantum Data EDID when opened ...

Page 379: ... The EDID is loaded into the Editor b If you are capturing and loading an EDID from a connected display device select Load EDID From Device Connected to 882 Analyzer Port x from the File menu Port 1 is HDMI Tx 1 Port 2 is HDMI TX 2 and Port 3 is VGA Load EDID From Location 882 A valid EDID XML file stored on the 882 file sys tem in flash memory or on the PC card Device connected to 882 A device th...

Page 380: ...ading an EDID XML file stored on the host PC select Load EDID From File on PC from the File menu Select a file The EDID is loaded into the Editor Editing an existing EDID The procedure below provides instructions on editing EDIDs in the EDID Editor Tool ...

Page 381: ...882 Video Test Instrument User Guide Rev A 35 39 To edit an existing EDID 1 Open the EDID Editor and load an EDID using the procedures described in Loading EDIDs with the EDID Editor on page 34 ...

Page 382: ...40 Chapter 11 Testing EDID for HDMI 2 Expand the EDID Block in the navigation view ...

Page 383: ...d Timing Descriptor Make sure to click on the OK button when you have completed the edits for each dialog box 4 Save the modified EDID using the procedures described in Saving an EDID to a file on page 50 Creating a new EDID The procedure below provides instructions on creating a new EDID in the EDID Editor Tool This procedure shows how you would create a new 4 block EDID from the default Quantum ...

Page 384: ...a new EDID 1 Open the EDID Editor and load the EDID using the procedures Loading EDIDs with the EDID Editor on page 34 Upon power up the HDMI Rx ports are configured with the Quantum Data 2 block EDID 2 Expand the EDID Block in the navigation view ...

Page 385: ...ts This screen shows the Vendor Product Information screen where you will need to make some edits When you change the value of any field either a free form text field pull down select box or check box make sure to click the OK button to invoke the change If you make a change by mistake click on the Cancel button ...

Page 386: ... Add the CEA extension blocks by selecting New CEA Block from the Add pull down menu as shown below When you add a CEA block both Block 2 and Block 3 are added In addition the Extension Flag field in Block 0 is updated with the value of 3 ...

Page 387: ...e you want to add the extension block b Select New CEA Extension Blocks from the Add pull down menu The example below shows adding a CEA Video Data Block When you add a CEA extension block it is added to the selected CEA data block as shown below c Edit the fields in the data block in accordance with your requirements ...

Page 388: ...46 Chapter 11 Testing EDID for HDMI d Click the OK button to save the data block that you added ...

Page 389: ...nt to add the DTD b Select New DTD from the Add pull down menu The example below shows adding a Custom Timing Descriptor When you add a DTD it is added to the selected DTD data block as shown below c Edit the fields in the data block that in accordance with your requirements d Click the OK button to save the data block that you added ...

Page 390: ...ta block a Highlight the CEA Data block where you want to add the Vendor Specific Data block b Select New CEA Extension Data from the Add pull down menu Use the check boxes and data entry fields to specify the data in the vendor specific data block as shown below ...

Page 391: ...User Guide Rev A 35 49 8 Optional If you need to delete an item such as a CEA extension block or data block select the block in the EDID Blocks window then select Delete Selected Item from the Tools pull down menu as shown below ...

Page 392: ...below shows a typical dialog box for editing the Timing Descriptor Detailed Timing Descriptor 10 Save the modified EDID using the procedures described in Saving an EDID to a file on page 50 Saving an EDID to a file The procedure below provide instructions on saving an EDID to an EDID XML file used by the 882 generator To save an EDID to a file 1 If not already loaded in the Editor load the EDID us...

Page 393: ... stored on the PC The EDID is saved to a EDID XML file used by the 882 generator Putting Writing EDID to a display Note The connected display device must have writable EEPROM to use this feature Important This procedure will overwrite the EDID contents of your display device The procedure below provide instructions on putting writing an EDID to a display device connected to one of the 882 s HDMI T...

Page 394: ... to select the interface through the command line enter the following commands XVSI 10 Selects the DisplayPort interface ALLU Applies the interface setting to the generator 4 If not already loaded in the Editor load the EDID using the procedure Loading EDIDs with the EDID Editor on page 34 5 Select Save EDID to Device connected to 882 882 Analyzer Port x from the File menu Port 1 is HDMI Tx 1 and ...

Page 395: ...HDMI compliance test on an HDMI EDID that is loaded into the EDID Editor When you run the test the tool automatically generates the HTML report as well When you run this test the CDF that is used is the one that is currently saved in the 882 The procedures below provide instructions on running the EDID HDMI compliance test from the EDID Editor To run an EDID HDMI compliance test 1 Load an existing...

Page 396: ...ta report You can run the EDID data report in an HDMI EDID that is loaded into the EDID Editor This function generates an HTML report that appears in the window when compete The procedures below provide instructions on running the EDID data report from the EDID Editor To run an EDID data report 1 Load an existing EDID using the procedures described in Loading EDIDs with the EDID Editor on page 34 ...

Page 397: ...882 Video Test Instrument User Guide Rev A 35 55 2 Select Generate View Compliance Test from the Tools pull down menu as shown below The EDID report appears in the window ...

Page 398: ...istently generating an identical EDID Comparing EDIDs Follow this procedure to verify the display device is generating an identical EDID To compare EDIDs 1 Connect an HDMI to HDMI cable between the HDMI OUT connector on the 882 and the HDMI connector on the display under test 2 Open a Web browser such as Internet Explorer and type the 882 s IP address in the address entry field For example enter t...

Page 399: ...882 Video Test Instrument User Guide Rev A 35 57 3 Click the EDID Compare Tool link The EDID Compare Tool appears 4 Click the Capture Reference button The following message appears ...

Page 400: ...our PC by clicking on the Browse button This enables you to browse for a location on your PC and store the EDID 5 Click the Compare to Reference button The following message appears if EDID contents are identical If EDID contents are not identical you see the message Mis Matched EDID s displayed ...

Page 401: ...882 Video Test Instrument User Guide Rev A 35 59 12 CEC Interactive Troubleshooting Environment ITE Topics in the chapter Overview CEC Introduction Testing CEC Devices CEC Bus Monitor ...

Page 402: ...STB unless you instruct it not to Note The CEC ITE is an option available on generators with release 2 2 2 or higher You must have the ITE option on your generator to use the ITE features To determine if your generator has the the ITE option installed view the GenStats image and check the information under Video Board Options Refer to Viewing generator configuration information on page 117 The CEC...

Page 403: ...rface for this bus is a single wire which connects to all of the devices in the system The CEC protocol defines the specific use of that single wire at all times CEC devices An HDMI environment can consist of several types of devices Each of the devices can be tested using the 882CA generator analzyer and the CEC TME application The HDMI devices currently supported for testing are listed below TV ...

Page 404: ...bles a device to control e g play fast forward etc and interrogate a playback device a deck Tuner Control Allows a device to control the tuner of another device Vendor Specific Commands Allows a set of vendor defined commands to be used between devices of that vendor OSD Display Enables a device to use the on screen display of the TV to display text strings Device Menu Control Enables a device to ...

Page 405: ...ing HDMI CEC sink devices and two inputs on the analyzer 882CA Note The HDMI CEC bus is a single wire bus within an HDMI cable connecting HDMI devices in an HDMI environment The CEC wire is on pin 13 of the HDMI Type A connectors The CEC lead shares its ground with the DDC channel on pin 17 of the HDMI Type A connector Verify that the cable has an active CEC bus with a continuity tester To connect...

Page 406: ...3 video as well as DVI and modern HDMI compatible digital video signals 2 HDMI OUT 2 connector outputs full single link HDMI 1 3 video as well as DVI and modern HDMI compatible digital video signals 3 HDMI IN 1 connector accepts full single link HDMI 1 3 video as well as DVI and modern HDMI compatible digital video signals 4 HDMI IN 2 connector accepts full single link HDMI 1 3 video as well as DV...

Page 407: ...To use the CEC ITE you have to activate the HDMI function Use the procedures below to configure the generator to output HDMI To set up the generator for HDMI testing 1 Connect an HDMI to HDMI cable between the HDMI display device under test and any of the HDMI connectors on the generator as long as a sink device under test is connected to an 882C A source Tx connector or a source device under test...

Page 408: ... a serial connection or Telnet over an Ethernet LAN For instructions see Establishing a terminal session with the 882 on page 30 2 Query the device library to verify that it is provisioned in the generator CECQ 1 16 The generator returns the CECDev types provisioned in the generator library CECDEV00 xml Device Name Physical Address PA Product Type PT OSDN Logical Address LA CECDev00 0 0 0 0 0 TV T...

Page 409: ... HDMI TX1 CEC1 PT queries product device type assigned to HDMI TX1 CEC1 OSDN queries OSDN of device assigned to HDMI TX1 CEC1 VID queries vendor ID of device assigned to HDMI TX1 Now query the device assigned to the Rx outputs CEC3 LA queries logical address of device assigned to HDMI RX1 2 CEC3 PT queries product device type assigned to HDMI RX1 2 CEC3 OSDN queries OSDN of device assigned to HDMI...

Page 410: ...figures uses the assigned device Configure generator to log CEC messages The 882 can be configured to log CEC message and store them in a user defined directory To enable CEC logging 1 Enter the following command to enable logging on the HDMI connector CEC1 LOGG 1 enables logging on the HDMI Tx output 1 port CEC3 LOGG 1 enables logging on the HDMI Rx ports 2 Enable all logging with the following c...

Page 411: ...nu is presented 3 Select CEC item by pressing the adjacent soft key The CEC ping menu is presented 4 Select logical address of the device you want to ping by incrementing or decrementing the spot keys The logical address value for the LA item will change For example if you want to ping the device at logical address of 00 from a port that is connected to that port e g CEC1 you would press the softk...

Page 412: ...g the CEC Test image 1 Press the Content key and select the CECTest1 or CECTest2 image CECTest1 is for HDMI OUT1 and CECTest2 is for HDMI OUT 2 Alternatively enter the following commands to load the CECTest image IMGL CECTest1 img IMGU The CECTest1 image appears as shown below When you invoke this image the 882C sends two messages out the CEC1 core HDMI Out 1 to the device that is connected to it ...

Page 413: ...e 3 Send a message to the device under test to get its physical address CEC1 MSGX 3 0 83 request physical addr of device at logical addr 0 from address 3 4 Query message log to view response CEC1 MSGX view most recent response CEC bus query should return the following 0F 84 10 00 03 device under test returns its physical address the first digit 0 is the logical address of the target device the dev...

Page 414: ...rying the CEC message log You can view the CEC message log from a file or query the contents of the log through the command line The preferred way to view the CEC messages is to use the Auxiliary Channel Analyzer ACA which is covered in the next subsection The message log is a circular queue with twelve messages frames You can view any message in the queue through a command line query using an ind...

Page 415: ...of the log file appear in a text window To view CEC messages through the command line 1 Enter the following command to query the most recent message in the log CEC1 MSGX queries the message log for the most recent message 2 Enter the following command to query the log for a message with a specific opcode CEC1 MSGX 84 queries log for message to request device addr CEC bus query might return the fol...

Page 416: ...GX 83 P 2 returns value of 2nd byte of the parameters of a message with opcode 83 5 Enter the following command to query whether one message with a user specified opcode occurs before or after another CEC1 MSGX 83 O 84 returns order of message with opcodes specified The response will be one of 0 opcode 2 occurred before opcode 1 1 opcode 1 occurred before opcode 2 2 opcode 1 or opcode 2 not found ...

Page 417: ... log CEC messages 1 Access the ACA using the procedures described in Running the ACA on page 461 The ACA main page appears as a separate application window as shown below 2 Connect to the 882 using the procedures described in Running the ACA on page 461 ...

Page 418: ...76 Chapter 12 CEC Interactive Troubleshooting Environment ITE 3 Select the CEC core from the CEC pull down menu Send some CEC messages either from the CEC CDC Controller or the CEC command line ...

Page 419: ...driven interface and a graphical Java based application CEC CDC Controller for stress testing CEC devices under test The features in the ITE command line or CEC CDC Controller can be used to verify certain compliance related tests under various adverse conditions such as boundry testing of timing arbitration corrupt bit timing and acknowledgement Setting up the CEC CDC Controller You access the CE...

Page 420: ...TE To run the CEC CDC Controller 1 From the generator home page select CEC CDC Controller from the menu shown below Refer to Web interface on page 20 for instructions on access the generator home page L The CEC CDC Controller application appears in the browser ...

Page 421: ...e CEC CDC Controller screen This is the port of a device that you are emulating with the 882 3 Then specify the initiator and follower for the command that you want to enter You specify this in the lower panel under the headings Initiator and Follower These selections are shown on the screen shot below The Initiator is specified as a TV and the Follower as an Audio system ...

Page 422: ...80 Chapter 12 CEC Interactive Troubleshooting Environment ITE 4 Select the command that you wish to use for testing Refer to the screen shot below which shows selection of Image View On command L ...

Page 423: ...initiate the command You can view the command response using the Get Response activation button on the lower right of the CEC CDC Controller panel This is shown in the screen shot below You can also view the message and its response using the ACA application A screen shot of CEC messages appearing in the ACA is shown below ...

Page 424: ...bits in all subsequent messages sent out by the emulated device To test the bit timing through the command line 1 Enter the following command to modify the timing of the 1 bits in a message CEC1 CECT 1BIT 0 4 2 1 sets the low period of a one bit to 0 4 milliseconds and the total bit time to 2 1 milliseconds 2 Enter the following command to modify the timing of the 0 bits in a message CEC1 CECT 0BI...

Page 425: ...er as the device under test Refer to the screen shot below 2 Select the command that you wish to send from the Opcode pull down select box Setting Function Start bit low period sets the time duration of the start bit low period Start bit total bit period sets the time duration of the start bit total period which enables you to set the high period 1 bit low period sets the time duration of the 1 bi...

Page 426: ... you could change the timing for both the high and low periods of the start 0 bit and 1 bits simultaneously You have to reset each timing change Slide the slide bar to the desired timing setting as shown in the entry box above the slide bar Refer to the first screen shot below which shows and example of setting the start bit low period to 3 87ms Refer to the screen shot below which shows and examp...

Page 427: ...de Rev A 35 85 L 4 Send the command by clicking on the Send activation button 5 Monitor the timing parameters of the affected commands using the ACA Refer to To monitor the CEC bus channel on page 467 for instructions on monitoring the ...

Page 428: ... simulates a device accidently sending on the bus Bus arbitration tests involves sending a command to cause the device under test to try and seize the bus while also seizing the bus by the emulated device This simulates a condition where two devices may start sending at the same time which means they try and seize the bus at the same time When the device under test detects that another device is s...

Page 429: ...es the fields of the Test Arbitration portion of the CEC CDC Controller dialog box Refer to the screen shot below which shows enabling the Seize address bus arbitration test L 3 Select the device type in the Initiator and Follower pull down select boxes 4 Select the command that you wish to send from the Opcode pull down select box 5 Send the command by clicking on the Send activation button Setti...

Page 430: ...corruption of any single bit of the 8 data bits in a block You have to specify which byte you want to corrupt and which bit within that byte that you want to corrupt When you specify a byte and a bit to corrupt it applies to the specified byte and bit of the subsequent message on the CEC bus There are two commands that are used in tandem 1 CEC1 CECT BADS which takes an argument to specify which by...

Page 431: ...Controller dialog box Refer to the screen shot below which shows the Corrupt bit setting applied to Bit 3 of Byte 2 L 3 Select the device type in the Initiator and Follower pull down select boxes 4 Select the command that you wish to send from the Opcode pull down select box 5 Send the command by clicking on the Send activation button 6 Monitor the effects of the corrupt bit test using the ACA Ref...

Page 432: ...er to not acknowledge a message the target device will not pull the CEC bus low When a broadcast message is normally acknowledged the acknowledging device s leave the CEC bus high In order to not acknowledge a broadcast message the listening device will pull the CEC bus low The condition of incorrect acknowledgement will remain in place until you reset it Therefore once activated the improper ackn...

Page 433: ...is means that the CEC device that the 882 is emulating will not acknowledge an incoming data byte sent directly to it The second example shows an example where the Broadcast header data acknowlegement is disabled This means that the CEC device that the 882 is emulating will not acknowledge an incoming data byte sent directly to it L Setting Function Directed header Sets whether or not incoming dir...

Page 434: ...ll have to send a message from the 882 as the initiator that results in a response that is broadcasted to all CEC devices If you are testing a directed message you will have to send a messages from the 882 emulating device to the device under test that results in directed response Refer to the message specifications in the CEC portion of the HDMI specification for details on the response for vario...

Page 435: ...of the message However you can place the end of message bit in a block that is not the end of message and therefore cause an incomplete message to be sent since the target device is suppose to ignore additional blocks once the end of message bit is processed To simulate end of message anomolies 1 Enter the following command to simulate an end of message anomoly CEC1 CECT EOMS 2 indicates that the ...

Page 436: ...C1 Sends a Report ARC initiated command from CEC core 1 from a TV to an AVR Report ARC terminated Used by an ARC Tx device to indicate that ARC functionality has been deactived CECx MSGX I F C2 x CEC core in 882 I logical address of initiator F logical address of follower C2 opcode for Report ARC terminated CEC1 MSGX 0 5 C2 Sends Report ARC terminated command from CEC core 1 from a TV to an AVR Re...

Page 437: ...rt ARC Terminated command from the 882 to the AVR To test ARC functions of an ARC equipped TV while emulating an ARC equipped AVR 1 Enter the following command to request an ARC initiation on an ARC equipped TV 0 5 C3 TV sends the Request ARC Initiation command to the 882EA CEC core device 5 0 C0 882 responds with the Initiate ARC command from the 882 to the TV 0 5 C1 TV sends the Report ARC Initi...

Page 438: ... ARC commands through the CEC CDC Controller 1 From the generator home page select CEC CDC Controller from the menu shown below Refer to Web interface on page 20 for instructions on access the generator home page L The CEC CDC Controller application appears in the browser ...

Page 439: ...e CEC CDC Controller screen This is the port of a device that you are emulating with the 882 3 Then specify the initiator and follower for the command that you want to enter You specify this in the lower panel under the headings Initiator and Follower These selections are shown on the screen shot below The Initiator is specified as a TV and the Follower as an Audio system ...

Page 440: ...8 Chapter 12 CEC Interactive Troubleshooting Environment ITE 4 Select the command that you wish to use for testing Refer to the screen shot below which shows selection of Request ARC Initiation command L ...

Page 441: ... A 35 99 5 Click on the Send activation button associated with the command item to initiate the command You can view the messages and their response using the ACA application A screen shot of CEC messages appearing in the ACA is shown below L ...

Page 442: ...command CEC1 BUSM BITC Clears the bus monitor buffer for CEC1 Note It is important to clear the buffer regularly to ensure that you do not lose data To deactivate the CEC bus monitor 1 Disable the CEC bus monitor by entering the following command CEC1 BUSM OFF Turns the bus monitor off for CEC1 Querying the CEC bus monitor You can query the CEC bus monitor messages and bits You can check for bit t...

Page 443: ...s monitor buffer 1 Query the bus monitor for bit timing errors by entering the following command CEC1 BUSM NBIT Queries buffer for the number of bits A typical response might be 200 Indicates there are 200 bits in the buffer To query the bus monitor for bit timing errors 1 Query the bus monitor for bit timing errors by entering the following command CEC1 BUSM CHEK Queries buffer for bit timing err...

Page 444: ...ist or the bit was corrupted 0 index is a logical zero data bit 1 index is a logical one data bit 2 index is a start data bit 3 index corresponds to an idle period only no data 4 index corresponds to an error signal sent after a corrupted bit To query a message for the byte number of the end of message 1 Query a message in the bus monitor for the end of message byte CEC1 BUSM EOMB 3 Queries messag...

Page 445: ...s that the ACK bits were logical 0 indicating that it was a directed message CEC1 BUSM ACKV 4 Queries message in buffer that occurred 3 messages ago for polarity of ack bits 1 Shows that the ACK bits were logical 1 indicating that it was a broadcast message ...

Page 446: ...104 Chapter 12 CEC Interactive Troubleshooting Environment ITE ...

Page 447: ...t Instrument User Guide Rev A 35 105 13 Testing HDCP on HDMI Topics in this chapter Overview Testing DVI displays with HDCP Testing HDMI displays with HDCP Running an HDMI HDCP self test Understanding the HDCP test ...

Page 448: ...ontent Protection HDCP to test HDCP 1 0 1 1 and 1 2 compliant devices The procedures in this chapter instruct you on how to complete the HDCP tests for a DVI HDMI or DisplayPort sink devices The 882E and 882C are compliant HDMI HDCP sources For more information about HDCP see http www digital cp com ...

Page 449: ...ing of signal interfaces appears on the 882 s display as shown below b Choose the HDMI D item by pressing the adjacent soft key The interface is activated and the port outputs the currently selected image and format Alternatively to activate the interface through the command line interface enter the following commands XVSI 3 Activates the HDMI D interface ALLU Applies the interface setting to the ...

Page 450: ...oduction key The image will indicate if the test passed or failed If the test fails see Understanding the HDCP test on page 115 5 To test another device connect the cable to the new device The HDCP test starts automatically Alternatively you can enter the following command to initiate and run the test with any image displayed A zero is returned if the HDCP test is successful HDCP OUT1 HDCP OUT2 HD...

Page 451: ...y as shown below b Choose the HDMI H item by pressing the adjacent soft key The interface is activated and the port outputs the currently selected image and format Alternatively to activate the interface through the command line interface enter the following commands XVSI 4 Activates the HDMI H interface ALLU Applies the interface setting to the 882 3 Choose a standard format for example DMT0660 b...

Page 452: ...oduction key The image will indicate if the test passed or failed If the test fails see Understanding the HDCP test on page 115 5 To test another device connect the cable to the new device The HDCP test starts automatically Alternatively you can enter the following command to initiate and run the test with any image displayed A zero is returned if the HDCP test is successful HDCP OUT1 HDCP OUT2 HD...

Page 453: ...5 111 HDCP OUT1 HDCP OUT2 HDCP 2000 The image will indicate if the test passed or failed If the test fails see Understanding the HDCP test on page 115 6 To test another device connect the cable to the new device The HDCP test starts automatically ...

Page 454: ...ts the currently selected image and format Alternatively to activate the interface through the command line interface enter the following commands XVSI 4 Activates the HDMI H interface 3 for HDMI D ALLU Applies the interface setting to the 882 3 Press the Content key and choose the HdcpProd image by pressing the adjacent soft key Or if you are using HDMI OUT port 2 choose the HDCP2 test image 4 En...

Page 455: ...irst image version IMGU Activates the image version 5 When you are finished disable image versions by pressing the Options key and choosing More until a appears next to it Alternatively to disable image versions using the command line interface enter the following command ISUB 0 Disables sub images ...

Page 456: ...rface key A listing of signal interfaces appears on the 882 s display as shown below b Choose HDMI H item by pressing the adjacent soft key The interface is activated and the port outputs the currently selected image and format Alternatively to activate the interface through the command line interface enter the following commands XVSI 3 Selects the HDMI H interface ALLU Applies the interface setti...

Page 457: ...y 20 zeroes and 20 ones in it You can query this value with the following command i2cr hdl 74 0 5 I2CR OUT1 I2CR OUT2 I2CR VGA I2CR The display may return a value such as the following which is 07BE05CEA9 The value in binary is 0000011110111110000001011100111010101001 which contains 20 zeros and 20 ones 7 Write the Bksv value to the transmitter to trigger calculation of R0 8 Wait for the R0 calcul...

Page 458: ...dated to support HDCP CTS 1 2 You will need to select which CTS you wish to test to CTS 1 1 or CTS 1 2 prior to running the test Testing to the HDCP CTS 1 2 is only supported on the 882EA Note The HDCP compliance test is an optional feature available only with the 882 analyzer You must purchase the license for this feature The HDCP compliance test system enables developers of HDMI products to perf...

Page 459: ...dalone hardware device called the Encryption Status Tester EST below The EST device is currently only used for the 882EA model Although the features of the EST pertains to only a handful of tests it should be connected into the test setup for all tests of the 882EA model Note It is highly recommended that you run the tests that require the EST device in command line mode ...

Page 460: ...nt loca tions beginning center and end 21 3A_01 Repeater Downstream w Receiver Between HDMI Capable Transmitter and HDMI Capable Receiver Verifies that the encryption enable disable pulse is transmitted during the valid period that no data islands video data or guard band is transmitted during the keep out period and that no data island is transmitted during Line Key Calc period on the encrypted f...

Page 461: ...With Repeater 12 1B_02 Transmitter Downstream w Repeater Regular Procedure HPD After Reading R0 13 1B_03 Transmitter Downstream w Repeater Irregular Procedure Second Part of Authentication Timeout of KSV List READY 14 1B_04 Transmitter Downstream w Repeater Irregular Procedure Second Part of Authentication Verify V 15 1B_05 Transmitter Downstream w Repeater Irregular Procedure Second Part of Authe...

Page 462: ...tream w Repeater Irregular Procedure Second Part of Authentication Timeout of KSV List READY 28 3B_03 Repeater Downstream w Repeater Irregular Procedure Second Part of Authentication Verify V 29 3B_04 Repeater Downstream w Repeater Irregular Procedure Second Part of Authentication MAX_DEVS_EXCEEDED 30 3B_05 Repeater Downstream w Repeater Irregular Procedure Second Part of Authentication MAX_CASCAD...

Page 463: ...II_02 Repeater Upstream w Transmitter Between HDMI Capable Transmitter and Repeater Regular Procedure HDCP_HPD After Writing Aksv 40 3C_II_03 Repeater Upstream w Transmitter Between HDMI Capable Transmitter and Repeater Regular Procedure HDCP_HPD After Reading R0 41 3C_II_04 Repeater Upstream w Transmitter Between HDMI Capable Transmitter and Repeater Regular Procedure HDCP_HPD After Starting Thir...

Page 464: ... test requires that you use the SRM disc for the 1A 08 test if the source device has an optical drive Refer to To run the 1A 08 HDCP compliance test using the SRM disc on page 700 45 3C_II_08 Repeater Upstream w Transmitter Between HDMI Capable Transmitter and Repeater Irregular Procedure Second Part of Authentication MAX_DEVS_EXCEEDED 46 3C_II_09 Repeater Upstream w Transmitter Between HDMI Capab...

Page 465: ...T HDMI port labeled HDMI e Connect an HDMI cable from the 882 HDMI Tx 1 port to the HDMI input of the display device used to monitor the video The following diagram depicts the test setup for the 882EA 2 Activate the HDMI H interface on the output port as follows a Press the Interface key A listing of signal interfaces appears on the 882 s display as shown below b Choose the HDMI H item by pressin...

Page 466: ...ne of the following formats 1 640x480p at 59 94 60Hz 2 720x480p at 59 94 60Hz 3 720x576p at 50Hz Verify that the source is outputing the RGB color space If the 882EA cannot detect the incoming video enter the following command to turn on the EST QD PROD EST Turns on the EST 6 For Front Panel Operation Press the Tools key and choose the Reports item by pressing the adjacent soft key The following i...

Page 467: ...ter3C For this test select Source Test Number Specifies which test to run Or enables you to select all tests Please note that Quantum Data highly recom mends running the tests individually Source Max KSV Specifies the maximum number of KSVs the source DUT can read The valid values are 1 through 127 Source Authentication Count Specifies the number of times a source DUT attempts authentication befor...

Page 468: ... that does not have any downstream device connected Values are 1 yes 0 no Note 1 This parameter is not used when testing to HDCP CTS 1 2 CPTX SCEH 1 Indicates whether DUT source supports the content protection and EDID hot plug signal Values are 0 no 1 yes Note 1 This parameter is not used when testing to HDCP CTS 1 1 CPTX SDCZ 0 indicates whether what value the 882 should use for testing A value ...

Page 469: ...le below CPTX CPTU Initiates the execution of the test You can query the complete list of tests to choose from CPTX GCTN Queries the list of tests supported You can query the currently selected test to run with CPTX CPTR Queries the selected test to run see table below Refer to To view the HDCP compliance report on page 605 for procedures on how to view the generated report The following table des...

Page 470: ...ransmitter Downstream w Receiver w HDMI Capable Receiver Irregular Procedure Third Part of Authentication Verify Ri Ri invalid 8 1A_07a Transmitter Down stream w Receiver w HDMI Capable Receiver Irregular Procedure Third Part of Authentication Verify Ri Ri not returned 9 1A_08 Transmitter Downstream w Receiver w HDMI Capable Receiver Irregular Procedure SRM Requires SRM disc 10 1A_09 Transmitter D...

Page 471: ... test use the command line as shown below CPTX DUTT 1 Selects the device type as a source CPTX CPTR 9 Selects specific test e g 1A_08 CPTX CPTU Initiates the execution of the test Refer to To view the HDCP compliance report on page 605 for procedures on how to view the generated report Running HDCP compliance tests on HDMI receivers The receiver tests are the 2C 0x series For the 882E the 2C 01 an...

Page 472: ...able from the 882 HDMI Tx 2 port to the EST HDMI port labeled HDMI The following diagram depicts the test setup for the 882EA 2 Activate the HDMI H interface on the output port as follows a Press the Interface key A listing of signal interfaces appears on the 882 s display as shown below b Choose the HDMI H item by pressing the adjacent soft key The interface is activated and the display is shown ...

Page 473: ...if the HDCP CTS 1 2 option is not enabled on the 882EA DUT type Specifies the type of device under test This can be one of Sink Source Repeater3AB or Repeater3C For this test select Sink Test Number Specifies which test to run Or enables you to select all tests Please note that Quantum Data highly recom mends running the tests individually Sink 1 1 Features Supported Indicates whether the sink DUT...

Page 474: ...T sink supports 1 1 features such as Advanced Cipher and Enhanced Link Verification 1 yes 0 no CPTX WAIN 0 indicates whether DUT sink supports the handling of Ainfo commands sent by the source device Values are 1 yes 0 no CPTX SNAS 0 indicates whether DUT sink supports audio output Values are 1 yes 0 no 9 For the 2C 01 tests you will run the test 2 times for each setting of the Short Read Ri param...

Page 475: ...liance test menu The following is displayed on the 882 s LCD 13 Select CompRpt to initiate the HDCP compliance test Initiate each test individually The message HDCP Compliance Test is shown and then all the tests are shown in sequence Refer to To view the HDCP compliance report on page 605 for procedures on how to view the generated report Alternatively to run a specific test you can use the comma...

Page 476: ... to the indication Yes or No to continue Note The prompt asks you if the video appearing on the connected display looks good Looks good means that there is a picture and an absence of excessive snow CPTX CPTR Index Test Description 17 2C_01 Receiver Upstream w Transmitter w HDMI Capable Transmitter Regular Procedure With HDMI Capable Transmitter 18 2C_02 Receiver Upstream w Transmitter w HDMI Capa...

Page 477: ... from the repeater device under test output to the EST HDMI port labeled HDMI IN c Connect an HDMI cable from a compliant source device output to the input of the repeater device under test d Connect an HDMI cable from the 882 HDMI Rx 1 port to the EST HDMI port labeled HDMI OUT e Connect an HDMI cable from the 882 HDMI Tx 2 port to the EST HDMI port labeled HDMI f Connect an HDMI cable from the 8...

Page 478: ...MI IN 1 by pressing the adjacent soft key 5 Verify that the repeater is sending in video using the Timing measurement function of the analzyer Refer to Measuring timing of video signal on page 260 for information on running the timing test Verify that the source is outputting one of the following formats 1 640x480p at 59 94 60Hz 2 720x480p at 59 94 60Hz 3 720x576p at 50Hz Verify that the source is...

Page 479: ...ater DUT can support The valid values are 2 through 127 Repeater Authentication Count Specifies the number of times a repeater DUT attempts authentication before transitioning into the authentica tion state The valid values are 1 or greater Repeater CP EDID HPD Not used in HDCP 1 1 Not used for 3AB tests Only applies to 3C tests Indicates whether the repeater supports the handling of the Content P...

Page 480: ... Note 1 This parameter only applies when testing to HDCP CTS 1 1 CPTX RRAC 5 specifies number of times a repeater DUT attempts authentication before transitioning into the authenticated state Valid values 1 or greater CPTX RHPD 0 Indicates whether the repeater DUT has the capability to signal HDCP_HPD by user operation Values are 1 yes 0 no CPTX SDCZ 0 indicates whether what value the 882 should u...

Page 481: ...gh the command line as shown below CPTX CPTR 21 Selects specific test e g 3A_01 see table below CPTX CPTU Initiates the execution of the test You can query the complete list of tests to choose from CPTX GCTN Queries the list of tests supported You can query the currently selected test to run with CPTX CPTU Queries the selected test to run see table Refer to To view the HDCP compliance report on pa...

Page 482: ...ion Verify Bksv 24 3A_04 Repeater Downstream w Receiver Between HDMI Capable Transmitter and HDMI Capable Receiver Irregular Procedure First Part of Authentication Verify R0 25 3A_05 Repeater Downstream w Receiver Between HDMI Capable Transmitter and DVI Receiver Regular Procedure With DVI Receiver 26 3B_01 Repeater Downstream w Repeater Regular Procedure With Repeater 27 3B_02 Repeater Downstream...

Page 483: ...he EST b Connect an HDMI cable from the repeater device under test input to the EST HDMI port labeled HDMI OUT c Connect an HDMI cable from the 882 HDMI Rx 1 port to the HDMI output of the repeater device under test d Connect an HDMI cable from the 882 HDMI Tx 1 port to the EST HDMI port labeled HDMI IN e Connect an HDMI cable from the 882 HDMI Tx 2 port to the EST HDMI port labeled HDMI The follo...

Page 484: ...nter the following commands XVSI 4 Activates the HDMI H interface ALLU Applies the interface setting to the 882 3 Press the Interface key repeatedly until the following menu appears 4 Choose the HDMI IN 1 by pressing the adjacent soft key 5 Press the Tools key and choose the Reports item by pressing the adjacent soft key The following is displayed on the 882 s LCD 6 Select HDCP to access the HDCP ...

Page 485: ...ntication Count This parameter only applies to the 3AB repeater tests Specifies the number of times a repeater DUT attempts authentication before transitioning into the authentica tion state The valid values are 1 or greater Repeater Out OnlyRep not used in HDCP CTS 1 2 This parameter only applies to the 3AB repeater tests Indicates whether the repeater DUT outputs content to the downstream repeat...

Page 486: ... the Ri register The values are 0 for yes and 1 for no combined reads Note 1 For the 882CA you will have to run the 3C I 01 and 3C II 01 test using the command line and both methods of the Ri read CPTX RPFT 0 indicates whether DUT repeater supports 1 1 features such as Advanced Cipher and Enhanced Link Verification 1 yes 0 no CPTX RPAS 0 indicates whether DUT repeater supports audio output Values ...

Page 487: ...and then all the tests are shown in sequence Refer to To view the HDCP compliance report on page 605 for procedures on how to view the generated report Alternatively to run a specific test you can use the command line as shown below CPTX CPTR 31 Selects specific test e g 3C I 01 see table below CPTX CPTU Initiates the execution of the test You can query the complete list of tests to choose from CP...

Page 488: ...er Between HDMI Capable Transmitter and HDMI Capable Receiver Irregular Procedure Third Part of Authentication New Authentication 36 3C_I_06 Repeater Upstream w Transmitter Between HDMI Capable Transmitter and HDMI Capable Receiver Irregular Procedure Second Part of Authentication Verify Bksv 37 3C_I_07 Repeater Upstream w Transmitter Between HDMI Capable Transmitter and HDMI Capable Receiver Irre...

Page 489: ...Authentication DEVICE_COUNT 44 3C_II_07 Repeater Upstream w Transmitter Between HDMI Capable Transmitter and Repeater Irregular Procedure Second Part of Authentication DEPTH 45 3C_II_08 Repeater Upstream w Transmitter Between HDMI Capable Transmitter and Repeater Irregular Procedure Second Part of Authentication MAX_DEVS_EXCEEDED 46 3C_II_09 Repeater Upstream w Transmitter Between HDMI Capable Tra...

Page 490: ...t Explorer and type the 882 s IP address in the address entry field For example enter the following http 206 135 215 189 The 882 home page appears in the browser Note You can add the page to your list of favorite pages in your Web browser to avoid retyping the IP address each time you want to access the page ...

Page 491: ...st of reports currently available as shown below 3 Select the HDCP compliance test report from the list The report then appears in the browser window as shown below You can then save the report as a web page file for distribution The following is an example of a report for the HDCP compliance test for a display ...

Page 492: ...150 Chapter 13 Testing HDCP on HDMI The following is an example of a report for the HDCP compliance test for a source player ...

Page 493: ...882 Video Test Instrument User Guide Rev A 35 151 ...

Page 494: ...152 Chapter 13 Testing HDCP on HDMI The following is an example of a report for the HDCP compliance test for a repeater ...

Page 495: ...882 Video Test Instrument User Guide Rev A 35 117 14 Using Special Sync Output Topics in this chapter Overview Operating special sync for probe pulse Configuring special sync for FS LS or CS ...

Page 496: ...robe pulse The probe feature is used with a programmable probe pulse that is available on the Special Sync BNC connector This pulse is most often used to trigger an oscilloscope or synchronize an inspection camera The probe feature allows you to position the leading edge of the probe pulse anywhere within the video frame This feature greatly facilitates troubleshooting by enabling you to focus on ...

Page 497: ...t vertical sync The first field is always defined as the field that includes the top line of the displayed picture Y 0 This definition is always true whether the total number of active lines is odd or even With interlaced scanning lines continue to be numbered sequentially throughout the frame beginning with the leading edge of blanking of the first field Therefore the first two lines of blanking ...

Page 498: ... change 5 To save the changes press the Enter Options key The following choices appear on the generator s display To save the changes choose the Yes item by pressing the adjacent soft key To exit without saving the changes choose the No item To return to the previous screen without saving the changes choose the Back item 6 Press the Options key The options for setting the line or lines on which th...

Page 499: ...neously displayed in two different ways The horizontal position P nnnn is given in pixels relative to the leading edge of the horizontal sync If the leading edge of the probe is within the active portion of a line an alternate horizontal position X nnnn is also displayed indicating the number of pixels between the start of active video X 0 and the leading edge of the probe pulse in the horizontal ...

Page 500: ...e Establishing a terminal session with the 882 on page 30 or Establishing a Telnet session with the 882 on page 33 2 Enable the probe feature by entering the following commands FSPG 0 disable the frame sync on special sync output PSPG 1 enable the probe pulse PSPP 1 set the probe pulse polarity 0 for low or 1 for high PSPW 10 set pulse width to 10 pixels range 1 pixel to HTOT 1 PSHD 100 set pulse ...

Page 501: ...g of each frame In the case of interlaced video the frame pulse is output at the beginning of the blanking interval of the first field that immediately precedes the top line of active video To configure frame sync on the special sync output 1 Establish a session with the generator using either HyperTerminal over a serial connection or Telnet over an Ethernet LAN See Establishing a terminal session...

Page 502: ...e sync on the special sync output 1 Enable the line sync signal by entering the following commands FSPG 0 PSPG 0 LSPG 1 ALLU The value of composite sync CSPG does not matter once these are set 2 Set the line sync pulse polarity by entering the following command LSPP 1 1 high default ALLU To configure composite sync on the special sync output 1 Enable digital composite sync by entering the followin...

Page 503: ...ment User Guide Rev A 35 125 15 Script SDK Topics in this chapter Overview Creating executable program scripts ScriptSDK API functions by category ScriptSDK API functions by name ScriptSDK commands Sample ScriptSDK programs ...

Page 504: ...e on the personal computer PC and components that reside in the Quantum Data 881 882 generator The PC components include C compiler Libraries Header files Examples Templates Graphical User Interface These are automatically downloaded from the Quantum Data website and installed on the PC the first time the Quantum Data SDK is run The graphical user interface GUI program includes the text editor and...

Page 505: ...ink near the bottom of the generator s home page Image programs versus script programs When the Quantum Data SDK is launched the user has a choice of Image SDK or ScriptSDK depending on the type of application to be developed When the SDK is running the user can freely switch between Image SDK and Script SDK at any time The Image SDK is used to create resolution independent test patterns and other...

Page 506: ...ipt called demo the source file will be demo cpp The main function will be Script_demo and the resulting object file will be demo o The load execute command will send this object file to the generator and it will be visible in the Scripts menu as demo Returning true on exit The script s main function e g Script_demo must return true on exit As in any C or C program it is okay to have multiple retu...

Page 507: ... pressed the sc Canceled method will return true The script must check this state in order to detect whether the STOP key has been pressed A script should always return true when exiting See example programs testapi cpp and tcan cpp Some scripts may take over the top right soft key so it is not available for the STOP function The example program testapi is an example of this Therefore the generato...

Page 508: ...ary Refer to the table below for a list of menu commands title bar menu bar Editor pane Output pane Image Script SDK toggle status bar Menu Command Description File New Opens a new empty file in the tabbed editor pane New File from Template Only active in ScriptSDK mode this selection pre sents a dialog for opening a template file from the script_templates folder Open Presents a dialog for opening...

Page 509: ...piles the file in the curent editor tab Another File Presents a dialog for choosing a source file to com pile Load Execute Object File Presents a dialog for choosing the object file to load to the generator Control Pause Terminate Connection Connect to Presents a dialog for entering the IP address of the generator to connect to The dialog defaults to the generator that the application was launched...

Page 510: ...gh your Web browser The generator Home page appears 2 On the generator Home page click Script SDK The ScriptSDK Home page appears and then a message appears asking you to choose whether you want to connect to ScriptSDK or ImageSDK 3 Click Script SDK The ScriptSDK main window appears as shown below ...

Page 511: ...hich you launched ScriptSDK Click OK ScriptSDK attempts to connect to the generator and displays the message Successfully Connected to Unit when connected Click OK To open an existing script 1 Click File and then click Open The Open Script dialog box appears 2 Select the script you want to open and then click Open The script appears in the Editor pane You can have multiple scripts open at the same...

Page 512: ...ave Script dialog box appears In the Filename box type a name for the script and then click Save To create a new script using a template 1 Click File and then click New File from Template The Select Template dialog box appears 2 Select the template you want to use and then click Open The template appears in the Editor pane ...

Page 513: ...r in the Compile Output pane The output of the compile process is an executable object file that is placed in Scripts folder which is in the SDK folder on your 882 generator library directory To execute a script from the ScriptSDK GUI 1 Click Object File from the Load Execute pull down menu A dialog box called Choose Object File dialog box appears 2 Select the file you want to execute and then cli...

Page 514: ...e a script from the 882 command line 1 Load the script file that you want to execute by entering the following command SCRX LOAD testapi o loads script object from current scripts path For a list of scripts enter the following command SCRX LIST 2 Execute the script by entering the following command SCRX EXEC executes currently loaded script To stop a script that is executing enter the following SC...

Page 515: ...Description GetGC Get the handle of TGC Canceled Status of script cancel Pause Calibrate generator using self calibration circuitry Command Description SetCmdName Set name of command to execute GetCmdName Get name of command to execute Exec Execute current command Append Append to command string Reset Reset the command string SetDefaultTimeOut Set default command timeout GetDefaultTimeOut Get defa...

Page 516: ...sponse ClearResponse Reset the response Failed Get fail state of most recent command Succeed Get response state of most recent command GetError Get error value for failed command Command Description Write Write a string to front panel display InputInteger Get integer user input via front panel InputFloat Get float user input via front panel WaitForKeyPress Wait for user to press a soft key ClearLC...

Page 517: ...882 Video Test Instrument User Guide Rev A 35 139 ScriptSDK API functions by name This subsections lists the ScriptSDK functions by name and provides details about how to use them ...

Page 518: ...double precision float In the case of an integer argument the radix for the base of the resulting string can be specified optionally The default radix is 10 Command syntax sc Append const char txt sc Append UINT32 value UINT32 RADIX 10 sc Append double value Example Refer to example programs apndflt cpp apndint cpp sampseq cpp testapi cpp Related commands Exec GetCmdName Reset SetCmdName ...

Page 519: ...s soft key to confirm A script can also be set to cancel state if its CancelOnError status is true and the script encounters an error while executing To cancel script execution the script must check the return value of Canceled if it is true the script should immediately return a value of true Command syntax sc Canceled void Example Refer to example programs apndflt cpp apndint cpp sampseq cpp tca...

Page 520: ...K ClearLCD Class Front Panel Description Clears the entire display on the front panel of the generator Command syntax sc ClearLCD void Example Refer to example program testapi cpp Related commands Write InputInteger InputFloat ...

Page 521: ...Resets the command response string to a default empty state This can be used to clear a response after it is queried therefore the next non empty response will be a new response Command syntax sc ClearResponse void Related commands GetResponse GetIntResponse GetUIntResponse GetDoubleResponse ...

Page 522: ...nds can be specified optionally Command syntax sc Exec void sc Exec UINT32 timeout sc Exec char cmdString sc Exec char cmdString UINT32 timeout Return type UNIT32 Example Refer to sample programs apnd cpp apndflt cpp apndint cpp sampseq cpp tcan cpp testapi cpp Related commands SetCmdName Append GetCmdName SetDefaultTimeOut GetDefaultTimeOut Command Reference in Appendix A of 881 882 Series User G...

Page 523: ... Test Instrument User Guide Rev A 35 145 Failed Class Response Description Returns true if previous command execution failed Command syntax sc Failed void Return type bool Related commands Exec Succeed GetError ...

Page 524: ...sponse string is F or f the return value is false Otherwise it will attempt to convert the string to unsigned long via strtoul If the result of the conversion is zero the return value is false If the result is not zero the return value is true Command syntax sc GetBoolResponse void Return type bool Example Refer to sample program testapi cpp Related commands GetResponse GetIntResponse GetUIntRespo...

Page 525: ... value of true indicates that an execution error will cause Canceled to be true To terminate script execution on error program code should check the state of Canceled if it is true the program should exit via return true Command syntax sc GetCancelOnError void Return type bool Related commands Canceled SetCancelOnError GetError ...

Page 526: ...urrent contents of the command string The command string can be built using SetCmdName Append and Command syntax sc GetCmdName void Return type const char Example Refer to sample programs apnd cpp apndflt cpp testapi cpp Related commands SetCmdName Exec Append operator operator ...

Page 527: ... User Guide Rev A 35 149 GetDefaultTimeOut Class Command Description Returns the current timeout value for commands in milliseconds Command syntax sc GetDefaultTimeOut void Return type UNIT32 Related commands SetDefaultTimeOut ...

Page 528: ...s the most recent query response string and returns it as a double precision floating point value Command syntax sc GetDoubleResponse void Return type double Example refer to sample program testapi cpp Related commands GetResponse GetIntResponse GetUIntResponse ClearResponse ...

Page 529: ...uide Rev A 35 151 GetError Class Response Description Returns the error value of the previous command Command syntax sc GetError void Return type UNIT32 Example refer to sample program testapi cpp Related commands Exec Failed Succeed ...

Page 530: ... 15 Script SDK GetGC Class Control Description Returns a pointer to an instance of the graphics core object that provides dynamic linking with internal generator firmware Command syntax GetGC void Return type TGC ...

Page 531: ... Description Gets the most recent query response string and returns it as a signed 32 bit integer value Command syntax sc GetIntResponse void Return type INT32 Example refer to sample program testapi cpp Related commands GetResponse GetUIntResponse GetDoubleResponse ClearResponse ...

Page 532: ...st of multiple lines of output This method returns the number of lines of output from the most recent query Command syntax sc GetRespLineCount void Return type INT32 Example refer to sample program testapi cpp Related commands GetResponse GetIntResponse GetUIntResponse GetDoubleResponse ClearResponse ...

Page 533: ...he displayed prompt number of digits whole and fractional and initial value The prompt string is required The whole and frac parameters are optional and both default to 4 The initValue parameter is optional and defaults to zero Command syntax sc InputFloat const char prompt UINT32 whole UINT32 frac double initValue Return type double Example refer to example program testapi cpp Related commands In...

Page 534: ...ion of the displayed prompt number of digits and initial value The prompt string is required The numDigits parameter is optional and defaults to 4 The initValue parameter is optional and defaults to zero Command syntax sc InputInteger const char prompt UINT32 numDigits INT32 initValue Return type INT32 Example refer to example program testapi cpp Related commands InutFloat ClearLCD ...

Page 535: ...ause Class Control Description Forces a delay in program execution for specified number of milliseconds Command syntax sc Pause UINT32 timeValue Return type void Example refer to example programs apndflt cpp apndint cpp sampseq cpp tcan cpp testapi cpp ...

Page 536: ...set Class Command Description Clears the command string resets it to the default empty state Command syntax sc Reset void Return type void Example refer to example program testapi cpp Related commands SetCmdName Append GetCmdName ...

Page 537: ...e an error or failure will cause the Canceled state to be set to true To terminate script execution on error program code should check the state of Canceled if it is true the program should exit via return true Command syntax sc SetCancelOnError bool Return type void Example refer to example program testapi cpp Related commands Canceled GetCancelOnError GetError ...

Page 538: ...cuted later The command string can be added to with Append The command can be executed with Exec Command syntax sc SetCmdName const char Return type void Example refer to example programs apnd cpp apndflt cpp testapi cpp Related commands refer to example programs apnd cpp apndflt cpp testapi cpp ...

Page 539: ...ltTimeOut Class Command Description Sets the current timeout value for commands in milliseconds Command syntax sc SetDefaultTimeOut UINT32 Return type void Example sc SetDefaultTimeOut 5000 commands will time out in 5 seconds Related commands GetDefaultTimeOut ...

Page 540: ...DK Succeed Class Response Description Returns true if previous command execution was successful Command syntax sc Succeed void Return type bool Example refer to example program testapi cpp Related commands Exec Fail GetError ...

Page 541: ...seconds Void argument or zero will result in wait for ever Returns a value representing the key pressed one of the following QD_KEY_LEFT_1 QD_KEY_LEFT_2 QD_KEY_LEFT_3 QD_KEY_LEFT_4 QD_KEY_RIGHT_1 QD_KEY_RIGHT_2 QD_KEY_RIGHT_3 QD_KEY_RIGHT_4 Command syntax sc WaitForKeyPress void sc WaitForKeyPress UINT32 Return type QDKeyId Example refer to example program testapi cpp Related commands Write ClearL...

Page 542: ...display is 20 characters by 4 lines Allowable values of column are in the range of 0 19 Allowable values of row are 0 3 Command syntax sc Write UINT32 column UINT32 row char string Return type void Example refer to example programs apndflt cpp testapi cpp Related commands ClearLCD WaitForKeyPress InputFloat InputInteger ...

Page 543: ... a string to the command string The command string is represented by the pointer to the script context sc This is similar to SetCmdName Command syntax sc string Example sc SCRX LOAD set the command string also refer to example program testapi cpp Related commands Operator SetCmdName Append Exec ...

Page 544: ... ASCII character string if necessary The command string is represented by a pointer to the script context sc This is similar to Append Command syntax sc string sc char sc double sc UINT32 Example sc testapi o append filename to the command string also refer to example program testapi cpp Related commands Operator Append SetCmdName Exec ...

Page 545: ... commands This subsection lists the commands related to the ScriptSDK that can be executed through the 882 s command line interface These can be executed through the serial port a telnet session or through the command utility available through the 882 home page ...

Page 546: ... LIST Class Scriptrunner Description Lists the executable script object files currently residing in the generator Query syntax SCRX LIST Query response list of executable script object files Example SCRX LIST list executable scripts ...

Page 547: ...turns the current script path name Command syntax SCRX PATH name name a valid MS DOS compatible path and filename 8 characters minus any extension Query syntax SCRX PATH name returns a valid MS DOS compatible path and filename for the name of the path Query response path name Example SCRX PATH tffs0 Library Scripts sets script path to default directory ...

Page 548: ...ption Executes the currently loaded script The query returns the name of the currently executing script Command syntax SCRX EXEC Query syntax SCRX EXEC Query response path and name of currently executing script object file Example SCRX EXEC execute currently loaded script ...

Page 549: ...e specified path The query returns the name of the currently loaded script Command syntax SCRX LOAD name name a valid script file including o extension which can optionally include a fully qualified path Query syntax SCRX LOAD Query response name of currently loaded script object file Example SCRX LOAD testapi o loads script object from current scripts path SCRX LOAD tffs0 library userdata testapi...

Page 550: ... generator Command syntax SCRX KILL name name a valid script file including o extension which can optionally include a fully qualified path Example SCRX KILL testapi o deletes script object testapi o from current scripts path SCRX KILL tffs0 library userdata testimg o deletes file testimg o from specified path ...

Page 551: ...Video Test Instrument User Guide Rev A 35 173 SCRX STOP Class Scriptrunner Description Stops the execution of a script Command syntax SCRX STOP Example SCRX STOP stops execution of currently running script ...

Page 552: ...174 Chapter 15 Script SDK Sample ScriptSDK programs This subsections provides some example ScriptSDK scripts to help you understand how to create scripts for specific applications ...

Page 553: ...c enable printf to serial terminal sc Exec CIOY create a command to load the DMT0660 timing format sc SetCmdName FMTL sc Append tffs0 Library Formats dmt0660 xml print the entire command string to the serial port printf s n sc GetCmdName invoke the full FMTL command using the previously assigned command string sc Exec create a command to use the selected timing format sc SetCmdName FMTU invoke the...

Page 554: ...or this example sc Exec IMGL Cache0 Images colorbar img select RGB video out sc Exec XVSI 9 enable RGB video sc Exec AVST 2 apply the above image and interface selections sc Exec ALLU step the analog video signal swing from 0 1 volts to 1 0 volts in steps of 0 10 volts pausing at each level for aswing 0 10 aswing 1 01 aswing 0 10 build the command to set analog video swing sc SetCmdName AVSS sc Ap...

Page 555: ...interface XVSI specifies which video output interface to use sc SetCmdName XVSI use Append function to convert formatnum to character and insert it into command string Base 10 conversion For this example it will be either 4 5 or 6 sc Append formatnum 10 print the entire command string to the serial port printf s n sc GetCmdName execute the completed XVSI command sc Exec This switch will select a v...

Page 556: ...tCmdName FMTL tffs0 Library Formats ntsc xml invoke the selected format sc Exec use the format that was selected above sc Exec FMTU delay for 10 seconds on each interface sc Pause 10000 this will cause script to immediately exit if STOP is pressed if sc Canceled return true return true ...

Page 557: ... In ScriptSDK commands have the same syntax as if they were being entered at a command prompt For full details on command syntax refer to the Command Reference in Appendix A of the 881 882 User Guide available at http www quantumdata com downloads index asp Note Note this script and the sequence that it evolved from expects you to have previously selected a compatible interface such as VGA or HDMI...

Page 558: ...he0 Images Acer1 img sc Exec IMGU DELY 3 0000000E 00 DELY sc Pause 3000 VERS 0 VERS sc Exec IVER 0 XVSG 7 XVSG sc SetCmdName XVSG sc Append 1 1 1 sc Exec if sc Canceled return true printf Check Point 1 n STEP STEP IMG Cache0 Images Cubes img IMG sc Exec IMGL Cache0 Images Cubes img sc Exec IMGU DELY 4 0000000E 00 DELY sc Pause 4000 if sc Canceled return true printf Check Point 2 n ...

Page 559: ...se 5500 if sc Canceled return true printf Check Point 3 n STEP STEP FMT tffs0 Library formats DMT0860 xml FMT sc Exec FMTL tffs0 Library Formats DMT0860 xml sc Exec FMTU IMG Cache0 Images RampX img IMG sc Exec IMGL Cache0 Images RampX img sc Exec IMGU DELY 3 0000000E 00 DELY sc Pause 3000 if sc Canceled return true printf Check Point 4 n STEP STEP XVSG 1 XVSG sc Exec XVSG 0 0 1 ...

Page 560: ...G 7 XVSG sc Exec XVSG 1 1 1 if sc Canceled return true printf Check Point 5 n STEP STEP FMT tffs0 Library Formats DMT1060 XML FMT sc Exec FMTL tffs0 Library Formats DMT1060 xml sc Exec FMTU IMG Cache0 Images Master img IMG sc Exec IMGL Cache0 Images Master img sc Exec IMGU DELY 5 0000000E 00 DELY sc Pause 5000 return true ...

Page 561: ...n reports to a serial terminal whether it was cancelled include stdio h include QDScriptContext h bool Script_tcan QDScriptContext sc sc Exec CIOY enable printf to serial terminal printf Pause for 10 seconds n sc Pause 10000 pause for 10 seconds if sc Canceled printf Script was canceled n else printf Script completed n return true ...

Page 562: ...on of sending command and getting response back one way to execute a command query sc Exec CIOY enable printf to serial terminal another way to execute a command query sc SetCmdName VERF query generator firmware version sc Exec execute the command printf The return value of command s is s n sc GetCmdName sc GetResponse Demonstration of Pause printf Pause for 5 seconds n sc Pause 5000 if sc Cancele...

Page 563: ... is s n index sc GetResponse index Demonstration of Operator and overloading sc Reset if sc Canceled return true sc SCRX sc LIST sc sc Exec printf nThe return value of command s is s n sc GetCmdName sc GetResponse Demonstration of QDLcd associated APIs InputInteger InputFloat if sc Canceled return true Test InputInteger const char prompt API INT32 test sc InputInteger My test printf nThe input of ...

Page 564: ...pressed Yes n else if pressedKey QD_KEY_RIGHT_4 printf nUser pressed No n else printf nPressed Invalid Key n Demonstration of GetUIntResponse if sc Canceled return true sc SetCmdName DPTR sc ClearScreen sc Exec if sc Succeed printf nTest GetUIntResponse The return value of command s is d n sc GetCmdName sc GetUIntResponse else printf nCommand execution failed n Demonstration of GetIntResponse if s...

Page 565: ...d n sc GetError Demonstration of GetBoolResponse if sc Canceled return true sc SetCmdName PDAX RPTG sc ClearScreen sc Exec if sc Succeed printf nTest GetBoolResponse The return value of command s is d n sc GetCmdName sc GetBoolResponse else printf nCommand execution failed n Demonstration of Pause printf Pause for 6 seconds n sc Pause 6000 if sc Canceled return true printf nWake up from Pause 6000...

Page 566: ...rror if sc Canceled printf The test exited because the command is not valid n return true else printf Script not cancelled Execution should continue n Then set CancelOnError to be TRUE the test should continue to next sc SetCancelOnError true sc SetCmdName VERP sc Exec printf nThe error status of the invalid command s is d n sc GetCmdName sc GetError if sc Canceled printf The test exited because t...

Page 567: ..._timinglog QDScriptContext sc INT32 num 1 open a text file to write to FILE outfile fopen card0 timing_log txt w fprintf outfile Start of timing analyzer log n n fprintf outfile Delay between timing measurements d milliseconds n delay sc Exec DATE fprintf outfile Measurement start date and time s sc GetResponse sc Exec TIME fprintf outfile s n n sc GetResponse fprintf outfile Number tSCAN tPRAT t ...

Page 568: ...nceled sc Exec DATE fprintf outfile nMeasurement end date and time s sc GetResponse sc Exec TIME fprintf outfile s n n sc GetResponse fprintf outfile End of timing analyzer log n fclose outfile return true query and write measured timing values to the text file fprintf outfile d t t num sc Exec TMAX SCAN fprintf outfile s t sc GetResponse sc Exec TMAX PRAT fprintf outfile s t sc GetResponse sc Exe...

Page 569: ...sc Exec TMAX HSPP fprintf outfile s t sc GetResponse sc Exec TMAX VTOT fprintf outfile s t sc GetResponse sc Exec TMAX VRES fprintf outfile s t sc GetResponse sc Exec TMAX VSPD fprintf outfile s t sc GetResponse sc Exec TMAX VSPW fprintf outfile s t sc GetResponse sc Exec TMAX VSPP fprintf outfile s t sc GetResponse sc Exec TMAX HVPD fprintf outfile s n sc GetResponse increase the measurement numb...

Page 570: ...pt SDK if sc Canceled sc Exec DATE fprintf outfile nMeasurement end date and time s sc GetResponse sc Exec TIME fprintf outfile s n n sc GetResponse fprintf outfile End of timing analyzer log n fclose outfile return true ...

Page 571: ...882 Video Test Instrument User Guide Rev A 35 193 A Command Reference Topics in this appendix Commands by category Commands by name ...

Page 572: ...mber of errors in error queue ERRY Retrieve most recent error from error queue ERRC Clear all errors in error queue OERR Check for error queue overflow NOTU Disables ongoing command execution until communication is complete TOGG Enable disable hot plug setting of source format list via EDID function INIT Restore generator RAM storage to factory default condition DATE Sets generator system date TIM...

Page 573: ...d on generator LCD display LEDS Get status of generator signals DEVS List all devices LS List contents of current directory CAT View contents of a text file PWD Get current directory name RM Remove a file from current directory TASK List current tasks Command Description ENET Get generator s ethernet MAC address ENET IP Set generator s ethernet IP address ENET MASK Set generator s ethernet subnet ...

Page 574: ...r value STB Get status byte register value GPIB Set GPIB port address Command Description DDT Execute command on generator when triggered TRG Execute trigger command on generator TST Perform self text on generator WAI Wait for command completion before sending prompt SEOS Set how generator reads strings Command Description BLUG Enable disable blue video output GRNG Enable disable green video outpu...

Page 575: ... image file IMGB Begin an image editing session IMGE End an image editing session IMGS Save a new image to filename specified by IMGN ANIM Determine if image has animation DELX Set horizontal shift for each step of SlideG SlideRGB image DELY Set vertical shift for each step of SlideG SlideRGB image DWEL Set number of frames for each step of SlideG SlideRGB image ISTP Allow contents of custom image...

Page 576: ...oxes GRIH Draw equally spaced horizontal lines grill GRIV Draw equally spaced vertical lines grill HATI Draw inside out color crosshatch with boxes HATO Draw outside in color crosshatch with boxes LIMI Draw nine markers to define active video area LINE Draw a line between two points OVAL Draw an oval PAGE Fill a rectangular area with a repeating character RECT Draw a rectangle with sides parallel ...

Page 577: ...Set vertical shifting increment ISHE End an imageshift file editing session ISHS Save a new imageshift file to filename specified by ISHN ISHU Update generator with current imageshift file edit buffer contents ISHA Save imageshift file edit buffer contents to a specified filename ISHK Delete a saved imageshift file ISHP Set default imageshift path Command Description FMTQ Get list of formats store...

Page 578: ... Description XVSI Interface Enable disable video signal interface output XVSI IN Interface Enable disable video signal interface input SSST Synchronization Set display sync signal type GAMC Gamma Correction Enable disable video gamma correction factor GAMA Gamma Correction Set video gamma correction factor CXAR Active Format HDMI Set aspect ratio of source image content EXAR Active Format HDMI Set...

Page 579: ...ital quantizing level NLNK Digital Video Set number of links used by LVDI digital outputs BALG Digital Video Enable disable adding DC balancing to Open LVDI digital output PREG Digital Video Enable disable pre emphasis to Open LVDI digital outputs DVSP Digital Video Set signal polarity DVPT Digital Video Set output protocol DVI or HDMI DVSM Digital Video Set sampling mode DVSS OUT1 DVSS OUT2 DVSS ...

Page 580: ...tal horizontal sync output VSPG Digital Sync Gates Enable disable digital vertical sync output CSPG Digital Sync Gates Enable disable all digital composite sync outputs PSPG Digital Sync Gates Enable disable probe pulse on special sync output LSPG Digital Sync Gates Enable disable digital horizontal sync output FSPG Digital Sync Gates Enable disable digital frame sync output PCPG Digital Sync Gate...

Page 581: ... HSPD Horizontal Sync Set horizontal sync pulse delay HSPW Horizontal Sync Set width of horizontal sync pulse HVPD Horizontal Sync Get pixel delay between horizontal and vertical sync pulses VSPD Vertical Sync Set vertical sync pulse delay VSPW Vertical Sync Set vertical sync pulse width EQUB Composite Sync Set equalization interval before vertical sync pulse EQUA Composite Sync Set equalization i...

Page 582: ...foFrame DACA Channels Set active audio channels DACG Channels Set gated audio channels SDAU SPDIF analyzer Initiates the measurement of the audio received on the SPDIF In connector of the 882EA SDAX ARAT SPDIF analyzer Queries for the sampling rate of the audio received on the SPDIF In connector of the 882EA SDAX IECD SPDIF analyzer Queries for the IEC header information of the audio received on t...

Page 583: ... file SEQA Save sequence edit buffer contents to a specified filename SEQU Update hardware with current sequence editor contents SEQK Delete a saved sequence file SEQP Set default sequence path SMOD Set sequence mode DNUM Enable display sequence step number display NSTP Get number of sequence steps in the buffer Command Description SEQN Create a new sequence file SEQB Begin a sequence editing sess...

Page 584: ...session DIRE End a directory editing session DIRS Save contents of directory edit buffer in memory DIRT Set directory type to be created NAMF Get index number of file in directory edit buffer NAMI Move file to new index position NAMK Delete a file from directory edit buffer NAMQ Get list of files in directory edit buffer NAMY Delete a file from index position in directory edit buffer Command Descr...

Page 585: ...EDID from connected device I2CR Read EDID data using I2C bus I2CW Write EDID data using I2C bus XDID Set new EDID structure DVI HDMI Analyzer EDE Set HDMI input port with contents of EDID buffer DVI HDMI Analyzer STRG Enable disable SCL low signal stretching DVI HDMI Analyzer Command Description DIDN Create a new EDID file DIDB Begin an EDID editing session XDID Set new EDID structure DVI HDMI Ana...

Page 586: ...iption RGBW Set RGB levels to within the current lookup table SLUT Set colorset for color lookup table Command Description XACR Set Audio Clock Regeneration packet XGDP Set Generic Control packet XGCP Enable disable Audio Video Mute AVMUTE in general control packet MUTE Enable disable Audio Video Mute AVMUTE feature DPTG Set gated packet types DPTR Set frequency for General Control packet DPGU Upd...

Page 587: ...Frame packet data XAUD Set Audio InfoFrame packet data XMPG Set MPEG InfoFrame packet data DVIC Sets video identification code in AVI InfoFrame IFAX RPTU Set gated InfoFrame types IFTR Set frequency for InfoFrame types IFGU Update generator with current InfoFrame content Command Description ...

Page 588: ...s positioned in the vsync pulse during the 2C 04 test using the Encryption Status Tester device CPTX RKSV Specifies the maximum number of KSVs supported by the repeater device under test for an HDCP compliance test CPTX ROOR Specifies whether a repeater device under test outputs content to the downstream repeater that does not have any downstream devices connected CPTX RPFT Specifies if the repeat...

Page 589: ...of measured pixels after pseudo noise measurement GPER Get pixel error rate after pseudo noise measurement HPDG Set assertion pulse width of analyzer s hot plug pulse PDAX FRMS Set number of frames to analyze in pixel data analysis test PDAX FRMS Save a captured reference frame to a file to a file on the PCM card PDAX CAPF Capture a reference frame for pixel data analysis test PDAX GFCL Load a cap...

Page 590: ...ived data stream audio or video LSAX RPTG Enable disable HTML report of lipsync analyzer measurement results LSAX TLAT Get number of seconds delay between received audio and video LSGX LSGM Enable disable lipsync testing of display sink device LSGX LSGU Update hardware with lipsync generator settings LSGX PLAT Set precedence of data streams from lipsync image LSGX TLAT Set latency delay between au...

Page 591: ...882 Video Test Instrument User Guide Rev A 35 213 Commands by name ...

Page 592: ...214 Appendix A Command Reference CLS Clear Status Class GPIB Description Clears the Event Status Register the Status Byte and the output buffer Command syntax CLS Related commands ESR STB ...

Page 593: ...ring to be executed when the generator is triggered with the TRG command Only one DDT command can be pending at a time The command or query arguments must be enclosed in quotes Command syntax DDT command_1 command_2 command_n Example DDT imgl flat imgu TRG to invoke the command line in quotes from the DDT command Related commands TRG ...

Page 594: ... Event Status register That is when a bit in the Event Status register goes high and the corresponding bit in the Event Status Enable register is a 1 it is enabled and will cause the ESB bit in the Status Byte register to go high The ESE query returns the current value of the Event Status Enable register Command syntax ESE mask mask 0 255 Example ESE 8 Query syntax ESE Query response mask NL Where...

Page 595: ...rrent value of the Event Status register After this command is executed the Event Status register is cleared This is the only way of clearing any bit in the Event Status register except by the CLS command Query syntax ESR Returns registerValue NL Where registerValue is in integer NR1 form Related commands CLS ESE ...

Page 596: ...8 2 standards Query syntax IDN Returns Company Model SerialNumber FirmwareVersion Company Always QuantumData Model Product model description SerialNumber Serial number of nonvolatile SRAM module Dallas chip in generator FirmwareVersion Version number of currently installed firmware Example R idn QuantumData 802BT DVI AN 7514191 7 38380000 ...

Page 597: ...set the OPC bit in the Event Status register when all operations have been completed Since there are no overlapping commands the OPC command will set the OPC bit immediately when executed The OPC query will put a 1 in the output buffer when all operations are complete Command syntax OPC Query syntax OPC Returns NL ...

Page 598: ...eSet Class GPIB Description Performs a device reset This places the 882 into a known condition These conditions are IEEE 488 address set to 15 Status Byte cleared Input queue empty Output queue empty Command syntax RST Related commands CLS ...

Page 599: ...te register to enable a condition to request service from the system controller That is when a bit in the Status Byte register goes true and the corresponding bit in the Service Request Enable register is also true the 882 will request service through the GPIB The SRE query returns the current value of the Service Request Enable register Command syntax SRE mask mask 0 255 Example SRE 16 Query synt...

Page 600: ...s GPIB Description Returns the current value of the Status Byte register The value stored in the Status Byte register is not affected by reading it Query syntax STB Returns statusByte NL Where statusByte is in integer NR1 form Related commands SRE ESR CLS ...

Page 601: ... control Description Triggers the generator programmatically The TRG command is used to trigger a command or command string entered with the TRG command Command syntax TRG Example DDT imgl flat imgu TRG Invoke the command line in quotes from the DDT command Related commands DDT ...

Page 602: ...nition Causes the 882 to perform a self test and report the results in a response message If the self test fails an ASCII 1 is placed in the output buffer otherwise an ASCII 0 is placed in the output buffer Query syntax TST Returns result NL Where result is in integer NR1 form ...

Page 603: ...IMGU ALLU BOOT INIT or SCAL command is received even before these commands have finished executing If the system controlling the generator must know when a command has finished executing use a semicolon to append the suffix WAI Command syntax command WAI command FMTU IMGU ALLU BOOT INIT or SCAL Example FMTL vga_m3 Load a format from memory to buffer IMGL SMPTE133 Load the SMPTE RP 133 image to buf...

Page 604: ...uses three parameters the color and the X and Y coordinates Command syntax ADOT color x y color available colors x positive integer number y positive integer number Other required commands The FMTU command instructs the generator to use the new setting The ALLU command updates hardware to the new setting and redraws the test image Example ADOT White 200 300 Draw white dot at X 200 Y 300 ...

Page 605: ...t Instrument User Guide Rev A 35 227 ALLE end ALL Editor sessions Class Directory format image and sequence editor control Description Same as entering all of the DIRE FMTE IMGE and SEQE commands Command syntax ALLE ...

Page 606: ... current test image is re rendered using the latest system and format parameter data Command syntax ALLU Other required commands This command updates the generator after using the FMTL IMGL and SEQL commands to load new files from memory This command also can be used to see the results of work when using commands to edit formats or custom images Example FMTL vga_m3 Load a format from memory to buf...

Page 607: ... Description Returns a flag indicating if the image currently being displayed is animated Query syntax ANIM imageName Query response 0 Not animated static image or the image was not found 1 Animated Example ANIM cubes to determine if the cubes image has animation 1 response indicates that cubes is an animated image ...

Page 608: ...iagonal edges when appearing anywhere in a custom image This command affects only television formats on 801GX generators It causes the leading and trailing edges of rectangles to have controlled rise and fall times Command syntax ANTI Other required commands The IMGU or ALLU command must be used to redraw the custom image using anti aliased primitives ...

Page 609: ...pling rate of the audio stream output from the generator This sets the CT parameter of the Audio InfoFrame as specified in EIA CEA 861 B table 20 Command syntax ARAT rate rate 192 0E3 176 4E3 96 0E3 88 2E3 48 0E3 default 44 1E3 32 0E3 Example ARAT 48 0E3 ALLU Related commands XAUD SF parameter Class Format parameter setting Analog video signal ...

Page 610: ... Video grayscale 4 CVBS or S Video color 5 Analog YPrPb old SMPTE 240M HDTV 6 Analog YPrPb ITU BT 601 ANSI SMPTE 170M TV 7 Analog YPrPb SMPTE RP177 HDTV 8 YPrPb ITU R BT 709 HDTV Query syntax AVST Query response type Other required commands DVST must be set to zero when analog video is used The FMTU command instructs the generator to use the new setting The ALLU command updates hardware to the new...

Page 611: ...es adding DC balancing to the Open LVDI digital outputs on generators that support LVDI outputs FPD Link compatible displays use unbalanced BALG 0 while OpenLDI displays use balanced BALG 1 The BALG query returns the current setting of BALG Command syntax BALG mode mode 0 OFF 1 ON Query syntax BALG Query response mode Other required commands FMTU or ALLU ...

Page 612: ...e Description Toggles the blue video signal gate Command syntax BLUG mode mode 0 disable 1 enable Query syntax BLUG Query response 0 or 1 Other required commands ALLU to invoke the command Related commands GRNG REDG Example BLUG 0 ALLU disable blue video component ...

Page 613: ...882 Video Test Instrument User Guide Rev A 35 235 BOIT BOot and IniTialize Class System control Description Initializes the generator without going through a self calibration Command syntax BOIT ...

Page 614: ...ol Description Causes the generator to go through its standard power up procedure Self calibration is not performed The procedure checks all RAM storage locations for corrupt data This command is equivalent to turning the generator off and then on Command syntax BOOT ...

Page 615: ...xternal compressed audio source This sets the MBR parameter of the Audio InfoFrame as specified in EIA CEA 861 B The BRAT query returns the current compressed digital audio bit rate Command syntax BRAT rate rate 0 0 audio is not compressed 8000 16000 24000 or higher multiple of 8 000 Query syntax BRAT Example BRAT 32000 IFGU Related commands XAUD MBR parameter ...

Page 616: ... 1 0 DISPNAME FormatVESAClassQD DISPNAME HEADER DATA TYPE SOURCE TYPE NAME tffs0 Library Formats DMT0659 xml NAME NAME tffs0 Library Formats DMT0660 xml NAME NAME tffs0 Library Formats DMT0672 xml NAME NAME tffs0 Library Formats DMT2060 xml NAME NAME tffs0 Library Formats DMT2075 xml NAME NAME tffs0 Library Formats SMT0660 xml NAME NAME tffs0 Library Formats SMT0660D xml NAME NAME tffs0 Library Fo...

Page 617: ...6 DTS HDMA 5 1 192000 00 dtshdma 48kHz VBR 51ch HDMI_HBR ba pcm 7 DTS HDMA 7 1 192000 00 dtshdma 48kHz VBR 71ch HDMI_HBR ba pcm 8 DOLBY AC3 2 0 48000 00 2khz2ch 0dB_ac3 pcm 9 DOLBY EAC3 2 0 192000 00 1khz2ch 20dB_ec3 pcm 10 DOLBY EAC3 5 1 192000 00 1khz51ch 20dB_ec3 pcm 11 DOLBY EAC3 7 1 192000 00 1khz71ch 1frame_ec3 pcm 12 DOLBY TRUEHD 7 1 192000 00 1khz71ch 20dB_mlp pcm 13 DOLBY TRUEHD 2 0 19200...

Page 618: ...ine is 2 pixels thick if the format has an even number of active lines The primitive uses a single parameter the color of the cross Command syntax CENT color color available colors Other required commands The FMTU command instructs the generator to use the new setting The ALLU command updates hardware to the new setting and redraws the test image Example CENT red Draw a small red cross in center o...

Page 619: ...test index you wish to run For HDMI 0 through 46 where 46 will run all tests For DisplayPort 0 through 48 where 48 will run all tests Other required commands The CPTX CPTU command initiates the running of the test Query syntax CPTX CPTR Query response 1 through 46 for HDMI or 1 through 48 for DisplayPort Example 1 CPTX CPTR 1 Sets up the generator to run the 1A 01 test CPTX CPTU Initiates the test...

Page 620: ...sed with the CPTX CPTR command which specifies which test should be run Command syntax CPTX CPTU Other required commands The CPTX CPTR command specifies which HDCP test to run Example 1 CPTX CPTR 1 Sets up the generator to run the 1A 01 test CPTX CPTU Initiates the test specified with the CPRT command Example 2 CPTX CPTR 46 Sets up the generator to run all HDCP test CPTX CPTU Initiates the test sp...

Page 621: ...P Compliance Description Indicates whether the HDCP authentication will use long or short reads during the authentication This is one of the Product Capabilities Parameters PCP Command syntax CPTX CRIP read_type read_type 0 short 1 long Example 1 CPTX CRIP 1 Causes the test equipment to use long reads during authentication ...

Page 622: ...ch type of device that you will run an HDCP compliance test on This is one of the Product Capabilities Parameters PCP Command syntax CPTX DUTT device device 0 Sink 1 Source 2 not used 3 Repeater A B 4 Repeater 3C Query syntax CPTX DUTT Query response 0 through 4 Example CPTX DUTT 1 Specifies that an HDCP compliance test on a Source will be run ...

Page 623: ...ery syntax CPTX GCTN 1 through 45 for HDMI 1 through 47 for DisplayPort Example CPTX GCTN To list out the compliance tests 1A 01 1 1A 02 2 1A 03 3 1A 04 4 1A 05 5 1A 06 6 1A 07 7 1A 08 8 1A 09 9 1B 01 10 1B 02 11 1B 03 12 1B 04 13 1B 05 14 1B 06 15 2C 01 16 2C 02 17 2C 03 18 2C 04 19 3A 01 20 3A 02 21 3A 03 22 3A 04 23 3A 05 24 3B 01 25 3B 02 26 3B 03 27 3B 04 28 3B 05 29 3C I 01 30 3C II 09 45 ...

Page 624: ...ing the 2C 04 test using the Encryption Status Tester device Command syntax CPTX OESS pulse_position pulse position 1 encryption enable pulse is position at the beginning of the vsync pulse 4 encryption enable pulse is position at the middle of the vsync pulse 5 encryption enable pulse is position at the end of the vsync pulse Example 1 CPTX OESS 1 Causes the test equipment to use long reads durin...

Page 625: ...or an HDCP compliance test This is one of the Product Capabilities Parameters PCP Command syntax CPTX RKSV rksv rksv 1 through 127 Query syntax CPTX RKSV Query response 1 through 127 Example 1 CPTX RKSV 16 Specifies that the repeater supports 16 downstream devices connected Example 2 CPTX RKSV Queries to determine what the RSKV parameter is currently set to 1 Indicates that the repeater only suppo...

Page 626: ...rameters PCP 1 yes 0 no Command syntax CPTX ROOR roor roor 0 No the repeater does not output conent to a repeater that does not have downstream devices connected 1 Yes the repeater does output conent to a repeater that does not have downstream devices connected Query syntax CPTX ROOR Query response 0 or 1 Example 1 CPTX ROOR 0 Specifies that the repeater does not output content to a downstream rep...

Page 627: ...nhanced link verification This is one of the Product Capabilities Parameters PCP Command syntax CPTX RPFT rpft rpft 0 No 1 Yes Query syntax CPTX RPFT Query response 0 or 1 Example 1 CPTX RPFT 0 Specifies that the repeater supports HDMI 1 1 advanced cipher features Example 2 CPTX RPFT Queries to determine what the RPFT parameter is currently set to 1 Indicates that the repeater supports advanced ci...

Page 628: ...DCP compliance This is one of the Product Capabilities Parameters PCP Command syntax CPTX SDCZ device_count device_count 0 no downstream devices 1 uses the valued specified by the SKSV parameter Query syntax CPTX SDCZ Query response 0 or 1 Example 1 CPTX SDCZ 0 Specifies that there are no downstream devices connected for the 1B 01 test and the 3B 01 test Example 2 CPTX SDCZ Queries how to determin...

Page 629: ...testing source HDMI devices when a repeater is connected Command syntax CPTX SOOR devices devices 0 no downstream devices 1 uses the valued specified by the SKSV parameter Query syntax CPTX SOOR Query response 0 or 1 Example 1 CPTX SOOR 0 Specifies that there are no downstream devices connected for the 1B 01 test and the 3B 01 test Example 2 CPTX SOOR Queries how to determine the number of downstr...

Page 630: ...s connected Command syntax CPTX SRAC count count 1 through 126 Query syntax CPTX SRAC Query response 1 through 126 Example 1 CPTX SRAC 2 Specifies that the source device under test will authenticate two times before transitioning to the third phase of authentication Example 2 CPTX SRAC Queries for the number of times that the device under test will authenticate before transitioning to the third ph...

Page 631: ...ontal line is 2 pixels thick if the format has an even number of active lines The primitive uses a single parameter the color of the cross Command syntax CROS color color available colors Other required commands The FMTU command instructs the generator to use the new setting The ALLU command updates hardware to the new setting and redraws the test image Example CROS magenta Draw a large cross in t...

Page 632: ...t setting of CSPG Command syntax CSPG mode mode 0 OFF 1 ON Query syntax CSPG Query response 0 or 1 Other required commands In order to use digital composite sync it must be selected with the SSST command The FMTU command instructs the generator to use the new setting The ALLU command updates hardware to the new setting and redraws the test image Example CSPG 1 Enable dig comp sync in buffer SSST 2...

Page 633: ...1 active high positive going pulse Query syntax CSPP Query response 0 or 1 Other required commands In order to use digital composite sync it must be gated on with the CSPG command and selected with the SSST command The FMTU command instructs the generator to use the new setting The ALLU command updates hardware to the new setting and redraws the test image Example CSPG 1 Enable dig comp sync in bu...

Page 634: ... 1 to 1 37 1 in order to better accommodate the new optical soundtrack that was added a few years earlier This slightly wider shape is the true aspect ratio of classic film The aperture is commonly referred to as Academy and was the shape of the vast majority of U S films produced until the 1950s 4x3 0 825x0 602 SMPTE RP40 35mm C 1 444 I IMAX 13x9 IMAX 1 500 V T 1 Vista Vision 3x2 1152x768 Apple C...

Page 635: ...882 Video Test Instrument User Guide Rev A 35 257 Related commands EXAR SXAR Example CXAR 1 33 Sets 4 3 picture aspect ratio for source content FMTU ...

Page 636: ...n channel 7 as RC7 content Setting DACA will automatically set DAXA and XAUD CA parameters to a corresponding value see table below Note If DACA is set to a value not found in the table above then other parameters will not be automatically set and an error will be generated if the format is loaded while this condition exists mask 0 to 255 based on the value in the table below Notes Setting DACA wi...

Page 637: ...882 Video Test Instrument User Guide Rev A 35 259 Example DACA 3 specifies audio channels 1 and 2 DACG 3 gates audio channels 1 and 2 FMTU Related commands DACG ...

Page 638: ...etting Audio signal Description Specifies which audio channels are gated on Command syntax DACG mask mask 0 to 3 based on the value in the table below Example DACA 3 specifies audio channels 1 and 2 DACG 3 gates audio channels 1 and 2 FMTU Related commands DACA Channel 1 2 Bit 0 1 Value 1 2 ...

Page 639: ...parameter setting Audio signal Description Enables or disables downmixing of an audio signal This sets the DM_I parameter of the Audio InfoFrame as specified in EIA CEA 861 B table 24 Command syntax DADG mode mode 1 enable 0 disable Example DADG 1 FMTU IFGU Related commands XAUD DMI parameter DALS ...

Page 640: ...setting Audio signal Description Sets the level shift value in decibels for downmixing of the audio signal This sets the LSV parameter of the Audio InfoFrame as specified in EIA CEA 861 B table 23 Command syntax DALS x x 0 15 dB Example DALS 5 FMTU IFGU Related commands XAUD LSV parameter DADG ...

Page 641: ...ser Guide Rev A 35 263 DASI Digital Audio Signal Interface Class Format parameter setting Audio signal Description Sets the digital audio signal interface Command syntax DASI interface interface 0 none 1 SPDIF Example DASI 1 IFGU ...

Page 642: ...ing Audio signal Description Sets the digital audio signal type for an audio signal This sets the CT parameter of the Audio InfoFrame as specified in EIA CEA 861 B table 19 Command syntax DAST type type 0 void 1 IEC 60958 3 Consumer LPCM Example DAST 1 IFGU Related commands XAUD CT parameter ...

Page 643: ...35 265 DATE DATE Class System parameter Description Sets the system date in the 882 Command syntax DATE mm dd yyyy mm 01 12 dd 01 31 yyyy 2000 Query syntax DATE mm dd yyyy Example 1 DATE 09 11 2008 Example 2 DATE 01 11 2008 Related commands TIME ...

Page 644: ...t types of content RC5 and RC7 When RL content is not present RC content is output on channel 5 as RC5 content When RL content is present RC content is output on channel 7 as RC7 content Setting DAXA will automatically set DACA and XAUD CA parameters to a corresponding value see table below However this method should not be used to gate channels Instead DAXG should be used after all of the availab...

Page 645: ...r setting Audio signal Description Specifies which speaker locations are gated on Command syntax DAXG mask mask 0 to 3 based on the value in the table below Example DAXA 3 specifies FR and FL as having audio content DAXG 3 gates FR and FL content FMTU Related commands DAXA Content FR FL Bit 1 0 Value 2 1 ...

Page 646: ...urns the current setting of DCBM Command syntax DCBM mask mask 0 0 0 0 0 8 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 9 1 0 0 1 2 0 0 1 0 10 1 0 1 0 3 0 0 1 1 11 1 0 1 1 4 0 1 0 0 12 1 1 0 0 5 0 1 0 1 13 1 1 0 1 6 0 1 1 0 14 1 1 1 0 7 0 1 1 1 15 1 1 1 1 Query syntax DCBM Query response mask Other required commands The FMTU command instructs the generator to use the new setting The ALLU command updates hardware to the new ...

Page 647: ...on with the display code bit mask and the actual display code that s sensed The decimal equivalent of the result then is returned The mask is set with the DCEX command The expected setting and the actual result are both shown in the Format test image They have no effect how a given format generates a set of test signals Command syntax DCEX code code 0 0 0 0 0 8 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 9 1 0 0 1 2 0 0 1 ...

Page 648: ... power 1 enable 5V power connector OUT1 OUT2 HDMI OUT 1 or HDMI OUT 2 connector AV SPDIF AV connector VGA VGA connector Query syntax DCPG connector DCPG connector OUT1 OUT2 HDMI OUT 1 or HDMI OUT 2 connector AV SPDIF AV connector VGA VGA connector Example 1 OUT1 DCPG 0 disables 5V power on the HDMI output 1 DCPU initiates the command Example 2 VGA DCPG 1 enables 5V power on the VGA output Example ...

Page 649: ...882 Video Test Instrument User Guide Rev A 35 271 Related commands DCPX OUT1 DCPX OUT2 DCPX AV DCPX VGA DCPX ...

Page 650: ...ctor Query syntax DCPX connector OUT1 OUT2 HDMI OUT 1 or HDMI OUT 2 ports AV SPDIF AV connector VGA VGA connector Returns 0 or 1 0 OK 1 overcurrent for example shorted Example 1 OUT1 DCPX queries the DDC power level of HDMI output connector 1 0 Example 2 OUT2 DCPX queries the DDC power level of HDMI output connector 2 1 Example 3 DCPX reads back the logical AND of all connectors 0 Related commands...

Page 651: ...pported Class EDID and DDC control Description The DDCV query returns a status flag indicating if the generator hardware supports VESA DDC communications Query syntax DDCV Query response 0 or 1 0 no DDC support 1 DDC supported Example DDCV Return DDC support information ...

Page 652: ...sed to set the horizontal size of the white patch used in the Regulate image The DELX Query returns the current DELX setting Command syntax DELX delta_x delta_x horizontal distance in pixels Query syntax DELX Query response delta_x Example DELX 8 Set H shift to 8 pixels per step DELY 3 Set V shift to 3 pixels per step DWEL 2 Display each step for 2 frames IMGL SlideG Select Image that uses DELX an...

Page 653: ...EViceS Class Tools Description Lists all devices Query syntax DEVS Query response List of devices Related commands None Example DEVS drv name 0 null 1 tyCo 0 3 card0 5 QDEW023 6 vio 7 tgtsvr 3 ram20K 3 ramNV 3 tffs0 2 pipe cli 8 pty remote0 S 9 pty remote0 M ...

Page 654: ...used to set the vertical size of the white patch used in the Regulate image The DELY Query returns the current DELY setting Command syntax DELY delta_y delta_y vertical distance in pixels Query syntax DELY Query response delta_y Example DELX 8 Set H shift to 8 pixels per step DELY 3 Set V shift to 3 pixels per step DWEL 2 Display each step for 2 frames IMGL SlideG Select Image that uses DELX and D...

Page 655: ...any extension Example This example loads an EDID file edits it and saves the changes under a new filename myedid8 DIDL myedid7 loads the EDID file named myedid7 DIDB begins an edid editing session XDID 19 A E88A82A0564796240F48 edits EDID at 19 for 10 0x0A bytes DIDE ends an edid editing session DIDA myedid8 saves the changes to the filename myedid8 Related commands DIDB DIDE DIDK DIDL TASK DIDP D...

Page 656: ...syntax DIDB Example DIDL myedid7 loads the EDID file named myedid7 DIDB begins an edid editing session XDID 19 A E88A82A0564796240F48 edits EDID at 19 for 10 0x0A bytes DIDE ends an edid editing session DIDA myedid8 saves the changes to the filename myedid8 Related commands DIDA DIDE DIDK DIDL TASK DIDP DIDQ DIDS DIDU EDA port GDID EDA port PDID XDID ...

Page 657: ...mand syntax DIDE Example DIDL myedid7 loads the EDID file named myedid7 DIDB begins an edid editing session XDID 19 A E88A82A0564796240F48 edits EDID at 19 for 10 0x0A bytes DIDE ends an edid editing session DIDA myedid8 saves the changes to the filename myedid8 Related commands DIDA DIDB DIDK DIDL TASK DIDP DIDQ DIDS DIDU EDA port GDID EDA port PDID XDID ...

Page 658: ...rectory path and valid MS DOS filename 8 characters minus any extension of the file to be deleted If the file to be deleted is in the default path then path may be omitted Example This example deletes the file myedid1 in the userdata directory on the generator DIDK tffs0 library userdata myedid1 Related commands DIDA DIDB DIDE DIDL TASK DIDP DIDQ DIDS DIDU EDA port GDID EDA port PDID XDID ...

Page 659: ... DOS filename 8 characters minus any extension of the file to be loaded If the file to be loaded is in the default path then path may be omitted Query syntax DIDL Query response The name of the file currently in the buffer Example This example loads the EDID from the file myedid1 in the userdata directory DIDL tffs0 library userdata myedid1 Related commands DIDA DIDB DIDE DIDK TASK DIDP DIDQ DIDS ...

Page 660: ...e The directory path and valid MS DOS filename 8 characters minus any extension of the file to be created If the file is to be created in the default path then path may be omitted Example This example creates the file myedid1 in the userdata directory on the generator DIDN tffs0 library userdata myedid1 Related commands DIDA DIDB DIDE DIDK DIDL DIDP DIDQ DIDS DIDU EDA port GDID EDA port PDID XDID ...

Page 661: ...cription Sets the default EDID path Command syntax DIDP path path path to directory containing EDID files Example This example sets the default path to the userdata directory DIDP tffs0 library userdata Related commands DIDA DIDB DIDE DIDK DIDL TASK DIDQ DIDS DIDU EDA port GDID EDA port PDID XDID ...

Page 662: ...Index and ending at endIndex The filenames are kept in alphanumeric order Query syntax DIDQ startIndex endIndex startIndex positive integer number endIndex positive integer number Query response List of filenames Example This example returns the first 10 EDID filenames in the default directory DIDQ 1 10 Related commands DIDA DIDB DIDE DIDK DIDL TASK DIDP DIDS DIDU EDA port GDID EDA port PDID XDID ...

Page 663: ...example loads an EDID file edits it and saves the changes to the same filename DIDL myedid7 loads the EDID file named myedid7 DIDB begins an edid editing session XDID 19 A E88A82A0564796240F48 edits EDID at 19 for 10 0x0A bytes DIDE ends an edid editing session DIDS saves the changes to myedid7 Related commands DIDA DIDB DIDE DIDK DIDL TASK DIDP DIDQ DIDU EDA port GDID EDA port PDID XDID ...

Page 664: ...causes a hot plug pulse on the hot plug detect lead Command syntax DIDU Query syntax DIDU Query response The current EDID file in use Example This example edits part of an EDID and updates the hardware with the current buffer contents XDID 8 3 DE33FF DIDU Related commands DIDA DIDB DIDE DIDK DIDL TASK DIDP DIDQ DIDS EDA port GDID EDA port PDID XDID ...

Page 665: ...ame name a valid MS DOS filename 8 characters minus any extension Example DIRN Vesa1 creates a catalog named Vesa1 DIRT Source identifies new catalog as a source catalog DIRB begins a directory editing session NAMI 1 tffs0 Library Formats DMT0660 adds DMT0660 to catalog add other formats NAMI 6 tffs0 Library Formats DMT0860 adds DMT0860 to catalog DIRE ends the directory editing session DIRA Vesa1...

Page 666: ...ersion but is used for compatibility with future versions of firmware Command syntax DIRB Other required commands Use either a DIRL command to load an existing directory or a DIRN command to create a new directory Use DIRE when ending the editing session Example DIRN Initialize directory edit buffer DIRB Start directory editing session One or more directory editing commands DIRE End directory edit...

Page 667: ...es nothing in the current firmware version but is used for compatibility with future versions of firmware Command syntax DIRE Other required commands Use DIRB when starting the editing session Use DIRS to save changes Example DIRB Start directory editing session One or more directory editing commands DIRA MYDIR_02 Save edited directory as MYDIR_02 DIRE End directory editing session ...

Page 668: ...e if the named directory can be deleted If directory is read only or nonexistent the query returns a zero Command syntax DIRK name name a valid MS DOS filename 8 characters minus any extension Query syntax DIRK name name a valid MS DOS filename 8 characters minus any extension Query response 0 or 1 Example DIRK MY_DIR Delete directory called MY_DIR ...

Page 669: ... if the named directory can be loaded otherwise a zero is returned Note Use the FMTP IMGP and SEQP commands to select which directory is used for the format image and sequence selection lists Command syntax DIRL name name a valid MS DOS filename 8 characters minus any extension Query syntax DIRL name name a valid MS DOS filename 8 characters minus any extension Query response 0 or 1 Example DIRL M...

Page 670: ...me name is assigned as the directory s name The query will return the name that has been assigned as the directory s name Command syntax DIRN name name optional valid MS DOS filename 8 characters minus any extension Query syntax DIRN Example DIRN Init edit buffer without assigning a new name or DIRN MY_DIR Init edit buffer with name of MY_DIR ...

Page 671: ...y management Description Sets the current directory path name The query will return the current directory path name Command syntax DIRP name name a valid MS DOS filename 8 characters minus any extension Query syntax DIRP Query response name Example DIRP DIRPTH01 Set directory path to DIRPTH01 ...

Page 672: ...all the directory names stored in directory memory beginning at index The directories are kept in alphanumeric order Query syntax DIRQ index number index positive integer number number positive integer number Query response List of specified directory names Example DIRQ 1 5 List the first five directories in memory or DIRQ 1 9999 List all directories in memory ...

Page 673: ... contents into directory memory using the current name of the directory in the edit buffer Example DIRN NTSCFMT creates a catalog named NTSCFMT DIRT Source identifies new catalog as a source catalog DIRB begins a directory editing session NAMI 1 tffs0 Library Formats NTSC adds NTSC to catalog DIRE ends the directory editing session DIRS saves the catalog ...

Page 674: ...b Query syntax DIRT Query response type The current directory type defined such as Source SourceLib Content ContentLib Example DIRN NTSCFMT creates a catalog named NTSCFMT DIRT Source identifies new catalog as a source catalog DIRB begins a directory editing session NAMI 1 tffs0 Library Formats NTSC adds NTSC to catalog add other formats NAMI 6 tffs0 Library Formats NTSC J adds NTSC J to catalog D...

Page 675: ... Not applicable Related commands DIRL Example DIRN NTSCFMT creates a catalog named NTSCFMT DIRT Source identifies new catalog as a source catalog DIRB begins a directory editing session NAMI 1 tffs0 Library Formats NTSC adds NTSC to catalog DIRE ends the directory editing session DIRS tffs0 Library FormatLib NTSCFMT saves the catalog DIRL tffs0 Library FormatLib NTSCFMT loads the catalog DIRU inst...

Page 676: ...nce editor commands Description Enables and disables the addition of the sequence step number to the displayed test image when running a sequence Command syntax DNUM mode mode 0 1 or 2 Query syntax DNUM Query response mode Example DNUM 1 Enable the displaying of the sequence step ...

Page 677: ...n XGCP 1 0 DPTG 7 DPTR 1 DPGU Example 2 Read mute status R MUTE R 1 Example 3 Turn mute off XGCP 0 1 DPTG 7 DPTR 1 DPGU Example 4 Read mute status R MUTE R 0 Example 5 Change the N value to 6000 and let hardware determine CTS value XACR 6000 DTPG 7 DPGU You can read N and CTS value at the reciever for verification Example 6 Change the N value to 6000 and CTS to 8000 XACR 6000 8000 DTPG 7 DPGU You ...

Page 678: ...300 Appendix A Command Reference Example 7 Turn audio off DPTG 3 DPGU Example 8 Turn audio on DPTG 7 DPGU ...

Page 679: ...dware and sent to the receiver Gating Audio Sample packets on and off also enables and disables the audio output from the transmitter The mask value is a value ORed with the current setting Command syntax DPTG mask mask 1 General Control Packet GCP 2 Audio Clock Regeneration ACR 4 Audio Sample 8 Generic Data Packet GDP Related commands DPGU DPTR Example This example gates off the audio the current...

Page 680: ...d Packetr Description Specifies if a General Control packet is sent with every frame or sent once Note Audio Sample and ACR packets are always enabled and thus cannot be changed Command syntax DPTR mask mask 1 General Control Packet GCP 8 Generic Data Packet GDP Example See DPGU for examples ...

Page 681: ...ot be activated by the operator Command syntax DSCT type type 0 none 2 American HDTV w serrations equalization 3 American HDTV w serrations 4 American HDTV w double serrations 5 Austrailian AS 493 1 200X CS serrations 6 European HDTV ORed 7 European HDTV w single serrations 8 European HDTV w double serrations Query syntax DSCT Query response type Other required commands The FMTU command instructs ...

Page 682: ...n the case of CCIR the width of the vertical sync pulse is 0 5 line shorter than the width specified via the VSPW command In the EIA case the width of the vertical sync pulse is as programmed After sending the DSST command send the FMTU or ALLU command Command syntax DSST type type 0 none 1 American separate 2 American HDTV separate 3 European HDTV separate 4 Japanese HDTV separate 5 European sepa...

Page 683: ...e CEA 861 C specification DVIC Format Name NCPP1 HRES2 VTOT3 1 DMT0659 1 640 525 1 DMT0660 1 640 525 2 480p59 1 720 525 2 480p60 1 720 525 2 480p59LH 1 720 525 2 480p60LH 1 720 525 3 480p59SH 1 720 525 3 480p60SH 1 720 525 4 720p59 1 1280 750 4 720p60 1 1280 750 5 1080i29 1 1920 1125 5 1080i30 1 1920 1125 6 480i2x29 2 720 525 6 480i2x30 2 720 525 6 480i2xL1 2 720 525 6 480i2xL2 2 720 525 7 480i2xS...

Page 684: ...p4xS1 1 2880 262 13 240p4xS2 1 2880 262 13 240p4xS3 1 2880 263 13 240p4xS4 1 2880 263 14 480p2x59 2 720 525 14 480p2x60 2 720 525 14 480p2xL1 2 720 525 14 480p2xL2 2 720 525 15 480p2xS1 2 720 525 15 480p2xS2 2 720 525 16 1080p59 1 1920 1125 16 1080p60 1 1920 1125 17 576p50 1 720 625 17 576p50LH 1 720 625 18 576p50SH 1 720 625 19 720p50 1 720 750 20 1080i25 1 1920 1125 21 576i2x25 2 720 625 21 576i...

Page 685: ...80p50 1 1920 1125 32 1080p23 1 1920 1125 32 1080p24 1 1920 1125 33 1080p25 1 1920 1125 34 1080p29 1 1920 1125 34 1080p30 1 1920 1125 35 480p4x59 1 2880 525 35 480p4xL1 1 2880 525 35 480p4x60 1 2880 525 35 480p4xL2 1 2880 525 36 480p4xL2 1 2880 525 36 480p4xS2 1 2880 525 37 576p4x50 1 2880 625 37 576p4xLH 1 2880 625 38 576p4xSH 1 2880 625 39 108Oi25_ 1 1920 1250 40 1080i50 1 1920 1125 41 720p100 1 ...

Page 686: ...controls pixel repetition factor All library formats set pixel repetition factor NPPP to zero i e OFF by default Dou ble clocking and pixel repetition cannot be applied simultaneously due to AVI RP field constraints Therefore double clocked formats do not support pixel repetition Pixel rep etition is only applicable to the 4x formats where HRES remains at 2880 pixels as the pixel repetition factor...

Page 687: ...882 Video Test Instrument User Guide Rev A 35 309 Example DVIC 23 FMTU ...

Page 688: ...command causes the output signal protocol to switch to HDMI while setting DVPT to 1 causes a DVI compatible protocol to be output All of the formats in the format library set DVPT to 0 This is a default setting which lets the output protocol be determined on a global basis by the type of hardware that is present Command syntax DVPT type type 0 default based on hardware present 1 DVI 1 0 2 HDMI 1 0...

Page 689: ...DVQM can be set to 1 to test the undershoot overshoot signal code margins for example see SMPTE 296M section 7 12 Television formats for example 1080i29 set DVQM 2 for reduced range required by various television standards for example EIA CEA 861 C Query syntax DVQM Example DVQM 1 Sets the quantizing mode to 1 FMTU Applies the format change Related commands LMIN LMAX NBPC DVQ Mode Components NBPC ...

Page 690: ...iption Sets the TMDS differential swing calibration factor for the digital video signal HDMI and DVI The DVSC query returns the current value Command syntax DVSC factor factor 0 0 to 1 1 Query syntax DVSC Related commands DVSS OUT1 DVSS OUT2 DVSS Examples DVSC 0 9 sets the digital video swing calibration to 0 9 ALLU ...

Page 691: ...fied by DVSM Command syntax DVSM mode mode 0 RGB 4 4 4 default 2 4 2 2 color difference components are sampled at half the pixel rate luminance is sampled at full pixel rate 4 4 4 4 both luminance and color difference components are sampled at the pixel rate Related commands NBPC DVST Examples DVST 10 Selects RGB digital video type DVSM 0 Specifies default condition FMTU Applies the format change ...

Page 692: ...video Query syntax DVSP Query response polarity Other required commands To use the digital video outputs digital video must be enabled with the DVST command The FMTU command instructs the generator to use the new setting The ALLU command updates hardware to the new setting and redraws the test image Example AVST 0 Deselect analog video in buffer DVST 5 Select 3 bit color in buffer DVSP 1 Select ac...

Page 693: ...igital swing Command syntax connector DVSS voltage connector OUT1 OUT2 HDMI OUT 1 or HDMI OUT 2 connector voltage 0 0 to 2 0 volts differential peak to peak nominally 1 000 0 150 to 1 560 range guaranteed Query syntax OUT1 DVSS or DVSS Related commands DVST DVSC Example 1 DVSS 1 25 sets the digital video signal swing voltage to 1 25 volts on HDMI output 1 ALLU Example 2 OUT1 DVSS 1 00 sets the dig...

Page 694: ...he sRGB per ITU R BT 709 10 RGB 13 YCbCr per SMPTE 260M 1999 Table 1 14 YCbCr per ITU R BT 601 5 Table 3 Item 7 15 YCbCr per ITU R BT 709 5 Part 1 Section 6 10 16 Reserved 17 xvYCC ITU R BT 601 HDTV 18 xvYCC ITU R BT 709 HDTV Query syntax DVST Related commands AVST must be set to zero when digital video is used Use the ALLU or FMTU command after the DVST command to update the hardware with the new...

Page 695: ...that must occur for the currently loaded video format The command is also used to set how long each step of the Regulate image is displayed The DWEL query returns the current DWELL setting Command syntax DWEL delay delay integer representing number of video frames Query syntax DWEL Query response delay Example DELX 8 Set H shift to 8 pixels per step DELY 3 Set V shift to 3 pixels per step DWEL 2 D...

Page 696: ...vice connected to the specified HDMI out port Requires firmware release 2 3 0 or higher Command syntax EDAport GDID port 1 HDMI out port 1 2 HDMI out port 2 Example This example reads an EDID from the device connected to HDMI out port 1 EDA1 GDID Related commands DIDA DIDB DIDE DIDK DIDL TASK DIDP DIDQ DIDS DIDU EDA port PDID XDID ...

Page 697: ...ID to a device connected to the specified HDMI out port Requires firmware release 2 3 0 or higher Command syntax EDAport PDID port 1 HDMI out port 1 2 HDMI out port 2 Example This example writes an EDID to the device connected to HDMI out port 1 EDA1 PDID Related commands DIDA DIDB DIDE DIDK DIDL TASK DIDP DIDQ DIDS DIDU EDA port PDID XDID ...

Page 698: ...d syntax EDEport DIDU port the HDMI IN port 1 or 2 to be configured with the contents of the EDID buffer Query syntax EDEport DIDU port the HDMI IN port 1 or 2 to be read Example This example edits part of an EDID and updates the HDMI IN port 1 with the current buffer contents XDID 8 3 DE33FF EDE1 DIDU Related commands DIDA DIDB DIDE DIDK DIDL TASK DIDP DIDQ DIDS DIDU EDA port GDID XDID ...

Page 699: ...4D492054560A2020202020000 000FD003B3D0F2E08000A2020202020200306F00202000000000000000000000000000000 0000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000 0000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000 0000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000 C02031CF149850408020106141216230907078301000065030C001000011D007251D01E20 6E28...

Page 700: ...d Reference ENET Reads EtherNET address Class Tools Description Retrieves the Ethernet MAC address of the generator Query syntax ENET Query response ASCII hex test string Related commands None Example ENET 00 07 AA 00 20 00 ...

Page 701: ...therNET port Class Tools Description Sets the IP address of the Ethernet port of the generator Command syntax ENET IP IP IP in the format www xxx yyy zzz Query syntax ENET IP Query response IP address in format www xxx yyy zzz Related commands None Example ENET IP 192 168 254 222 ...

Page 702: ... port Class Tools Description Sets the IP address of the Ethernet port of the generator Command syntax ENET MASK mask mask in the format www xxx yyy zzz Query syntax ENET MASK Query response subnet mask in format www xxx yyy zzz Related commands None Example ENET MASK 255 255 255 000 ...

Page 703: ...cted sync signal is one of the CCIR types then the actual equalization interval output by the generator will be 0 5 lines shorter than the whole number specified The EQUA query returns the current setting of EQUA Command syntax EQUA lines lines min 0 max number of lines after vertical sync before video Query syntax EQUA Query response lines Other required commands The FMTU command instructs the ge...

Page 704: ... signal is one of the CCIR types then the actual equalization interval output by the generator will be 0 5 lines shorter than the whole number specified The EQUB query returns the current setting of EQUB Command syntax EQUB lines lines min 0 max number of lines after video and before vertical sync Query syntax EQUB Query response lines Other required commands The FMTU command instructs the generat...

Page 705: ...c front porch delay period as required by certain military HOBO and Maverik video formats The EQUF query returns the current setting of EQUF Command syntax EQUF mode mode 0 OFF 1 ON Query syntax EQUF Query response mode Other required commands The FMTU command instructs the generator to use the new setting The ALLU command updates hardware to the new setting and redraws the test image Example EQUF...

Page 706: ...328 Appendix A Command Reference ERRC ERRor queue Clear Class System error control Description Clears all errors waiting to be reported in the error queue Command syntax ERRC ...

Page 707: ...in the error queue beginning at index The ERRQ query does not remove the errors from the queue Command syntax ERRQ index number index Positive integer number number Positive integer number Query response List of specified range of errors in the error queue Examples ERRQ 1 5 List the first five errors in the queue or ERRQ 1 9999 List all errors in the queue ...

Page 708: ...nd Reference ERRY Yank ERRor from queue Class Format parameter setting synchronization Description Returns the most recent error added to the error queue and removes it from the queue Query syntax ERRY Query response Error ...

Page 709: ...will be the same as the CXAR parameter Alternatively if the source image content was shot for two different shaped screens using a shoot and protect technique then this parameter will be different than the CXAR parameter Command syntax EXAR aspect_ratio aspect_ratio 0 75 to 2 39 Note For a listing of established aspect ratios see the table on page 256 CXAR command Related commands CXAR SXAR Exampl...

Page 710: ...de is made up of three binary field codes as follows Bits 0 2 are the Squeeze Stretch S field code Bits 3 9 are the Letterbox Pillar L field code Bits 10 16 are the Safe Area K field code To determine the proper mapping code follow these steps 1 Using the table below determine the proper S field code for bits 0 2 Squeeze Stretch Method S Field Code Symbol Undo Non Linear Squeeze Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 ...

Page 711: ... at bottom 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 Ltbb Top shrink w single gray bar at bottom 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 Ltgb Top shrink w white bar at bot tom 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 Ltwb Keep Safe Area Mode K Field Code Symbol Undo Bars BarContents Source Save Area Bit 16 Bit 15 Bit 14 Bit 13 Bit 12 Bit 11 Bit 10 None w safe area markers 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Shrink coded frame to action area with opaque black bar surround 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 Kabb Shrink c...

Page 712: ...es without bars 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 Ktspt Coded frame has shot protected title area with action and title graticules without bars 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 Ktspb Coded frame has shot protected custom area with out graticules or border 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 Kcsp Coded frame has shot protected custom area with action graticules without border 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 Kcspa Coded frame has shot protected custom area with title graticule...

Page 713: ...mal Code Symbol Natural aspect ratio 00000000000000000 0 N0 00000000000010000 16 N1 00000000000100000 32 N2 Squeeze anamorphise 00000000000000001 1 S Centered protected shrink with shot surround 00000000000001000 8 Lcsp Centered shrink with black bars top and bottom 00000000100001000 264 Lcbb Top shrink with single black bar at bottom 00000000100011000 280 Ltbb Shrink coded frame to title area w o...

Page 714: ...me filename Any file in a generator library directory Command syntax file server FILE LOAD server_name filename server_name Valid hostname no forward slash before name and colon after name filename Any file in a file server library directory Related commands None Example FILE LOAD barsmpte o Loads file from generator FILE LOAD Host1 barsmpte o Loads file from file server Host1 ...

Page 715: ...ev A 35 337 FILE SCREENCAP FILE SCREENCAP Class Tools Description Captures an image currently rendered on the display to a bit map Command syntax FILE SCREEN filename bmp filename bmp Related commands None Example FILE SCREENCAP diamond bmp ...

Page 716: ...As Class Format memory management Description Saves the current contents of the format edit buffer using the given name Command syntax FMTA name name a valid MS DOS filename 8 characters minus any extension Example FMTA MY_FMT Save with the name MY_FMT ...

Page 717: ...rmat editing session Command syntax FMTB Other required commands Use either an FMTL command to load an existing image or an FMTN command to create a new format Use FMTE when ending the editing session Example FMTN Initialize format edit buffer FMTB Start format editing session One or more format editing commands FMTE End format editing session ...

Page 718: ...e end of a format editing session Command syntax FMTE Other required commands Use FMTB when starting the editing session Use FMTA or FMTS to save changes Example FMTB Start format editing session One or more format editing commands FMTA My_fmt1 Save edited format as My_fmt1 FMTE End format editing session ...

Page 719: ...rrors If no errors are found FMTG returns zero Otherwise if one or more errors exist the number of the first error encountered is returned To test formats residing in format memory use the FMTT query Query syntax FMTG Query response Returns 0 if no errors are found otherwise returns the number of the first error encountered Example FMTG Return format error status ...

Page 720: ...to see if the named format can be erased The RAM location number is returned if it can be erased Otherwise a zero is returned Command syntax FMTK name name a valid MS DOS filename 8 characters minus any extension Query syntax FMTK name name valid MS DOS filename 8 characters minus any extension Query response 0 or location Example FMTK my_fmt1 Erase format called my_fmt1 ...

Page 721: ...d The FMTL query returns the location location in which a format having a name equal to name is found If multiple formats exist having name name then the lowest numbered location containing a format with a matching name name is returned The format memory RAM is always searched first If a format with name name cannot be found anywhere in the format memory then the industry standard formats located ...

Page 722: ...state The command does not create a usable format The FMTN query returns the current name of the format in the buffer Command syntax FMTN name name a valid MS DOS filename 8 characters minus any extension Query syntax FMTN ASBG 0 GAMA 2 2 ASCT 1 GAMC 0 ASGG 1 HRAT 0 ASSG 0 1 0 HRES 0 ASSS 0 286 HSIZ 280 AVPG 0 HSPD 0 AVPS 0 0 HSPG 1 AVSB 0 0 HSPP 0 AVSS 0 714 HSPW 0 AVST 0 HTOT 0 XVSG 1 1 1 SCAN 1...

Page 723: ...882 Video Test Instrument User Guide Rev A 35 345 Query response name Example FMTN Initialize format buffer or FMTN Narf Initialize format buffer and name the format Narf ...

Page 724: ... by number after the query is executed Sending the query with just an index parameter returns the same number of names as the last time starting at the given index Sending the query with no parameters returns the next set of names Query syntax FMTQ index number index positive integer number number positive integer number Query response List of specified format names Example FMTQ 1 9999 List all fo...

Page 725: ... into format memory using the current name of the format in the edit buffer Command syntax FMTS Example FMTL DMT0660 Loads a format for editing FMTB Begins and editing session HRES 654 Sets the horizontal resolution to 654 pixels other format parameters HTOT 720 Sets the horizontal total to 720 pixels FMTE Ends the format editing session FMTS Saves format ...

Page 726: ... old image The FMTU query returns either a format memory location location or zero If the signal format currently being output by the signal generating hardware matches that originally loaded using the FMTL command from a format memory location then the matching format memory location location is returned Otherwise if the format contents have been used to update the signal generating hardware sinc...

Page 727: ...s format storage memory starting at first and ending at last The cleared locations are then tagged as being empty If no last parameter is given only the first location is cleared The FMTZ query is used to determine if a location contains a format or is empty Command syntax FMTZ first last Query syntax FMTZ location ...

Page 728: ... Text is on a black rectangular background with a single pixel border FORM uses three 3 parameters The first is the color of the text and border The next two are the X and Y coordinates for the top left corner of the block of text Command syntax FORM color x y color available colors x positive integer number y positive integer number Other required commands The FMTU command instructs the generator...

Page 729: ...uide Rev A 35 351 FRAT Frame RATe Query Class Format parameter setting Video resolution Description Returns the current frame vertical rate setting Query syntax FRAT Query response frame rate Example FRAT 25 0000 Related commands TMAU ...

Page 730: ...gle parameter The color selection for one or more primitives in a custom image must be set to foreground in order to see the affect of this command on a custom image The setting is not global and is not saved The FRGB query returns the current red green and blue settings of FRGB Command syntax FRGB red_level green_level blue_level or FRGB common_gray_level level min 0 full off max 255 full on Exam...

Page 731: ... 0 lines max VTOT SCAN line Query syntax FSPD Query response delay Other required commands To get a pulse frame sync must first be enabled with the FSPG command The FMTU command instructs the generator to use the new settings The ALLU command updates the hardware to the new settings and redraws the test image Example FSPG 1 Enable Frame Sync FSPP 1 Set for positive going pulse FSPW 20 Make the pul...

Page 732: ...put The FSPG query returns the current FSPG mode Command syntax FSPG mode mode 0 OFF 1 ON Query syntax FSPG Query response 0 or 1 Other required commands The FMTU command instructs the generator to use the new settings The ALLU command updates the hardware to the new settings and redraws the test image Example FSPG 1 Enable Frame Sync FMTU Update hardware to new settings ...

Page 733: ...ent polarity of FSPP Command syntax FSPP polarity polarity 0 active low negative going pulse 1 active high positive going pulse Query syntax FSPP Query response 0 or 1 Other required commands To get a pulse frame sync must first be enabled with the FSPG command The FMTU command instructs the generator to use the new settings The ALLU command updates the hardware to the new settings and redraws the...

Page 734: ...els min 1 max HTOT 1 Query syntax FSPW Query response pixels Other required commands The FMTU command instructs the generator to use the new settings The ALLU command updates the hardware to the new settings and redraws the test image Example FSPG 1 Enable Frame Sync FSPP 1 Set for positive going pulse FSPW 20 Make the pulse 20 pixels wide FSPG 300 Pulse to occur 300 lines after the last line of a...

Page 735: ...accepted max 10 0 floating point accepted For HDMI video signals GAMA is always 2 222 Query syntax GAMA Query response factor Other required commands Gamma correction must be enabled with the GAMC command in order to use the gamma correction factor The FMTU command instructs the generator to use the new setting The ALLU command updates hardware to the new setting and redraws the test image Example...

Page 736: ...plied Command syntax GAMC mode mode 0 disable don t correct 1 enable correct Query syntax GAMC Query response 0 or 1 Other required commands The value used for gamma correction is set with the GAMA command The FMTU command instructs the generator to use the new setting The ALLU command updates hardware to the new setting and redraws the test image Example GAMC 1 Enable gamma correction in buffer G...

Page 737: ... Reads the number of errors in the red green and blue components along with the total number of bad pixels Query syntax GCET Query response R G B and bad pixels Example PNAU Pseudo random noise generated CR Stop pseudo random noise GCET 0 21 0 21 Returns 21 Green pixel errors and a total of 21 bad pixels Related commands PNAU ...

Page 738: ...t the first error encountered during the signal analyzer test Query syntax GFED Query response expected value followed by the errant value in hex Example PNAU Pseudo random noise generated CR Stop pseudo random noise GFED Returns expected 40018C and errant FFFFFF value of first errored pixel 40018C FFFFFF Related commands PNAU ...

Page 739: ...udo noise measurement has finished execution that is completed the PNAU command Query syntax GNPT Query response zero 0 or positive number for the number of pixels tested in billions 1 indicates an error No Signal Detected or TMDS failure Example PNAU Pseudo random noise generated CR Carriage return stops pseudo random noise GNPT Returns number of pixels in billion 4 255 Related commands PNAU ...

Page 740: ...etup is not correct Example PDAX FRMS 100 sets the number of frames to analyze in the pixel data analysis test to 100 PDAX MXER 1000 sets the maximum number of errors to record in pixel data analysis test to 1000 PDAX RPTG 1 enables the generation of reports for the ppixel data analysis test PDAX REFG 0 enables auto reference capturing for the pixel data analysis test PDAX CAPF captures a frame of...

Page 741: ... pseudo noise measurement has finished execution that is completed the PNAU command Query syntax GPER Query response zero 0 or positive number representing errors per billion pixels 1 indicates an error No Signal Detected or TMDS failure Example PNAU Pseudo random noise generated CR Carriage return tops pseudo random noise GPER Returns pixel error rate 0 88 Related commands PNAU ...

Page 742: ...ialized with an INIT command or 3 the unit is re initialized because the power up self test found corrupted data in battery backed system memory In cases 2 and 3 the GPIB address will revert to the address set on the GPIB address switches if the unit has them The address reverts to 15 if the unit does not have GPIB address switches The GPIB query returns the current GPIB address of the unit Comman...

Page 743: ...he first and last lines in each direction not to be at the very edges of video Command syntax GRID color horizontal_boxes vertical_boxes color available colors horizontal_boxes number of horizontal boxes half of number of pixels vertical_boxes number of vertical boxes half of number of lines Other required commands The FMTU command instructs the generator to use the new settings The ALLU command u...

Page 744: ...he lines and the third is the thickness of the space between the lines Command syntax GRIH color line_width space_width color available colors line_width number of pixels in line space_width number of pixels in space Other required commands The FMTU command instructs the generator to use the new settings The ALLU command updates the hardware to the new settings and redraws the test image Example G...

Page 745: ...he lines the second is the thickness of the lines and the third is the thickness of the space between the lines Command syntax GRIV color line_width space_width color available colors line_width number of pixels in line space_width number of pixels in space Other required commands The FMTU command instructs the generator to use the new settings The ALLU command updates the hardware to the new sett...

Page 746: ... Description Toggles the green video signal gate Command syntax GRNG mode mode 0 disable 1 enable Query syntax GRNG Query response 0 or 1 Other required commands ALLU to invoke the command Related commands BLUG REDG Example GRNG 0 ALLU disable green video component ...

Page 747: ...d of the crosshatch All lines in a given direction are spaced equally Any remaining pixels are distributed as equally as possible around the perimeter of the grid This may cause the first and last lines in each direction not to be at the very edges of video In turn this may cause any half boxes to be slightly larger Command syntax HATI color horizontal_boxes vertical_boxes color available colors h...

Page 748: ...ing pixels are added to the boxes along the horizontal and vertical centers of the image Command syntax HATO color horizontal_boxes vertical_boxes color available colors horizontal_boxes number of horizontal boxes half of number of pixels vertical_boxes number of vertical boxes half of number of lines Other required commands The FMTU command instructs the generator to use the new settings The ALLU...

Page 749: ...enables Hot Plug assert on the 882 HDMI IN ports Command syntax HPDG assert disable 0 enable 1 Query syntax HPDG Query response assert Related commands There are no other related commands Example HPDG 0 disables hot plug on the 882EA HDMI In ports HPDG 1 enables hot plug on the 882EA HDMI In ports ...

Page 750: ... plug pulse Command syntax HPPW value value milliseconds in the range of 100 to 4000 Query syntax HPPW Query response value Other required commands There are no other commands required Related commands There are no other related commands Example HPPW 175 sets the hot plug assertion pulse width to 175ms HPPW queries the current value for the hot plug pulse assertion ...

Page 751: ...ing Command syntax HRAT frequency frequency typical min 1000 Hz floating point accepted typical max 130000 Hz floating point accepted Query syntax HRAT Query response frequency in Hz floating point returned Other required commands The FMTU command instructs the generator to use the new settings The ALLU command updates the hardware to the new settings and redraws the test image Example HRAT 32768 ...

Page 752: ...he HRES query returns the current setting of HRES Command syntax HRES pixels pixels min 16 max depends on VRES and model of generator Query syntax HRES Query response pixels Other required commands The ALLU command updates hardware to the new setting and redraws the test image Example HRES 480 Set 480 active pixels line in buffer ALLU Configure hardware and redraw image ...

Page 753: ...setting after entering HSIZ will convert the size to match the new unit of measure Command syntax HSIZ physical_size physical_size positive value floating point accepted Query syntax HSIZ Query response Returns physical size floating point returned Other required commands The units of measure must be properly set by USIZ before entering HSIZ The ALLU command updates hardware to the new setting and...

Page 754: ... pulse The HSPD query returns the current setting of HSPD Command syntax HSPD pixels pixels min 1 max HTOT HRES HSPW Query syntax HSPD Query response pixels Other required commands The FMTU command instructs the generator to use the new settings The ALLU command updates the hardware to the new settings and redraws the test image Example HSPD 16 Set 16 pixel pulse delay in buffer FMTU Update hardwa...

Page 755: ...mmand syntax HSPG mode mode 0 OFF 1 ON Query syntax HSPG Query response 0 or 1 Other required commands To use digital horizontal sync digital separate H and V sync must be selected with the SSST command The FMTU command instructs the generator to use the new settings The ALLU command updates the hardware to the new settings and redraws the test image Example HSPG 1 Enable H sync output in buffer F...

Page 756: ...P Command syntax HSPP polarity polarity 0 active low negative going pulse 1 active high positive going pulse Query syntax HSPP Query response 0 or 1 Other required commands To use digital horizontal sync it must be gated on with the HSPG command and digital separate H and V sync must be selected with the SSST command The FMTU command instructs the generator to use the new settings The ALLU command...

Page 757: ...eturns the current setting of HSPW Command syntax HSPW pixels pixels min 1 max HTOT HRES HSPD Query syntax HSPW Query response pixels Other required commands The FMTU command instructs the generator to use the new settings The ALLU command updates the hardware to the new settings and redraws the test image Example HSPW 32 Set pulse width to 32 pixels in buffer FMTU Update hardware to current buffe...

Page 758: ...w you to directly enter a specific pixel rate when setting up a format If your test specifications call for a specific pixel or dot clock rate enter suitable values for HRAT and HTOT to give you the desired pixel rate Command syntax HTOT pixels pixels Query syntax HTOT Query response pixels Other required commands The FMTU command instructs the generator to use the new settings The ALLU command up...

Page 759: ...Delay Class Format Parameter Setting Synchronization Description Returns the pixel delay between the horizontal and vertical sync pulses Query syntax HVPD Query response number of pixels Example HVPD read pixel delay between HSYNC and VSYNC pulses 1 one pixel delay Related commands None ...

Page 760: ... default value as required by certain military STANAG video formats The HVSA query returns the current setting of HVSA Command syntax HVSA pixels pixels integer 0 and less than HSPW Query syntax HVSA Query response pixels Other required commands The FMTU command instructs the generator to use the new settings The ALLU command updates the hardware to the new settings and redraws the test image Exam...

Page 761: ...e EPROM type To determine which EPROM type is used try both syntaxes until you can read data from the EPROM Query syntax EPROM with single byte addresses connector I2CR bus_name i2c_address offset _of_bytes Query syntax EPROM with double byte addresses connector I2CR eprom1 i2c_address offset _of_bytes Query syntax device protocol connector I2CR bus_name i2c_address offset _of_bytes connector OUT1...

Page 762: ...enerator i2cr tv 89 00 04 82021402 Example 3 This command reads the HDCP Bksv value from a receiver i2cr 74 00 05 07BE05CEA9 Example 4 This command reads two bytes of register values from the transmitter output 1 HDMI chip of the generator i2cr HT1 7a 00 02 0002 Related commands EDA port GDID I2CW OUT1 I2CW OUT2 I2CW VGA I2CW ...

Page 763: ...ing data with this command ensure you send only 8 bytes of data at a time This is necessary since most EPROMs do not have a larger memory buffer Command syntax EPROM with single byte addresses connector I2CW bus_name i2c_address offset data Command syntax EPROM with double byte addresses connector I2CW eprom1 i2c_address offset _of_bytes data Command syntax device protocol connector I2CW bus_name ...

Page 764: ...ndix A Command Reference Example 2 This command writes four register bytes values from the transmitter TV chip of the generator i2cw tv 89 00 04 FFFFFFFF Related commands XDID I2CR OUT1 I2CR OUT2 I2CR VGA I2CR ...

Page 765: ...r Guide Rev A 35 387 IFGU InfoFrame Generator Use Class InfoFrame Packet Description Updates hardware with current InfoFrame contents Command syntax IFGU Example IFTG 14 IFGU Related commands IFAX RPTU IFTR XGIF XAVI XSPD XAUD XMPG ...

Page 766: ...PTU InfoFrame Generator RePorT Class InfoFrame Packet Description Runs a Packet Tx report on the 882E generator Command syntax IFGX RPTU Example This example generates the Packet Tx report and is available through the web interface IFGX RPTU ...

Page 767: ...9 IFAX RPTU InfoFrame Generator RePorT Class InfoFrame Packet Description Runs a Packet Rx report on the 882EA analyzer Command syntax IFAX RPTU Example This example generates the Packet Rx report and is available through the web interface IFAX RPTU ...

Page 768: ...rames are gated off and loaded with zeros IFTG 14 IFGU Example 2 This example shows how to send 3 different VSIs Two generic VSIs are sent prior to a 3D VSI You first enable 3D VSI 128 infoframe and disable AUD SPD and AVI MPG GIFA GIFB and GAMUT IFTR 127 enables repeating infoframes for GIFA 1 AVI 2 SPD 4 AUD 8 MPG 16 GIFB 32 GAMUT 64 IFTG 63 enables gates on GIFA 1 AVI 2 SPD 4 AUD 8 MPG 16 GIFB ...

Page 769: ...882 Video Test Instrument User Guide Rev A 35 391 X3DM 1 8 0 sends 3D VSI with side by side half FMTU initiates command sequence Related commands IFGU IFTR ...

Page 770: ...te For more information about the InfoFrame structure see the EIA Standard EIA CEA 861 B Section 6 Command syntax IFTR mask mask A bit mask based on these InfoFrame type values Example This example specifies that AUD 8 and AVI 2 InfoFrames should be repeated with every frame and other InfoFrame types should be sent once IFTR 10 IFGU Related commands IFAX RPTU IFGU Type Value GIFA 1 AVI 2 SPD 4 AUD...

Page 771: ...aGe save As Class Image memory management Description Saves the current contents of the image edit buffer using the given name Command syntax IMGA name name a valid MS DOS filename 8 characters minus any extension Example IMGA MY_IMG Save with the name MY_IMG ...

Page 772: ...iting session Command syntax IMGB Other required commands Use either an IMGL command to load an existing image or an IMGN command to create a new image Use IMGE when ending the editing session Example IMGN Initialize image edit buffer IMGB Start image editing session One or more image editing commands IMGE End image editing session ...

Page 773: ... Marks the end of an image editing session Command syntax IMGE Other required commands Use IMGB when starting the editing session Use IMGA or IMGS to save changes Example IMGB Start image editing session One or more image editing commands IMGA MYIMG_02 Save edited image as MYIMG_02 IMGE End image editing session ...

Page 774: ...1 if the named image can be deleted If the image is read only or nonexistent the query returns a 0 Command syntax IMGK name name a valid MS DOS filename 8 characters minus any extension Query syntax IMGK name name a valid MS DOS filename 8 characters minus any extension Query response 0 or 1 Example IMGK MY_IMG Delete dir called MY_IMG ...

Page 775: ...having a name equal to name from image memory into the image edit buffer The query returns a one 1 if the named image can be loaded otherwise a zero 0 is returned Command syntax IMGL name name a valid MS DOS filename 8 characters minus any extension Query syntax IMGL name name a valid MS DOS filename 8 characters minus any extension Query response 0 or 1 Other required commands An ALLU or IMGU com...

Page 776: ...igned as the image s name The query will return the name that has been assigned as the image s name Command syntax IMGN name name optional valid MS DOS filename 8 characters minus any extension Query syntax IMGN Query response name Example IMGN Init edit buffer without assigning a new name or IMGN MY_IMG Init edit buffer with name of MY_IMG ...

Page 777: ...PC card IMGP path name path name a valid MS DOS filename 8 characters minus any extension Command syntax file server IMGP server name server name valid hostname no forward slash before name and colon after name Query syntax IMGP name name a valid MS DOS filename 8 characters minus any extension Query response name Example IMGP FINAL Sets image pathname to a directory called FINAL IMGP hostname1 Se...

Page 778: ...list of all the images stored in image memory beginning at index The images are kept in alphanumeric order Query syntax IMGQ index number index positive integer number number positive integer number Query response List of specified image names Example IMGQ 1 5 List the first five images in memory or IMGQ 1 9999 List all images in memory ...

Page 779: ...r Guide Rev A 35 401 IMGS IMaGe Save Class Image memory management Description Saves the current contents of the generator s custom image edit buffer back to the memory location from which it was originally read Command syntax IMGS ...

Page 780: ...current contents of the image The IMGU query returns the image memory location location from which the current contents of the image were read Command syntax IMGU Query syntax IMGU Query response location location 1 through 26 EPROM Example IMGL BriteBox Select the BriteBox test image IMGU Draw the selected test image ...

Page 781: ...res the contents of all of the generator s RAM storage locations to factory default conditions The generator then goes through a complete self test and self calibration procedure Important The INIT command permanently and irreversibly removes all user created formats custom images test sequences and directories from memory Command syntax INIT ...

Page 782: ...shift edit buffer using the specified name Command syntax ISHA filename filename a valid MS DOS filename 8 characters minus any extension Example ISHA Myshift1 Saves with the name Myshift1 Related commands ISHB ISHE ISHG ISHK ISHL ISHN ISHP ISHQ ISHS ISHU XISH HINC XISH PATH XISH SRCN XISH TINC XISH TTYP XISH VINC ...

Page 783: ...tax ISHB Other required commands Use either an ISHL command to load an existing imageshift file or an ISHN command to create a new imageshift file Use ISHE when ending the editing session Example ISHB Begin imageshift editing session Related commands ISHA ISHE ISHG ISHK ISHL ISHN ISHP ISHQ ISHS ISHU XISH HINC XISH PATH XISH SRCN XISH TINC XISH TTYP XISH VINC ...

Page 784: ... editing session Command syntax ISHE Other required commands Use ISHS when starting the editing session Use ISHS or ISHA to save changes Example ISHE End imageshift editing session Related commands ISHA ISHB ISHG ISHK ISHL ISHN ISHP ISHQ ISHS ISHU XISH HINC XISH PATH XISH SRCN XISH TINC XISH TTYP XISH VINC ...

Page 785: ...shifting function The ISHG query returns the current ISHG mode Command syntax ISHG mode mode 0 OFF 1 ON Query syntax ISHG Query response 0 or 1 Example ISHG 1 Enables the image shifting function Related commands ISHA ISHB ISHE ISHK ISHL ISHN ISHP ISHQ ISHS ISHU XISH HINC XISH PATH XISH SRCN XISH TINC XISH TTYP XISH VINC ...

Page 786: ...irectory path and valid MS DOS filename 8 characters minus any extension of the file to be deleted If the file to be deleted is in the default path then path may be omitted Example ISHK Myshift1 Deletes the imageshift file named Myshift1 Related commands ISHA ISHB ISHE ISHG ISHL ISHN ISHP ISHQ ISHS ISHU XISH HINC XISH PATH XISH SRCN XISH TINC XISH TTYP XISH VINC ...

Page 787: ... path filename The directory path and valid MS DOS filename 8 characters minus any extension of the file to be loaded If the file to be loaded is in the default path then path may be omitted Example ISHL Myshift1 Loads the imageshift file named Myshift1 Related commands ISHA ISHB ISHE ISHG ISHN ISHP ISHQ ISHS ISHU XISH HINC XISH PATH XISH SRCN XISH TINC XISH TTYP XISH VINC ...

Page 788: ...ntax ISHN filename filename a valid MS DOS filename 8 characters minus any extension Example This example creates the file Myshift1 in the imageshifts directory on the generator ISHN Myshift1 Creates an imagefile named Myshift1 Related commands ISHA ISHB ISHE ISHG ISHK ISHL ISHP ISHQ ISHS ISHU XISH HINC XISH PATH XISH SRCN XISH TINC XISH TTYP XISH VINC ...

Page 789: ...P Query response path Example 1 This example sets the default path to the imageshifts directory ISHP tffs0 library imageshifts Example 2 This example queries the generator for the current imageshift path setting ISHP Query for the current imageshift path tffs0 library imageshifts current path Related commands ISHA ISHB ISHE ISHG ISHK ISHL ISHN ISHQ ISHS ISHU XISH HINC XISH PATH XISH SRCN XISH TINC...

Page 790: ...iles in a directory Quering repeatedly will eventually exhaust the list of filenames Query syntax ISHQ Query response List of imageshift filenames Example ISHQ List the first 5 imageshift filenames ISHQ List the nezt 5 imageshift filenames Related commands ISHA ISHB ISHE ISHG ISHK ISHL ISHN ISHP ISHS ISHU XISH HINC XISH PATH XISH SRCN XISH TINC XISH TTYP XISH VINC ...

Page 791: ...SHS Example ISHN Newshift Creates a new imageshift file named NEWSHIFT ISHB Begins an imageshift editing session XISH SRCN cache0 images SMPTEBar selects the SMPTEBar image XISH PATH 0 0 150 20 Sets the imageshift path x y coordinates XISH TTYP 1 Sets the trace type to Repeat 1 ISHE Ends the imageshift editing session ISHS Saves the values to the NEWSHIFT file Related commands ISHA ISHB ISHE ISHG ...

Page 792: ...imageshift file values to the hardware Command syntax ISHU Example ISHL Newshift Loads the imageshift file named NEWSHIFT ISHU Applies NEWSHIFT values to the hardware Related commands ISHA ISHB ISHE ISHG ISHK ISHL ISHN ISHP ISHQ ISHS XISH HINC XISH PATH XISH SRCN XISH TINC XISH TTYP XISH VINC ...

Page 793: ...st images cannot be read out since they are not created as a set of primitives Query syntax ISTP returns the number of steps in the custom image in the edit buffer or ISTP step_number returns the contents of the given step in the custom image in the edit buffer as a space delimited text string Other required commands A custom image must have been loaded with the IMGL command and editing must have ...

Page 794: ... on or off to allow activation of alternate versions of test images that have alternate versions The ISUB query returns the current setting of ISUB Command syntax ISUB mode mode 0 OFF 1 ON Query syntax ISUB Query response 0 or 1 Example IMGL SlideBox Load image ISUB 1 Enable alternate versions IVER 1 Load version 1 IMGU Update display ...

Page 795: ...e IVER command selects which version of the current image is drawn when either an ALLU or IMGU command is executed The IVER query returns the current setting of IVER Command syntax IVER mode mode 0 Normal 1 Invert or display alternate version Query syntax IVER Query response 0 or 1 Other required commands The IMGU command redraws an image using the new setting The ALLU command updates hardware and...

Page 796: ...for HDMI H and HDMI D are 165MHz for the upper limit and 25MHz for the lower limit Command syntax JDVI upper_pixel_rate lower_pixel_rate upper_pixel_rate lower_pixel_rate floating point number equal to the desired pixel in MHz Query syntax JDVI Query response upper_pixel_rate lower_pixel_rate Other required commands The ALLU command updates hardware to the new settings and redraws the test image E...

Page 797: ...scan rate as close as possible to its original value The following parameters are scaled horizontal total pixels horizontal active pixels horizontal sync delay in pixels and horizontal sync pulse width in pixels The parameters are scaled so that their periods in microseconds are as close as possible to their original values Command syntax JLDI pixel_rate pixel_rate floating point number equal to t...

Page 798: ... scaled horizontal total pixels horizontal active pixels horizontal sync delay in pixels and horizontal sync pulse width in pixels The parameters are scaled so that their periods in microseconds are as close as possible to their original values Command syntax JRAT pixel_rate pixel_rate floating point number equal to the desired pixel in MHz Other required commands The ALLU command updates hardware...

Page 799: ...ser Guide Rev A 35 421 LCDS LCD Status Class System parameter settings Description Returns text displayed on LCD of the generator Query syntax LCDS Example LCDS Return text similar to text below H32 15 VGA_m3 crlf V60 51 SMPTE133 ...

Page 800: ...n position from MSB to LSB corresponds to the following hardware settings Master output control gated ON MSB Digital Separate HS VS Sync selected Digital Composite Sync selected Analog Composite Sync selected Blue video enabled Green video enabled Red video enabled Alternate image version selected LSB Query syntax LEDS Query response decimal number from 0 to 255 Example LEDS Returns the following ...

Page 801: ...t Command syntax LEVP value value an interger number that is a percent in increments of 1 Query syntax LEVP Query response Returns an interger value representing a percent from 0 to 100 Example 1 LEVP 33 Sets the color component values for R G B to 33 of maximum color Example 2 LEVP Returns a value representing a percent of color component values 45 Indicates that the color component value is 45 o...

Page 802: ...G B value an interger number that is a percent in increments of 1 Query syntax LEVP color color a color component either R G B Query response Returns an interger value representing a percent from 0 to 100 Example 1 LEVP R 33 Sets the red color component values to 33 of maximum color Example 2 LEVP G 90 Sets the green color component values to 33 of maximum color Example 3 LEVP B Returns a value re...

Page 803: ...long each edge of video and a small cross is placed at the center of video The primitive uses a single parameter color Command syntax LIMI color color available colors Other required commands The FMTU command instructs the generator to use the new setting The ALLU command updates hardware to the new setting and redraws the test image Example LIMI white Place white markers that define active video ...

Page 804: ...points Command syntax LINE color x_start y_start x_end y_end color available colors x_start y_start x_ end y_end positive integer number Other required commands The FMTU command instructs the generator to use the new setting The ALLU command updates hardware to the new setting and redraws the test image Example LINE yellow 20 5 320 240 Draw yellow line from X 20 Y 5 to X 320 Y 240 ALLU Update hard...

Page 805: ... color component Some applications may require that the maximum level be set lower than the maximum permissible The query reads the current setting for the maximum level Command syntax LMAX video_level video_level unsigned integer from 59 to 63 when NBPC is 6 gamuts 235 to 255 when NBPC is 8 gamuts 940 to 1023 when NBPC is 10 gamuts 3760 to 4095 when NBPC is 12 gamuts Query syntax LMAX Example LMA...

Page 806: ...ack however some applications may require that the minimum level be set higher The query reads the current setting for the minimum level Command syntax LMIN video_level video_level unsigned integer from 0 to 4 when NBPC is 6 gamuts 0 to 16 when NBPC is 8 gamuts 0 to 64 when NBPC is 10 gamuts 0 to 256 when NBPC is 12 gamuts Query syntax LMIN Example LMIN 16 To set the minimum digital quantizing lev...

Page 807: ... Rev A 35 429 LS LS Class Tools Description Lists the contents of the current directory Query syntax LS Query response List of file names is presented Related commands None Example LS barpulse o boxquart o diamond o tceburst o barsmpte o ...

Page 808: ...erator Analyzer Description Enable or disable LipSync analyzer for HDMI auto lipsync correction testing Command syntax LSAX LSGM boolean boolean 0 disable 1 enable Query syntax LSAX LSGM Query response 0 or 1 Example LSAX LSGM 1 Enable LipSync testing LSAX LSGU Update hardware to new settings ...

Page 809: ...Sync Analyzer Use Class LipSync Generator Analyzer Description Updates hardware with current LipSync analyzer setup values and restarts the image Command syntax LSAX LSGU Example LSAX LSGM 1 Enable LipSync analyzer testing LSAX LSGU Update hardware to new settings ...

Page 810: ... Order Class LipSync Generator Analyzer Description Queries which data stream audio or video is received first by lipsync analyzer Query syntax LSAX PLAT Query response 0 video is received first 1 audio is received first Example LSAX PLAT Returns data stream received first ...

Page 811: ...ss LipSync Generator Analyzer Description Generates lipsync analyzer measurement report Command syntax LSAX RPTG boolean boolean 0 disable 1 enable Query syntax LSAX RPTG Query response 0 or 1 Example LSAX RPTG 1 Generates lipsync analyzer measurement report LSAX LSGU Update hardware to new settings ...

Page 812: ... Video Latency Class LipSync Generator Analyzer Description Queries latency delay between audio and video received by lipsync analyzer Query syntax LSAX TLAT Query response number of seconds delay Example LSAX TLAT Returns latency between audio and video data streams ...

Page 813: ...pSync Generator Analyzer Description Enable or disable LipSync generator for HDMI auto lipsync correction testing Command syntax LSGX LSGM boolean boolean 0 disable 1 enable Query syntax LSGX LSGM Query response 0 or 1 Example LSGX LSGM 1 Enable LipSync testing LSGX LSGU Update hardware to new settings ...

Page 814: ...Generator Use Class LipSync Generator Analyzer Description Updates hardware with current LipSync generator setup values and restarts the image Command syntax LSGX LSGU Example LSGX LSGM 1 Enable LipSync testing LSGX LSGU Update hardware to new settings ...

Page 815: ...mand syntax LSGX PLAT boolean boolean 0 video is transferred first indicating that video takes longer to process audio is delayed 1 audio is transferred first indicating that audio takes longer to process video is delayed Query syntax LSGX PLAT Query response 0 or 1 Example LSGX PLAT 1 Audio is sent first for lipsync test image LSGX TLAT 0 5 Latency between audio and video in lipsync test image LS...

Page 816: ...latency delay between audio and video for lipsync test image Command syntax LSGX TLAT delay delay 0 0 to 0 5 seconds Query syntax LSGX TLAT Query response delay Example LSGX PLAT 1 Audio is sent first for lipsync test image LSGX TLAT 0 5 Latency between audio and video in lipsync test image LSGX LSGU Update hardware to new settings ...

Page 817: ... The LSPG query returns the current LSPG mode Command syntax LSPG mode mode integer 0 OFF 1 ON Query syntax LSPG Query response 0 or 1 Other required commands The FMTU command instructs the generator to use the new settings The ALLU command updates the hardware to the new settings and redraws the test image Example LSPG 1 Enable Line Sync FMTU Update hardware to new settings ...

Page 818: ...PP Command syntax LSPP polarity polarity 0 active low negative going pulse 1 active high positive going pulse Query syntax FSPP Query response 0 or 1 Other required commands In order to get a pulse line sync must first be enabled with the LS command The FMTU command instructs the generator to use the new settings The ALLU command updates the hardware to the new settings and redraws the test image ...

Page 819: ...bits no handshake handshake and no protocol Command syntax MODE baud parity data stop handshake protocol baud rate 300 600 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 38400 57600 or 115200 bits sec parity N None E Even or O Odd data number of data bits 7 or 8 stop number of stop bits 1 or 2 handshake N None H Hardware CTS RTS protocol N None Y Y Modem Example MODE 9600 N 8 1 H N Set a stand alone generator to commu...

Page 820: ... change the currently displayed image The MSIZ query returns the current settings of MSIZ based on the current setting of the system level USIZ command Command syntax MSIZ width height or MSIZ common_size size positive floating point number common_size square box Query syntax MSIZ Query response width height Other required commands The correct unit of measure should be selected with the USIZ comma...

Page 821: ... Mute AVMUTE feature When enabled audio and video are muted by the generator Command syntax MUTE flag flag 0 disable AVMUTE_clear_flag sent repeatedly 1 enable AVMUTE_set_flag sent repeatedly Query syntax MUTE Query response 0 or 1 Example To enable AVMUTE MUTE 1 MUTE Use the MUTE to continuously check until the AVMUTE state is changed may not take place right away ...

Page 822: ...f the entry with name name in the directory edit buffer The first name in the buffer has an index value of 1 If name is not found a value of 0 is returned Query syntax NAMF name name a valid MS DOS filename 8 characters minus any extension Query response index Example NAMF VGA_m4 Return position of VGA_m4 in directory ...

Page 823: ... position 1 Using a number for index beyond the last name in the buffer will add name to the index position just beyond the last name The command does not check if a file called name is stored in the generator Command syntax NAMI index name name a valid MS DOS filename 8 characters minus any extension Example 1 This example inserts the DMT0660A format on the knob list at location 1 DIRL FMT DIRB N...

Page 824: ...irectory edit buffer All names with index values greater than the index of the deleted name are moved to the next lower index value in the buffer Nothing happens if name is not found in the buffer Command syntax NAMK name name a valid MS DOS filename 8 characters minus any extension Example NAMK VGA_m4 Remove VGA_m4 from dir ...

Page 825: ... with just an index parameter will return the same number of names as the last time starting at the given index Sending the query with no parameters will return the next set of names in the directory buffer Query syntax NAMQ index number index positive integer number number positive integer number Query response List of specified entry names from directory edit buffer Example 1 NAMQ 1 9999 List th...

Page 826: ...en index number from the directory edit buffer All names with index values greater than the index of the deleted name are moved to the next lower index value in the buffer Nothing happens if index is beyond the index number of last name in the buffer Command syntax NAMY index Example NAMY 2 Remove second item from dir ...

Page 827: ...ts the number of bits per audio sample for an audio signal This sets the SS parameter of the Audio InfoFrame as specified in EIA CEA 861 B table 20 Command syntax NBPA bits bits 0 let incoming external audio stream determine the number of bits per sample 16 20 882E only 24 882E only Example NBPA 16 IFGU Related commands XAUD SS parameter SAMP ...

Page 828: ...scription Sets the number of bits per color component color depth Command syntax NBPC bits bits 6 8 10 or 12 depending on output Example NBPC 10 FMTU Related commands DVSM DVQM Output NBPC DVI 8 TV 12 LVDS 6 18 bit encoding or 8 24 bit encoding HDMI Digital RGB or YCbCr 4 4 4 output 8 HDMI YCbCr 4 2 2 output 8 10 or 12 ...

Page 829: ...g is used to raise the TMDS clock rate to an acceptable frequency Double clocking is controlled by the NCPP format parameter When NCPP is set to 1 normal single clocked each pixel output by the generator is paired with one clock pulse In this case the pixel rate is equal to the TMDS clock rate By setting NCPP to 2 double clocked two clocks are send during each pixel period and the TMDS clock rate ...

Page 830: ...eter setting Audio signal Description Sets the number of digital audio channels for an audio signal This sets the CC parameter of the Audio InfoFrame as specified in EIA CEA 861 B table 20 Command syntax NDAC channels channels 2 or 8 Example NDAC 2 ALLU Related Commands XAUD CC parameter ...

Page 831: ...53 NDAS Number Digital Audio Streams Class Format parameter setting Audio signal Description Sets the number of digital audio streams Note Currently only one audio stream is supported Command syntax NDAS streams streams 1 default Example NDAS 1 IFGU ...

Page 832: ...A Command Reference NERR Number of ERRors in queue Class System memory management Description Returns the number of errors waiting to be reported in the error queue Query syntax NERR Query response number of errors ...

Page 833: ...nerators that support LVDI outputs The NLNK query returns the current setting of NLNK Command syntax NLNK links links integer 0 Default let the generator decide 1 Single link 2 Dual link Query syntax NLNK Query response links Other required commands The FMTU command instructs the generator to use the new setting The ALLU command updates hardware to the new setting and redraws the test image Exampl...

Page 834: ...rimitive Description Temporarily disables any gamma correction that may be selected in a format All color intensity levels in all parts of the custom image are output without gamma correction Gamma correction is disabled only for as long as the image is displayed Command syntax NOGA ...

Page 835: ... is complete Class System Level Description Temporarily holds off any ongoing command execution until communication is complete and ALLU is invoked Command syntax NOTU Query syntax NOTU Query response 0 if not enabled non zero when enabled Other required commands Disabled by ALLU ...

Page 836: ... signal Description Specifies repetition factor for active portion of line Command syntax NPPP factor factor 0 to disable repetition mode removes extra left and right repetition bars 1 to 10 enables pixel repetition mode inserts extra left and right repetition bars Related commands NCPP Example NPPP 4 FMTU ...

Page 837: ... Test Instrument User Guide Rev A 35 459 NSTP Number of STePs in sequence Class Sequence editor control Description Returns the number of steps in a sequence in the buffer Query syntax NSTP Query response steps ...

Page 838: ...verflow Class System memory management Description Checks for overflow in the error queue Overflow occurs when an attempt is made to add more errors to the queue than it can hold Query syntax OERR Query response overflow status 0 No Overflow 1 Overflow ...

Page 839: ...ol Description Sets the horizontal offset used for the large patch in the Regulate test image It may also control other images The OFFX query returns the current OFFX setting Command syntax OFFX x_offset x_offset integer number of pixels Query syntax OFFX Query response X offset Example OFFX 20 ...

Page 840: ...iption Sets the vertical offset used for the large patch in the Regulate test image It may also control other images The OFFY query returns the current OFFY setting Command syntax OFFY y_offset y_offset integer number of pixels Query syntax OFFY Query response Y offset Example OFFY 20 ...

Page 841: ...ide Rev A 35 463 OUT1 OUT2 AV VGA DCPG DCPX DVSS I2CR Description See the following commands DCPG OUT1 DCPG OUT2 DCPG AV DCPG VGA DCPG DCPX OUT1 DCPX OUT2 DCPX AV DCPX VGA DCPX DVSS OUT1 DVSS OUT2 DVSS I2CR OUT1 I2CR OUT2 I2CR VGA I2CR ...

Page 842: ...erator ON and OFF Gating the outputs OFF forces all outputs to be turned off Gating the outputs ON turns on all outputs whose individual gating settings are turned ON The OUTG query returns the current status of the outputs of the generator Command syntax OUTG mode mode 0 OFF 1 ON Query syntax OUTG Query response mode Example OUTG 0 ALLU ...

Page 843: ...e next two are the pixel width and height of the framing rectangle in pixels The fourth and fifth parameters are the x y coordinates for the top left corner of the framing rectangle The last parameter is the fill Command syntax OVAL color width height x y fill color available colors width total number of horizontal pixels height total number of lines x y positive integer numbers fill available fil...

Page 844: ...ber For full alphanumeric fonts the character number is the same as the character s ASCII code number The spacing between the characters is fixed by the character block size in the font and cannot be changed Partial characters are not drawn to completely fill the rectangular area rather the largest possible block of full characters is centered in the rectangular area Command syntax PAGE color widt...

Page 845: ...on generators that have a pixel clock output available The pixel clock output appears on the special sync BNC connector The PCPG query returns the current setting of PCPG Command syntax PCPG mode mode 0 OFF 1 ON Query syntax PCPG Query response mode Other required commands FMTU or ALLU Example PCPG 1 Enable pixel clk output in buffer FMTU Update hardware with format data ...

Page 846: ... analysis test to 100 PDAX MXER 1000 sets the maximum number of errors to record in pixel data analysis test to 1000 PDAX RPTG 1 enables the generation of reports for the ppixel data analysis test PDAX REFG 1 enables auto reference capturing for the pixel data analysis test PDAX CAPF captures a frame of pixel data for the pixel data analysis test PDAU runs the pixel data analysis test Related comm...

Page 847: ... Example PDAX FRMS 100 sets the number of frames to analyze in the pixel data analysis test to 100 PDAX MXER 1000 sets the maximum number of errors to record in pixel data analysis test to 1000 PDAX RPTG 1 enables the generation of reports for the ppixel data analysis test PDAX REFG 1 enables auto reference capturing for the pixel data analysis test PDAX CAPF captures a frame of pixel data for the...

Page 848: ... the file in a custom directory but you have to create the directory first Example PDAX CAPF captures a reference frame PDAX GFCA myref saves the reference frame to the file myref in the root directory of the card0 media PDAX FRMS 10 sets the number of frames to analyze in the pixel data analysis test to 10 PDAX REFG 0 mandatory disables auto reference capturing for the pixel data analysis test PD...

Page 849: ...he captured reference frame is on the Card media card0 Example PDAX CAPF captures a reference frame PDAX GFCA myref saves the reference frame to the file myref in the card0 location PDAX FRMS 10 sets the number of frames to analyze in the pixel data analysis test to 10 PDAX REFG 0 mandatory disables auto reference capturing for the pixel data analysis test PDAX GFCL myref loads the file myref as t...

Page 850: ...rence frame PDAX GFCA myref saves the reference frame to the file myref in the card0 location PDAX FRMS 10 sets the number of frames to analyze in the pixel data analysis test to 10 PDAX REFG 0 mandatory disables auto reference capturing for the pixel data analysis test PDAX GFCL myref loads the file myref as the reference frame PDAX GFCU myref applies the previous load file command PDAU runs the ...

Page 851: ...PDAX MXER Query response records Example PDAX FRMS 100 sets the number of frames to analyze in the pixel data analysis test to 100 PDAX MXER 1000 sets the maximum number of errors to record in pixel data analysis test to 1000 PDAX RPTG 1 enables the generation of reports for the pixel data analysis test PDAX REFG 1 enables auto reference capturing for the pixel data analysis test PDAX CAPF capture...

Page 852: ...es video passthru Command syntax PDAX PASS enable enable 0 to disable passthru 1 to enable video passthru 2 to enable non HDCP passthru Query syntax PDAX PASS Query response 1 2 or 3 Example PDAX PASS 0 Disables passthru mode PDAX PASS Returns 0 1 or 2 to indicate the status Related commands PDAX FRMS PDAX RPTG PDAX REFG PDAX CAPF PDAU ...

Page 853: ...onse PDAX RPTG Query response boolean Example PDAX FRMS 100 sets the number of frames to analyze in the pixel data analysis test to 100 PDAX MXER 1000 sets the maximum number of errors to record in pixel data analysis test to 1000 PDAX RPTG 1 enables the generation of reports for the ppixel data analysis test PDAX REFG 0 enables auto reference capturing for the pixel data analysis test PDAX CAPF c...

Page 854: ...sponse PDAX REFG Query response boolean Example PDAX FRMS 100 sets the number of frames to analyze in the pixel data analysis test to 100 PDAX MXER 1000 sets the maximum number of errors to record in pixel data analysis test to 1000 PDAX RPTG 1 enables the generation of reports for the ppixel data analysis test PDAX REFG 0 enables auto reference capturing for the pixel data analysis test PDAX CAPF...

Page 855: ...es to analyze in the pixel data analysis test to 100 PDAX MXER 1000 sets the maximum number of errors to record in pixel data analysis test to 1000 PDAX RPTG 1 enables the generation of reports for the ppixel data analysis test PDAX REFG 0 enables auto reference capturing for the pixel data analysis test PDAX CAPF captures a frame of pixel data for the pixel data analysis test PDAU runs the pixel ...

Page 856: ...nt Default is 1 count The maximum number of errors to report The initial count is 10 Query response frame x y mr mg mb rr rg rb frame The number of the frame that the error occurred in x y The coordinate that the error occurred on mr The measured red component value mg The measured red component value mb The rmeasured red component value rr The reference expected red component value rg The referen...

Page 857: ...ring for the pixel data analysis test PDAX CAPF captures a frame of pixel data for the pixel data analysis test PDAU runs the pixel data analysis test PDAX ERRQ 10 100 retrieves 100 errors starting at the 10th error in the index PDAX ERRQ retrieves 100 errors starting at the 110th error in the index Related commands PDAX MXER PDAX RPTG PDAX REFG PDAX FRMS PDAX ERRQ PDAU ...

Page 858: ...sis test to 100 PDAX MXER 1000 sets the maximum number of errors to record in pixel data analysis test to 1000 PDAX RPTG 1 enables the generation of reports for the ppixel data analysis test PDAX REFG 0 enables auto reference capturing for the pixel data analysis test PDAX CAPF captures a frame of pixel data for the pixel data analysis test PDAU runs the pixel data analysis test PDAX ERRQ 10 100 r...

Page 859: ...l data analysis test to 100 PDAX MXER 1000 sets the maximum number of errors to record in pixel data analysis test to 1000 PDAX RPTG 1 enables the generation of reports for the ppixel data analysis test PDAX REFG 0 enables auto reference capturing for the pixel data analysis test PDAX CAPF captures a frame of pixel data for the pixel data analysis test PDAU runs the pixel data analysis test PDAX V...

Page 860: ...mmand syntax PELD depth depth integer 0 use generator default 4 4 bits per pixel 16 colors 8 8 bits per pixel 256 colors 32 24 bits per pixel 16 777 216 colors Query syntax PELD Query response depth Other required commands The FMTU command instructs the generator to use the new setting The ALLU command updates hardware to the new setting and redraws the test image Example PELD 8 Select 8 bits per ...

Page 861: ... 483 PENH PEN Height Class Image editor control Description Sets a variable used establish line thicknesses to draw EeRise NAWC and Slider test images Command syntax PENH height height integer Query syntax PENH Query response height Example PENH 4 ...

Page 862: ...W PEN Width Class Image editor control Description Sets a variable used to establish line thicknesses to draw EeRise NAWC and Slider test images Command syntax PENW width width integer Query syntax PENW Query response width Example PENW 4 ...

Page 863: ...gnal advance set to ACTIVE PIXELS PNSM 0 Pseudo random noise signal mode set to AUTO PNSP 0 Pseudo random noise signal procedure set to CONTINUOUS PNAU Pseudo random noise generated GPER Returns the pixel error rate in errors per billion 0 88 GNPT Returns the number of pixels measured in billions 4 255 GCET Returns the total number of errors detected on the red green and blue components along with...

Page 864: ...nal format set to CURRENT internal PNST 1 Pseudo random noise signal type set to QDI BCM PNSA 1 Pseudo random noise signal advance set to ACTIVE PIXELS PNSM 0 Pseudo random noise signal mode set to AUTO PNSP 0 Pseudo random noise signal procedure set to CONTINUOUS PNSG 1 Pseudo random noise signal gate set to ON PNGU Output Pseudo random noise using latest parameters Example 2 To stop pseudo rando...

Page 865: ...nalyzer Pseudo random noise Description Controls how often pseudo random noise pixels are calculated Command syntax PSNA value value 0 every pixel clock 1 every active pixel clock Query syntax PNSA Query response 0 or 1 Example PNSA 1 Set calculation to pixel every clock PNGU Related commands PNGU ...

Page 866: ... off the output of pseudo random noise Command syntax PNSG gate gate 0 Pseudo random noise is not output the selected image is output 1 Pseudo random noise is output replacing the selected image output Query syntax PNSG Query response 0 or 1 Example PNSG 1 Output pseudo random noise from the generator PNGU Related commands PNGU ...

Page 867: ...dvanced according to the current setting of the PNSA parameter If PNSA is set to 0 every pixel the sequence length is automatically set to the total number of pixels per frame minus one Alternately if PNSA is set to 1 noise is advanced every active pixel and the length is set to the size of the HRES VRES active area per frame minus one 1 Manual mode The sequence seed and run length must be manuall...

Page 868: ...PIB host I O port activity is detected To stop the CONTINUOUS mode remotely via the I O ports a r is recommended 1 SINGLE SHOT stop after one run length In this mode a single run length is executed before the pseudo random noise measurement is stopped n MULTI SHOT stop after n run length shots In this mode a number of run lengths n are executed before pseudo random noise measurement is stopped and...

Page 869: ... Guide Rev A 35 491 PRAT Pixel RATe query Class Format parameter setting Video resolution Description Returns the current pixel rate setting Query syntax PRAT Query response pixel rate Example PRAT 25 1752E 06 Related commands TMAU ...

Page 870: ...is to the Open LVDI digital outputs on generators that support LVDI outputs The PREG query returns the current setting of PREG Pre emphasis is used to add compensation for signal loss in long cables Command syntax PREG mode mode 0 Pre emphasis OFF 1 Pre emphasis ON Query syntax PREG Query response mode Other required commands FMTU or ALLU ...

Page 871: ...1 Query syntax PSHD Query response width Other required commands The FMTU command instructs the generator to use the new settings The ALLU command updates the hardware to the new settings and redraws the test image Related commands PSPG PSPW PSPP PSVW PSPM Example PSPG 1 Enables probe pulse on special sync PSPP 1 Sets probe pulse polarity to positive PSPW 10 Sets probe pulse width to 10 pixels PSH...

Page 872: ...de Command syntax PSPD mode mode integer 0 OFF 1 ON Query syntax PSPG Query response 0 or 1 Other required commands The FMTU command instructs the generator to use the new settings The ALLU command updates the hardware to the new settings and redraws the test image Related commands PSPP PSPW PSHD PSVW PSPM Example FSPG 0 Disables frame sync PSPG 1 Enables probe pulse on special sync ALLU Applies t...

Page 873: ...s multiple lines Query syntax PSPM Query response 0 1 3 or 4 Other required commands The FMTU command instructs the generator to use the new settings The ALLU command updates the hardware to the new settings and redraws the test image Related commands PSPG PSPP PSPW PSHD PSVW Example PSPG 1 Enables probe pulse on special sync PSPP 1 Sets probe pulse polarity to positive PSPW 10 Sets probe pulse wi...

Page 874: ...x PSPP polarity polarity integer 0 negative 1 positive Query syntax PSPP Query response 0 or 1 Other required commands The FMTU command instructs the generator to use the new settings The ALLU command updates the hardware to the new settings and redraws the test image Related commands PSPG PSPW PSHD PSVW PSPM Example PSPG 1 Enables probe pulse on special sync PSPP 1 Sets probe pulse polarity to po...

Page 875: ...width width integer 1 pixel to HTOT 1 Query syntax PSPW Query response width Other required commands The FMTU command instructs the generator to use the new settings The ALLU command updates the hardware to the new settings and redraws the test image Related commands PSPG PSPP PSHD PSVW PSPM Example PSPG 1 Enables probe pulse on special sync PSPP 1 Sets probe pulse polarity to positive PSPW 100 Se...

Page 876: ... 0 PSVD VTOT 1 Query syntax PSVD Query response line Other required commands The FMTU command instructs the generator to use the new settings The ALLU command updates the hardware to the new settings and redraws the test image Related commands PSPG PSPW PSPP PSHD PSPM Example PSPG 1 Enables probe pulse on special sync PSPP 1 Sets probe pulse polarity to positive PSPW 10 Sets probe pulse width to 1...

Page 877: ... 1 Command syntax PSVW width width integer 1 line to VTOT 1 Query syntax PSVW Query response width Other required commands The FMTU command instructs the generator to use the new settings The ALLU command updates the hardware to the new settings and redraws the test image Related commands PSPG PSPP PSHD PSVW PSPM PSPW Example PSPG 1 Enables probe pulse on special sync PSPP 1 Sets probe pulse polar...

Page 878: ...x A Command Reference PWD Print Working Directory Class Tools Description Lists the current directory Query syntax PWD Query response List of the directory Related commands None Example PWD tffs0 generator images ...

Page 879: ...XAR Pixel Aspect Ratio Query Class Format parameter setting HDMI active video Description Reads the aspect ratio of pixels in active regions of the raster image Query syntax PXAR Query response aspect ratio Related commands NCPP Example PXAR 1 00000E 00 ...

Page 880: ...emory sets the calibration factor to a factory default setting of 1 00000 Note The RATC parameter is a system level parameter that will affect the pixel clock frequency of all formats that are recalled The RATC value will be retained when the generator is powered down and back up again Query the current setting of RATC if you are experiencing problems with the pixel clock or scan rate being off in...

Page 881: ...r of the rectangle The last parameter is the fill Command syntax RECT color width height x y fill color available colors width total number of horizontal pixels height total number of lines x y positive integer numbers fill available fill patterns Other required commands The FMTU command instructs the generator to use the new setting The ALLU command updates hardware to the new setting and redraws...

Page 882: ...te Description Toggles the red video signal gate Command syntax REDG mode mode 0 disable 1 enable Query syntax REDG Query response 0 or 1 Other required commands ALLU to invoke the command Related commands BLUG GRNG Example REDG 0 ALLU disable red video component ...

Page 883: ... information is output for each field of an interlaced SCAN 2 format The RFLD query returns the current setting of RFLD Command syntax RFLD mode mode 0 disabled 1 enabled Query syntax RFLD Query response 0 or 1 Other required commands FMTU or ALLU Example SCAN 2 Set Interlaced scanning RFLD 1 Enable repeat field buffer FMTU Update hardware with format data ...

Page 884: ...W slot red_level green_level blue_level slot integer 0 to 15 when PELD 4 0 to 255 when PELD 8 red_level green_level blue_level integer min 0 max LMAX setting 255 nominal Related commands Example IMGL RASTER IMGU SLUT 0 clears the look up table LINE RED 100 100 500 400 creates red line RECT GREEN 200 200 300 200 GRAYPAT100 creates green rectangle OVAL BLUE 200 200 100 100 GRAYPAT100 creates blue ov...

Page 885: ...35 507 RM ReMove Class Tools Description Removes a file that resides in the current directory Command syntax RM filename Command response filename Any file in a generator or file server library directory Related commands None Example RM hello o ...

Page 886: ...n decibels of the audio stream sinewave output by the generator Command syntax SAMP amplitude sets all channels amplitude 96 3 to 0 if NBPA is 16 bits 120 4 to 0 0 if NBPA is 20 bits 144 5 to 0 0 if NBPA is 24 bits Query syntax SAMP Query response amplitude Example SAMP 60 0 Sets all channels to 60 amplitude FMTU Related commands SRAT SMIN SMAX ...

Page 887: ...strument User Guide Rev A 35 509 SCAL Self CALibrate Class System calibration setting Description Causes a generator equipped with self calibration circuitry to go through its self calibration cycle Command syntax SCAL ...

Page 888: ...aced scan The SCAN query returns the current setting of SCAN Command syntax SCAN fields fields 1 progressive non interlaced 2 interlaced Query syntax SCAN Query response fields Other required commands The FMTU command instructs the generator to use the new setting The ALLU command updates hardware to the new setting and redraws the test image Example SCAN 2 Select interlace in buffer FMTU Update h...

Page 889: ...nnector of the 882EA Command syntax SDAU Example SDAU Initiates the measurement of the SPDIF audio input SDAX ARAT Queries for the sampling rate of the SPDIF audio input SDAX IECD Queries for the decoded IEC header information in human readable text of the SPDIF audio input Dolby 5ch L C R SL SR 48KHz sampling rate 448 KHz target bitrate Related commands SDAX ARAT SDAX IEC SDAX IECD SDAX CSBA SDAX...

Page 890: ... in the SPDIF audio header data received on the SPDIF IN connector of the 882EA Query syntax SDAX ARAT Query response Returns the sampling rate Example SDAU Initiates the measurement of the SPDIF audio input SDAX ARAT Returns the sampling rate of that audio received on the 882EA SPDIF IN 48000 Related commands SDAU SDAX IEC SDAX IECD SDAX CSBA SDAX CSBB ...

Page 891: ... of the 882EA Query syntax SDAX IECD The SDAX IEC query returns the undecoded IEC header data in hex Query response Returns the IEC SPDIF audio header data in human readable text Example SDAU Initiates the measurement of the SPDIF audio input SDAX IECD Returns the decoded header information of that audio received on the 882EA SPDIF IN Dolby 5ch L C R SL SR 48KHz sampling rate 448 KHz target bitrat...

Page 892: ...882EA Query syntax SDAX CSBA The SDAX CSBA query returns the undecoded channel status bits in hex Query response Returns the channel status bits from the SPDIF audio header data in hex Example SDAU Initiates the measurement of the SPDIF audio input SDAX CSBA Returns the channel status bits in raw hex form from the left and right channels 020000060000000200000000000000000000000000000000 Related com...

Page 893: ...eturns the current setting of SDLY Command syntax SDLY delay frames delay Delay time in seconds as a floating point number frames Delay in frames Type minus character before integer min 0 0 seconds 1 frame max 1 70E38 seconds infinite Query syntax SDLY Query response delay Other required commands SMOD setting must be equal to 3 in order for the SDLY setting to have any affect on sequence operation...

Page 894: ...ort 1 Internal SPDIF OUT audio content is from the internal SPDIF audio generator 2 SPDIF IN SPDIF OUT audio content is from the audio received from the SPDIF Input Example 1 SDGM 2 Causes the 882EA pass the SPDIF audio received from its SPDIF IN connector out through the SPDIF OUT connector Example 2 SDGM 0 Causes the 882EA pass the SPDIF audio received from its HDMI IN connector out through the ...

Page 895: ...ters are set to 0 indicating that the stream header should be used to determine audio coding type channel type sampling frequency and sample size respectively If both external and sdg bits are set to 1 simultaneously then an error is generated as the generator s sonic data mixer does not currently support proportional mixing of internal and external sources Command syntax SDMG mask mask 1 SDG is t...

Page 896: ...he SEOS command enables users to determine if the generator should use line feed for end of string parsing Command syntax SEOS integer integer 0 Configures the generator to not test end of strings and to send EOI only on the last character of the entire response Use this option to receive an entire multi line response in a single read operation Leave the VISA Enable Termination Character option se...

Page 897: ...e save As Class Sequence memory management Description Saves the current contents of the sequence edit buffer using the given name Command syntax SEQA name name A valid MS DOS filename 8 characters minus any extension Example SEQA MY_SEQ Save with the name MY_SEQ ...

Page 898: ...g session Command syntax SEQB Other required commands Use either a SEQL command to load an existing sequence or a SEQN command to create a new sequence Use SEQE when ending the editing session Example SEQN Initialize sequence edit buffer SEQB Start sequence editing session One or more sequence editing commands SEQE End sequence editing session ...

Page 899: ...ks the end of a sequence editing session Command syntax SEQE Other required commands Use SEQB when starting the editing session Use SEQA or SEQS to save changes Example EQB Start sequence editing session One or more sequence editing commands SEQE End sequence editing session SEQA MYSEQ_02 Save edited sequence as MYSEQ_02 ...

Page 900: ... a 1 if the named sequence can be deleted If sequence is read only or non existent the query returns a 0 Command syntax SEQK name name a valid MS DOS filename 8 characters minus any extension Query syntax SEQK name name a valid MS DOS filename 8 characters minus any extension Query response 0 or 1 Example SEQK MY_SEQ Delete seq called MY_SEQ ...

Page 901: ...sequence can be loaded otherwise a 0 is returned Command syntax SEQL name name a valid MS DOS filename 8 characters minus any extension Query syntax SEQL name name a valid MS DOS filename 8 characters minus any extension Query response 0 or 1 Other required commands An SEQU command must be executed after the SEQL command to start running the sequence Example SEQL MY_SEQ Load MY_SEQ dir in edit buf...

Page 902: ...ssigned as the sequence s name The query will return the name that has been assigned as the sequence s name Command syntax SEQN name name optional valid MS DOS filename 8 characters minus any extension Query syntax SEQN Query response name Example SEQN Init edit buffer without assigning a new name or SEQN MY_SEQ Init edit buffer with name of MY_SEQ ...

Page 903: ...ion Sets the current sequence path name to a given directory The query will return the current path name Command syntax SEQP name name a valid MS DOS filename 8 characters minus any extension Query syntax SEQP Query response Current sequence path name Example SEQP BURN Sequences in BURN directory will be listed ...

Page 904: ...xecuted Sending the query with just an index parameter will return the same number of names as the last time starting at the given index Sending the query with no parameters will return the next set of names in the directory buffer Query syntax SEQQ index number index positive integer number number positive integer number Query response List of specified sequence names Example 1 SEQQ 1 9999 List t...

Page 905: ...uide Rev A 35 527 SEQS SEQuence Save Class Sequence memory management Description Saves the current contents of the generator s sequence edit buffer back to the memory location from which they were originally read Command syntax SEQS ...

Page 906: ... edit buffer The SEQU query returns the sequence name currently set in the sequence edit buffer Command syntax SEQU Query syntax SEQU Query response name Other required commands The sequence in the edit buffer must have a non zero SMOD setting to run Example SEQL MY_SEQ Load MY_SEQ dir in edit buffer SEQU Start running the sequence in the buffer ...

Page 907: ...for rendering and displaying selected colors from defined sets This command is made available for testing low level drawing firmware and is not intended for use by end users Command syntax SLUT colorset colorset integer Bit mask indicating desired color sets Example 1 SLUT 65536 Setup for HUERGB colorset Example 2 SLUT 0 clears look up table ...

Page 908: ...io Sinewave Maximum Class Parameters Audio Signal and Timing Description Returns the maximum amplitude of the digital audio sinewave output from the generator Query syntax SMAX Query response maximum amplitude 0 65 535 Related commands SRAT SAMP SMIN ...

Page 909: ...gital Audio Sinewave Minimum Class Parameters Audio Signal and Timing Description Returns the minimum amplitude of the digital audio sinewave output from the generator Query syntax SMIN Query response minimum amplitude 0 65 535 Related commands SRAT SAMP SMAX ...

Page 910: ...e 0 disable 1 enable manual step mode that stops at last step 2 enable manual step mode that wraps to first step after last step 3 enable continuous auto stepping Query syntax SMOD Query response mode Other required commands The SEQL command loads the sequence and SEQU starts to run it Example SEQL MY_SEQ Load MY_SEQ in edit buffer SEQU Start running the sequence in the buffer SMOD 3 Set the seque...

Page 911: ...The first is the color used for the text and box border The next two parameters are the x and y coordinates for the position of the box Command syntax SNUM color x y color available colors x y positive integer numbers Other required commands The displaying of sequence step numbers must be enabled with the DNUM command and the custom image must have been loaded as part of a sequence in order for th...

Page 912: ...editor control Description Sets the horizontal spacing of certain elements in some built in test images The SPAX query returns the current SPAX setting Command syntax SPAX x_spacing x_spacing integer number of pixels Query syntax SPAX Query response x_spacing Example SPAX 20 ...

Page 913: ...ss Image editor control Description Sets the vertical spacing of certain elements in some built in test images The SPAY query returns the current SPAY setting Command syntax SPAY y_spacing y_spacing integer number of pixels Query syntax SPAY Query response y_spacing Example SPAY 20 ...

Page 914: ... Rate Class Parameters Audio Signal and Timing Description Sets the frequency of the audio sinewave from the generator Command syntax SRAT rate rate 20 0 to 20 0E3 Hz Query syntax SRAT Query response rate Example SRAT 10 0E3 FMTU Related commands SAMP SMAX SMIN ...

Page 915: ...PGA display cannot accept digital separate HS and VS because only one sync wire is provided in the cabling In these cases one or more of the sync types ASCT DSCT or DSST is set to 0 indicating that they are not supported If a non supported sync type is selected using the SSST command then the corresponding sync outputs of the generator will remain disabled The SSST query returns the type of sync i...

Page 916: ...r DSST commands To actually output the selected sync signal it must be gated on with the appropriate ASSG ASBG ASGG ASRG CSPG HSPG and VSPG settings Example DSST 1 Set Amer H V in buffer HSPG 1 Enable H sync in buffer VSPG 1 Enable V sync in buffer SSST 1 Select sep H V sync in buffer FMTU Update hardware to current buffer contents ...

Page 917: ...f the HDMI analyzer Each time a host accesses the I2C receiver bus for example to read the EDID the receiver stretches the SCL low signal for 5 ms Enable stretching for testing purposes only Command syntax STRG value value 0 deactivate stretching 1 activate stretching of SCL low signal for 5 ms Query syntax STRG Query response 0 or 1 Example STRG 1 DIDU Related commands ...

Page 918: ...e editor and while running a sequence the command selects a step to be executed The STEP query returns the current setting of STEP Command syntax STEP step step min 1 max See description Query syntax STEP Query response step Other required commands When running a sequence the SEQU command must be executed after the STEP command to load the format and display the image selected in the step Example ...

Page 919: ...Determines which output colors are enabled The SVSG query returns the current SVSG setting Command syntax SVSG gate_mask gate_mask Query syntax SVSG Query response gate_mask Example SVSG 7 Gate Mask Red Green Blue 0 Off Off Off 1 Off Off On 2 Off On Off 3 Off On On 4 On Off Off 5 On Off On 6 On On Off 7 On On On ...

Page 920: ...t ratio of the video signal format or coded frame that transports images to the display Command syntax SXAR aspect_ratio aspect_ratio 0 75 to 2 39 Note For a listing of established aspect ratios see the table on page 256 CXAR command Related commands CXAR EXAR Example SXAR 1 33 Sets 4 3 video signal aspect ratio for source content FMTU ...

Page 921: ...mat Upon executing this command the following actions are performed 1 The EXAR value is set to the CXAR value EXAR CXAR 2 The EXCX value is set to 0 EXCX 0 3 The SXEX value is set to value entered for this command SXEX SXCX Command syntax SXCX code code 0 to 131071 in decimal Note For help in determining the proper mapping code follow the procedure on page 332 EXCX command Related commands SXEX EX...

Page 922: ... 0 to 131071 in decimal The mapping code is made up of three binary field codes as follows Bits 0 2 are the Squeeze Stretch S field code Bits 3 9 are the Letterbox Pillar L field code Bits 10 16 are the Safe Area K field code Note For help in determining the proper mapping code follow the procedure on page 332 EXCX command Related commands EXAR SXAR EXCX SXCX Example SXEX 264 Use centered shrink w...

Page 923: ...3b5f8 0 0 tSerRxTx RxTxTaskEntr d95580 7 READY 39fd44 d954f8 0 0 cioPipeDraiDrainPipe__8 ffeb98 8 PEND 39ba74 ffea38 3d0002 0 appMain appMain__Fv da5798 10 READY 39fd44 da55e0 0 0 tNetTask netTask e69e28 50 READY 39ba74 e69d70 0 0 tWebUI AcceptTaskEn d77088 50 PEND 39ba74 d76ef0 0 0 tTelnetd telnetd e40fa8 55 PEND 39ba74 e40e08 0 0 tFtpdTask 1c890c e3f9b8 55 PEND 39ba74 e3f850 0 0 GPIB MonitorEntr...

Page 924: ... 0 0 to 1 0 normalized positioning of box center in the y direction info 0 format image line rate and frame rate default 1 format 2 image 3 sequence 4 step number 5 format and image 6 sequence and step 7 line rate and HRES X VRES 8 pixel rate and HRES X VRES 9 format image sequence and step 10 format image HRES X VRES and pixel rate 11 line rate frame rate sequence and step 12 pixel rate HRES X VR...

Page 925: ...er Guide Rev A 35 547 type 0 text only 1 text w border 2 text w black background 3 text w border and black background Query syntax TBOX Query response color x y info type Other required commands TBXG Example TBOX white 0 5 0 5 8 3 ...

Page 926: ...cription Enables and disables the displaying of the text box defined by the TBOX command The TBXG query returns the current TBXG mode Command syntax TBXG mode mode integer 0 OFF 1 ON Query syntax TBXG Query response mode Other required commands TBOX Example TBXG 1 ...

Page 927: ...35 549 TIME TIME Class System parameter setting Description Sets the system time in the 882 Command syntax TIME hh mm ss hh 00 23 mm 00 59 ss 00 59 Query syntax TIME hh mm ss Example 1 TIME 13 44 48 Example 2 TIME 13 44 48 Related commands DATE ...

Page 928: ...ust be contained inside quotation marks All of the characters in the text string must have matching characters in the font selected by font name Command syntax Text color x y font text color available colors x y coordinates of top left corner of page in pixels font available fonts text approximately 30 characters must be enclosed by quotes Other required commands The FMTU command instructs the gen...

Page 929: ...iates a measurement of the timing received from an external DVI HDMI source via the HDMI Input connector Command syntax TMAU Example TMAU Measure external signal s timing format parameters TMAX HTOT Read external signal s total number of horizontal pixels 800 TMAX HRES Read external signal s total number of active horizotan pixels 640 ...

Page 930: ...gnal Analyzer Description Enable or disable the generation of an HTML report for the analysis results Command syntax TMAX RPTG boolean boolean 0 disable reporting 1 enable reporting Example TMAU Measure external signal s timing format parameters TMAX RPTG 1 Enables reporting of the timing measurements ...

Page 931: ...CAN Queries for the SCAN parameter that was measured TMAX HRAT Queries for the HRAT parameter that was measured SCAN Returns the scan type PRAT Returns the pixel rate in Hz VRAT Returns the vertical field rate VRAT FRAT SCAN HTOT Returns the horizontal total in pixels HRES Returns the horizontal active in pixels HSPD Returns the horizontal sync pulse delay in pixels HSPW Returns the horizontal syn...

Page 932: ...signal levels are determined for a given color intensity level The default method uses black as the 0 reference level and peak video as the 100 level Inserting TOBL moves the 0 reference point to the blanking blacker than black pedestal level The reference point remains shifted only for as long as the image is displayed Command syntax TOBL ...

Page 933: ...ID formats will be shown in the Source list Command syntax TOGG mode mode 1 Enable reading of EDID from sink This is equivalent to pressing the Sink Options key sequence and enabling EDID formats 0 Disable read of EDID from sink This is equivalent to pressing the Sink Options key sequence and disabling EDID formats Query syntax TOGG Query response mode Example TOGG 0 disables EDID formats TOGG 1 e...

Page 934: ...ons can be built up using a series of joined filled triangles Command syntax TRIA color x1 y1 x2 y2 x3 y3 fill color available colors x1 y1 x2 y2 x3 y3 positive integer number fill available fill pattern Other required commands The FMTU command instructs the generator to use the new setting The ALLU command updates hardware to the new setting and redraws the test image Example TRIA red50 10 5 10 2...

Page 935: ...Description Enables and disables the tri level sync pulse This command affects only tri level analog composite sync types ASCT 1 11 12 13 14 or 15 The exact function of the TSPG command depends on the analog sync composite type selected as shown below Command syntax TSPG mode mode 0 OFF 1 ON Query syntax TSPG Query response mode ...

Page 936: ...mmands The FMTU command instructs the generator to use the new setting The ALLU command updates hardware to the new setting and redraws the test image Example TSPG 1 Enable tri level sync pulse in buffer FMTU Update hardware to current buffer contents ...

Page 937: ...559 UI MODE Operational mode Class System control Description Sets generator operational mode Command Syntax UI MODE mode mode 0 Basic mode 1 Browse mode Query syntax UI MODE Query response mode Example UI MODE 1 Set operational mode to Browse mode ...

Page 938: ...d image it must be redrawn to use the new text The factory default string is Quantum Data The UIDN query returns the current text string Command syntax UIDN string string text string 80 characters in length Query syntax UIDN Query response string Other required commands The IMGU command redraws the last selected test image The ALLU command updates hardware to the new setting and redraws the test i...

Page 939: ... and the current HSIZ is 10 inches changing USIZ from inches to mm will change HSIZ to 25 4 mm The USIZ command should be sent before specifying physical sizes in format command files Command syntax USIZ units units 0 sizes not given use default 1 inches 2 mm Query syntax USIZ Query response units Other required commands The ALLU command updates hardware to the new setting and redraws the test ima...

Page 940: ...562 Appendix A Command Reference USRA Add USeR Class Tools Description Adds a user profile Command syntax USRA username username A name with 8 alphanumeric characters Example USRA janedoe USRU janedoe ...

Page 941: ...882 Video Test Instrument User Guide Rev A 35 563 USRK Delete a USeR Class Tools Description Deletes a user profile Command syntax USRK username username An existing user name Example USRK janedoe ...

Page 942: ...Reference USRU Create USeR Class Tools Description Creates a user profile Command syntax USRU username username A name with 8 alphanumeric characters Query syntax USRU Query response username Example USRA janedoe USRU janedoe ...

Page 943: ...he boot code The digits to the left of the decimal point represent the major release level The digits to the right of the decimal point represent the revision number of the release A second decimal point followed by more digits indicates the revision is at a given beta test level Query syntax VERF Query response version runtime code version boot code Example VERF 20 0882002 01 03 03 ...

Page 944: ...nt represent the major release level The digits to the right of the decimal point represent the revision number of the release A second decimal point followed by more digits indicates the revision is at a given beta test level Query syntax VERG Query response product code revision date code product code revsion date code product code revsion date code Example VERG 255C 39 3232006 253F 75 4252006 2...

Page 945: ...ting Video resolution Description Returns the current vertical field rate This is equal to the product of the FRAT frame rate and SCAN scan type settings FRAT SCAN Query syntax VRAT Query response vertical field rate Example VRAT read the product of FRAT and SCAN settings 50 0000 Related commands FRAT ...

Page 946: ...tting of VRES Command syntax VRES lines lines min 1 when SCAN 1 or 2 when SCAN 2 max the lesser of VTOT 1 when SCAN 1 or VTOT 3 when SCAN 2 Must be an even number when SCAN 2 Query syntax VRES Query response lines Other required commands The ALLU command updates hardware to the new setting and redraws the test image Example VRES 480 Set 480 active lines in buffer ALLU Configure hardware and redraw...

Page 947: ...Changing the USIZ setting after entering VSIZ will convert the size to match the new unit of measure Command syntax VSIZ size size physical size positive value floating point accepted Query syntax VSIZ Query response size Other required commands The units of measure must be properly set by USIZ before entering VSIZ The ALLU command updates hardware to the new setting and redraws the test image tak...

Page 948: ...line shorter than the whole line delay specified The VSPD query returns the current setting of the vertical sync pulse delay Command syntax VSPD lines lines min 0 when SCAN 1 or 1 when SCAN 2 max VTOT VRES VSPW when SCAN 1 or VTOT VRES 1 2 VSPW when SCAN 2 Query syntax VSPD Query response lines Other required commands The FMTU command instructs the generator to use the new setting The ALLU command...

Page 949: ... Command syntax VSPG mode mode 0 OFF 1 ON Query syntax VSPG Query response 0 or 1 Other required commands To use digital vertical sync digital separate H and V sync must be selected with the SSST command The FMTU command instructs the generator to use the new setting The ALLU command updates hardware to the new setting and redraws the test image Example VSPG 1 Enable V sync output in buffer FMTU U...

Page 950: ...f VSPP Command syntax VSPP polarity polarity 0 high to low transition 1 low to high transition Query syntax VSPP Query response 0 or 1 Other required commands In order to use digital vertical sync it must be gated on with the VSPG command and digital separate H and V sync must be selected with the SSST command The FMTU command instructs the generator to use the new setting The ALLU command updates...

Page 951: ... types then the actual sync pulse width output by the generator will be 1 2 line shorter than the whole number specified The VSPW query returns the current setting of VSPW Command syntax VSPW lines Query syntax VSPW Query response lines Other required commands The FMTU command instructs the generator to use the new setting The ALLU command updates hardware to the new setting and redraws the test i...

Page 952: ...ical rate is equal to twice the frame rate when SCAN 2 non interlaced operation Note The current version of the firmware does not allow you to directly enter a specific field or frame rate when setting up a format If your test specifications call for a specific field frame or vertical refresh rate enter suitable values for HRAT SCAN and VTOT to give you the desired rate Command syntax VTOT lines l...

Page 953: ...ired commands The FMTU command instructs the generator to use the new setting The ALLU command updates hardware to the new setting and redraws the test image Example VTOT 525 Set total lines frame to 525 in buffer FMTU Update hardware to current buffer contents ...

Page 954: ... value The XACR command takes effect the new N and CTS values are encoded and transmitted to the receiver after the packet is gated on DPTG command and the hardware has been updated DPGU command Command syntax XACR n cts n value of audio clock regeneration cts Cycle Time Stamp If not specified the hardware will calculate the CTS value Related Commands DPTG DPGU ...

Page 955: ... value of SXAR which remains fixed by the current format Therefore the range of allowed AFD values are determined by the value of SXAR in the current format AFD Code SXAR CXAR1 EXCX1 EXAR SXEX1 2 1 33 1 77 0 CXAR 280 1 77 1 77 0 CXAR 16 3 1 33 or 1 77 1 55 0 CXAR 280 4 1 33 or 1 77 1 77 0 CXAR 264 8 1 33 1 33 0 CXAR 0 1 77 1 33 0 CXAR 0 9 1 33 1 33 0 CXAR 16 1 77 1 33 0 CXAR 264 10 1 33 1 77 0 CXA...

Page 956: ...the EXAR extended aperture and both mapping methods SXEX EXCX are shown in bold In these cases an EXCX Lcsp operation is first used to place CXAR shaped content into the EXAR shaped extended aperture This operation is then followed by a SXEX Lcbb operation which finally places the EXAR shaped extended aperture into the SXAR shaped output signal aperture ...

Page 957: ...gth CC 1 SS SF CA LSV DMI For compressed audio coding types XAUD type version length CC CT SS SF MBR CA LSV DMI type 4 version 1 length bytes 10 The remaining are Audio Infoframe data parameters audparameter as specified in EIA CEA 861 B standard Section 6 3 VERS same as Version Infoframe version CC Channel count see EIA CEA 861 B standard Table 19 for settings CC2 CC1 CC0 Audio channel count 0 0 ...

Page 958: ...UD CA value will automatically set both DACA and DAXA to corresponding values See the table on page 266 to view these settings CT3 CT2 CT1 CT0 Audio Coding Type 0 0 0 0 Refer to Stream Header 0 0 0 1 IEC60958 PCM 26 27 0 0 1 0 AC 3 0 0 1 1 MPEG1 Layers 1 2 0 1 0 0 MP3 MPEG 1 Layer 3 0 1 0 1 MPEG2 multichannel 0 1 1 0 AAC 0 1 1 1 DTS 1 0 0 0 ATRAC SS1 SS0 Sample Size 0 0 Refer to Stream Header 0 1 ...

Page 959: ...0 1 0 0 0 0 RRC RLC RR RL FR FL 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 RRC RLC RR RL LFE FR FL 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 RRC RLC RR RL FC FR FL 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 RRC RLC RR RL FC LFE FR FL 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 FRC FLC FR FL 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 FRC FLC LFE FR FL 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 FRC FLC FC FR FL 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 1 FRC FLC FC LFE FR FL 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 FRC FLC RC FR FL 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 FRC FLC RC LFE FR FL 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 FRC FLC RC FC FR FL 0 0 0 ...

Page 960: ...ter 88 2KHz frequency SF parameter 72KHz maximum bit rate MBR parameter All but channel 3 LFE are allocated CA parameter 10dB attenuation during source device down mixing LSV parameter Down mixing permitted DMI parameter XAUD 4 1 10 6 3 1 4 9 18 10 0 IFGU Example 3 The following example reports the current setting for the Member Bit Rate parameter in the Audio Infoframe XAUD MBR Related commands I...

Page 961: ... SC ETB SBB ELB SRB Command syntax complete packet version 2 XAVI type version length S B A Y R M C SC ETB SBB ELB SRB VIC PR RGB EC ITC CN type 2 version 1 version 1 2 version 2 length bytes 13 The remaining are AVI Infoframe data parameters aviparameter as specified in EIA CEA 861 B standard Section 6 1 VERS same as Version Infoframe version 1 version 1 2 version 2 S Scan information see EIA CEA...

Page 962: ...standard Table 9 for settings B1 B0 Bar Information 0 0 Bar data not valid 0 1 Vertical Bar info valid 1 0 Horizontal Bar info valid 1 1 Vertical Horizontal Bar info valid A0 Active Format Information Present 0 No data 1 Active format information valid Y1 Y0 RGB or YCbCr 0 0 RGB default 0 1 YCbCr 4 2 2 1 0 YCbCr 4 4 4 1 1 Future R3 R2 R1 R0 Active Format Aspect Ratio 1 0 0 0 Same as picture aspect...

Page 963: ...f start of right bar representing the first horizontal pixel of a vertical pillar bar area at the left side of the picture VIC Video Format Identification Codes see DVIC for settings PR Pixel repetition for 2x and 4x formats see EIA CEA 861 B standard Table 14 for settings This field is set automatically based on settings for NCPP and NPPP C1 C0 Colorimetry 0 0 No data 0 1 SMPTE 170M ITU601 1 0 IT...

Page 964: ...onse value 0 1 1 1 Pixel sent 8 times 1 0 0 0 Pixel sent 9 times 1 0 0 1 Pixel sent 10 times Q1 Q0 RGB Quantization Range 0 0 Default dependson video format 0 1 Limited range 1 0 Full range 1 1 Reserved EC2 EC1 EC0 Extended Colorimetry 0 0 0 xvYCC601 IEC 61966 2 4 with standard definition primaries 0 0 1 xvYCC709 IEC 61966 2 4 with high definition primaries Reserved ITC IT Content 0 No data DVIC o...

Page 965: ...he AFD flag A parameter to not present and the picture aspect ratio M parameter to 4 3 in the AVI Infoframe XAVI A 0 M 1 IFGU Example 4 The following example reports the current settings for the following AVI Infoframe parameters Video Type Active Format Information present Bar information present Scan information Colorimetry XAVI Y XAVI A XAVI B XAVI S XAVI C Related commands DVIC NPPP IFTR IFAX ...

Page 966: ... Class Format parameter setting active video Description Establishes the first line of a horizontal letterbox bar area at the bottom of the image Command syntax XBBH line_number line_number 0 to 65535 in decimal Related commands XISH TTYP XRBW XTBH Example XBBH 769 FMTU ...

Page 967: ... bytes data offset hex address offset in bytes bytes number of bytes hex data data hex Example 1 To change the first 3 bytes of the EDID structure after the header XDID 8 3 DE33FF DIDU Example 2 To write at offset 256 start of block 2 XDID 100 8 1122334455667788 XDID 108 8 8899AABBCCDDEEFF DIDU Related commands DIDA DIDB DIDE DIDK DIDL TASK DIDP DIDQ DIDS DIDU EDA port GDID EDA port PDID ...

Page 968: ... status of the mute is changed only after the packet is gated ON DPTG the repeat mode has been set DPTR and the hardware has been updated DPGU see example below Command syntax XGCP AVMUTE_set_flag AVMUTE_set_flag 0 off 1 on Related commands MUTE DPTG DPGU Example 1 To enable AVMUTE DPTG 7 DPTR 1 XGCP 1 DPGU Once executed use the MUTE to continuously check until the AVMUTE state is changed may not ...

Page 969: ...aracters which is less than 30 bytes of data are specified then the remaining bytes are set to zero The following are data island packet parameters gdpparameter as specified in HDMI specification Section 5 3 hb0 Packet type see HDMI specification Section 5 3 1 through 5 3 6 for settings hb1 Packet specific data see HDMI specification Section 5 3 1 through 5 3 6 for settings hb2 Packet specific dat...

Page 970: ...t this is an optional parameter A or B The remaining are GIF Infoframe data parameters gifparameter as specified in EIA CEA 861 D standard Section 6 1 TYPE same as type Infoframe type VERS same as version Infoframe version LEN same as length Infoframe length in bytes maximum 27 bytes INFO hexidecimal payload data in the form of ASCII characters each representing one 4 bit nibble of data If less th...

Page 971: ...as issued the value will be changed but not applied to the hardware until the ISHE and ISHU commands are issued Otherwise the command will take effect immediately Command syntax XISH HINC increment increment positive integer number Query syntax XISH HINC Query response Current horizontal shifting increment value Example 1 XISH HINC 4 Sets the horizontal shifting increment to 4 Example 2 XISH HINC ...

Page 972: ... which can be queried with VRES If an imageshift editing session is in progress the ISHB command was issued the path will be changed but not applied to the hardware until the ISHE and ISHU commands are issued Otherwise the command will take effect immediately Command syntax XISH PATH x_start y_start x_end y_end x_start y_start x_end y_end positive integer numbers Query syntax XISH PATH Query respo...

Page 973: ...d ISHU commands are issued Otherwise the command will take effect immediately Command syntax XISH SRCN path filename path filename The directory path and valid MS DOS filename 8 characters minus any extension of the image or bitmap file to be used for image shifting If the file to be used is in the default path then path may be omitted Query syntax XISH SRCN Query response path filename Example XI...

Page 974: ...t not applied to the hardware until the ISHE and ISHU commands are issued Otherwise the command will take effect immediately Command syntax XISH TINC increment increment positive integer number 0 999 Query syntax XISH TINC Query response Current time shift increment value Example 1 XISH TINC 2 Sets the time shift increment to 2 Example 2 XISH TINC Queries for current time shift increment 2 Related...

Page 975: ...d point to the start point If an imageshift editing session is in progress the ISHB command was issued the trace type will be changed but not applied to the hardware until the ISHE and ISHU commands are issued Otherwise the command will take effect immediately Command syntax XISH TTYP type type 1 Repeat 2 Reverse Query syntax XISH TTYP Query response 1 or 2 Example 1 XISH TTYP 1 Sets the trace typ...

Page 976: ...d the value will be changed but not applied to the hardware until the ISHE and ISHU commands are issued Otherwise the command will take effect immediately Command syntax XISH VINC increment increment positive integer number Query syntax XISH VINC Query response Current vertical shifting increment value Example 1 XISH VINC 4 Sets the vertical shifting increment to 4 Example 2 XISH HINC Queries for ...

Page 977: ...th Class Format parameter setting active video Description Establishes the last horizontal pixel of a vertical pillar box bar area at the left side of the image Command syntax XLBW pixel_number pixel_number 0 to 65535 in decimal Related commands XBBH XRBW XTBH Example XLBW 64 FMTU ...

Page 978: ... version length MB MF FR type 5 version 1 length bytes 10 The remaining are MPEG Infoframe data parameters mpgparameter as specified in EIA CEA 861 B standard Section 6 4 VERS same as Version Infoframe version MB MPEG bit rate Enter rate in Hertz Hz MF MPEG frame see EIA CEA 861 B standard Table 26 for settings FR Field repeat see EIA CEA 861 B standard Table 26 for settings Query syntax XMPG mpgp...

Page 979: ...o Test Instrument User Guide Rev A 35 601 Example The following example sets the data rate of the MPEG transmission in the MPEG InfoFrame data to 44 1kHz XMPG MB 44100 IFGU Related commands IFTR IFAX RPTU IFGU ...

Page 980: ...ormat parameter setting active video Description Establishes the first horizontal pixel of a vertical pillar bar area at the right side of the image Command syntax XRBW pixel_number pixel_number 0 to 65535 in decimal Related commands XISH TTYP XTBH XBBH Example XRBW 961 FMTU ...

Page 981: ...sed to scale horizontal size and position parameters in the primitives of a custom image in the image editor buffer The XRES query returns the current XRES setting Command syntax XRES width width integer 16 to 65 536 Query syntax XRES Query response width Example XRES 1600 Set horizontal scaling factor to 1600 YRES 900 Set vertical scaling factor to 900 ...

Page 982: ... length bytes 25 The remaining are Source Product Description Infoframe data parameters spdparameter as specified in EIA CEA 861 B standard Section 6 2 VERS same as Version Infoframe version VNS Vendor name string PDS Product description string SDI Source device information see EIA CEA 861 B standard Table 17 for settings Query syntax XSPD spdparameter Query response value Example The following ex...

Page 983: ...escription InfoFrame with these properties Vendor name is QDI Product description is HDMI Analyzer Source device is Digital STB 1 XSPD 3 1 25 QDI HDMI Analyzer 1 Example 3 The following example reports the current setting for the Product Description parameter in the Source Product Description Infoframe XSPD PDS ...

Page 984: ...Border Height Class Parameters Video Signal Description Establishes the last line of a horizontal letterbox bar area at the top of the image Command syntax XTBW line_number line_number 0 to 65535 Related commands XISH TTYP XRBW XBBH Example XTBH 15 FMTU ...

Page 985: ...nd controls both the analog and digital video outputs Command syntax XVSG red_mode green_mode blue_mode red_mode green_mode blue_mode 0 OFF 1 ON Other required commands The FMTU command instructs the generator to use the new setting The ALLU command updates hardware to the new setting and redraws the test image Example XVSG 1 1 1 Enable all color channels FMTU Update hardware to current buffer con...

Page 986: ... SVIDEO 6 CVBS 7 SDI HD SDI 9 VGA 10 DisplayPort Query syntax XVSI or XVSI OUT Query response interface Other required commands The ALLU command updates hardware to the new setting and redraws the test image Example 1 XVSI 1 Enable DVI for analog output ALLU Update hardware to current buffer contents XVSI 3 Enable HDMI interface for DVI output ALLU Update hardware to current buffer contents XVSI O...

Page 987: ...882 Video Test Instrument User Guide Rev A 35 609 Example 2 XVSI Queries for the currently enabled video signal interface output 4 HDMI H output is currently enabled Related commands XVSI IN ...

Page 988: ...o 1600 YRES 900 Set vertical scaling factor to 900 Example dirn mydir create a directory named mymap dirb begin directory context nami 1 smpte133 insert the name smpte133 at index 1 nami 2 flat insert the name flat at index 2 nami 3 raster insert the name raster at index 3 dire end directory context dirs save map named mymap dirl mydir load directory mydir into edit buffer dirb begin directory con...

Page 989: ...882 Video Test Instrument User Guide Rev A 35 551 B Image Reference Topics in this appendix Standard image descriptions ...

Page 990: ...552 Appendix B Image Reference Standard image descriptions 3DCRTK Description Test image for testing 3D crosstalk ...

Page 991: ...882 Video Test Instrument User Guide Rev A 35 553 3DCUBES Description Test image for testing 3D motion ...

Page 992: ...ed per customer specifications Consists of two sets of color bars and five blocks of characters on a white crosshatch with a black background Acer2 Description Special test image developed per customer specifications Consists of colorbars lines of characters and a green border ...

Page 993: ...ellow Acer3 magenta Acer4 cyan Acer5 or white Acer6 crosshatch on a black background The Acer3 image is shown below Acer7 and Acer8 Description Special test image developed per customer specifications In the primary version five blocks of either white Acer7 or H Acer8 characters on a black background are displayed A secondary version displays black characters on a white background The Acer7 image ...

Page 994: ...yed with two rows of color bars at the bottom A secondary version displays a black field with the two rows of color bars at the bottom AFDtest Description Used to test HDMI content mapping using different EIA CEA 861 B formats There are 10 different versions of this image For more information see Testing with Active Format Description AFD 882 only on page 313 ...

Page 995: ...the center fills the active video area A secondary version displays a black background with a small white pixel in the center AnsiLght Description The primary version displays a white background with a small black pixel in the center fills the active video area A secondary version displays a black background with a small white pixel in the center ...

Page 996: ... shows reverse black characters on white background Audio LR AudioLRf AudioRAT Audio_L Audio_Lf Audio_R Audio_Rf Description Used to configure HDMI audio output signal The AudioLR is shown below For more information see Testing HDMI audio on page 295 BarBlack Description Special test image developed per customer specifications ...

Page 997: ...ony_R Description In the primary version the screen is filled with blue BLU and B green GRN and G red R or white WHT MEME1111 MEMEPlus and MEMESony EM character blocks on a black background Only the white character has a secondary version It is drawn with black characters on a white background A bitmap of a single character block is shown here The BLU_EM image is shown below Test Focus ...

Page 998: ...n the screen is filled with blue BLU and B green GRN and G red R or white WHT and Sony EM character blocks on a black background Only the white character has a secondary version It is drawn with black characters on a white background A bitmap of a single character block is shown here The BLU_EM image is shown below Test Focus Purpose This pattern is specified by one or more display manufacturers f...

Page 999: ...he purity adjustment s should be performed before doing any brightness or color tests In some cases purity adjustments involve loosening and repositioning the yoke in which case purity should be adjusted prior to doing any geometry tests Method The methods used for adjusting purity on a color monitor depend on the type of monitor and CRT for example Delta In Line or Single Gun In most cases the fi...

Page 1000: ...mask to heat This internal heating may be enough to cause the shadow mask to warp and give bad purity Method Set the purity image to white and allow the monitor to run for a few minutes Any mask warping shows up as a change in purity You can use a color meter to measure the change The BriteBox pattern may also be useful for measuring shadow mask warping Bosch Description Special test image develop...

Page 1001: ...om information on the current format appears below and to the left of the box This shows the number of active pixels and lines as well as the horizontal and vertical scan rates A forward slash I after the number of active lines indicates the format is interlaced Note The box will be the correct size only if the correct physical active video size is set in the format The Box_50mm image is shown bel...

Page 1002: ...ox Description The primary version has a single white box in the center of active video The box size is controlled by the MSIZ system parameter The secondary version adds four boxes in the corners of active video Test Brightness control adjustment Purpose The wrong brightness setting may cause other tests such as Contrast Focus and Beam Size to be invalid An accurate brightness setting helps give ...

Page 1003: ... 7 5 IRE levels This is followed by six bursts of sine waves Each burst is at a different frequency forming vertical lines of various widths The frequencies going from left to right are 0 5 1 2 3 3 58 and 4 43 MHz Test Frequency response Method When viewed on a TV screen the peak intensities of all of the bursts should match the white reference level The darkest portions between the peaks should m...

Page 1004: ...of the peaks A typical amplitude waveform for a good system is shown at the bottom of the next page BurstTCE Description Fills screen with a 0 5 MHz frequency This can be increased in 0 5 MHz increments by pressing the Contents key and then the Options key You then enable More and use the increment keys ...

Page 1005: ...e boxes also are inverted Test Verify monitor resolution Purpose The resolution of your monitor should meet or exceed the design specifications Method First adjust the brightness contrast and focus to their correct settings You should be able to see individual and distinct pixels in each of the boxes Failure to see distinct pixels may indicate you have a defective video amplifier focus correction ...

Page 1006: ...has five white boxes reverse Test Contrast ratio Purpose The pattern is based on a proposed ANSI method of measuring the contrast ratio of video projection systems Method Using a light meter probe measure and record the light level reading in foot lamberts in the center of each of the black and white boxes The contrast ratio is expressed as the average of all of the white readings divided by the a...

Page 1007: ...ines on white background Check_11 Description In the primary version the active video area is filled with alternating black and white pixels that form a very fine checkerboard as shown below The secondary version inverts the colors in the image The inverted image looks almost the same as the non inverted version Test Verify monitor resolution ...

Page 1008: ...eas appear on a mask type color picture tube you may have a problem with convergence or you may be exceeding the resolution of the picture tube CirclesL Description Special test image developed per customer specifications In the primary version shown below the image consists of five large white circles on a black background The circles are positioned in the center and in the corners of the active ...

Page 1009: ...eo area and centered on each edge of the active video area The secondary version inverts the image to black circles on a white background Purpose This pattern is specified by some monitor manufacturers for checking and adjusting video scan size linearity and over scanning ColorBar Description The primary version shown below has 16 full height vertical color bars The secondary version splits the fi...

Page 1010: ...at none of the video channels are bad or connected incorrectly Method Compare the sequence of color bars with the table Missing bars may indicate a dead or unconnected channel The transition between the bars should be sharp and distinct Each bar should also be uniform in color and intensity across its entire width Non uniformity may indicate problems with the response of the video amplifiers If al...

Page 1011: ...g of one small multicolored cube orbiting around a larger multicolored cube Each cube also is spinning on its own axis The default text string is Quantum Data which can be changed using commands The primary version shown below has a black background and a thick green border The secondary version uses a white background Purpose Can be used for show demonstrations with your own text ...

Page 1012: ...d per customer specifications Dot1606 Dot1610 Dot1612 Dot1615 Dot1812 Dot1815 Dot2016 Description The primary version has white pixel dots on a black background The secondary version has black pixel dots on a white background The primary version of the Dot2016 image is shown below ...

Page 1013: ...lculates the ratio and then finds the closest match from the following table The primary version has white pixel dots on a black background A secondary version has black pixel dots on a white background The primary version of the Dot_24 image is shown below Purpose To accurately produce an image on a color monitor the three electron beams in the CRT must meet converge at the same location at the s...

Page 1014: ...re depends on the monitor under test Test Focus adjustments Purpose An out of focus monitor displays fuzzy pixels which in turn result in poorly formed and hard to read characters Method On monitors with a single static focus adjustment adjust the control for the best average focus over the entire screen The focus at certain locations should be within specified limits Some monitors have a static a...

Page 1015: ...150 and 1500 mVp p Method To adjust the swing in 6 mV increments press the Contents key and then the Options key You then enable More and use the increment keys to proceed through the subimages Dyna Description This image has multiple versions that display different sizes of the same pattern Version 0 is shown below ...

Page 1016: ...eference EdidData Description Displays EDID from the display connected with the generator For more information see page 9 Elbit Description Special test image developed per customer specifications This image has 19 versions ...

Page 1017: ...raw white characters on a black background The secondary versions draw black characters on a white background The EMITest1 image is shown below The EMITest2 image is the same as EMITest1 but with the bottom row of characters constantly drawn left to right and then cleared The EMITest3 image is the same as EMITest1 but with a larger version of the H character The EMITest4 image is the same as EMITe...

Page 1018: ...580 Appendix B Image Reference The EMITest5 image is shown below ...

Page 1019: ... Flat_03 Flat_04 Flat_05 Flat_06 Flat_07 Flat_08 Flat_09 Flat_10 Flat_11 Flat_12 Flat_13 Flat_14 Flat_15 Flat_16 Description The entire active video area is filled with a shade of gray Each image displays a different shade of gray The FlatGray image is shown below Flat_B Flat_G Flat_R Description The screen is filled with blue B green G or red R The Flat_B image is shown below ...

Page 1020: ...ce Focus20 Description Primary version shown below The secondary version has black characters on a white background FocusC14 Description Primary version shown below The secondary version has black characters on a white background ...

Page 1021: ...Rev A 35 583 FocusCCx Description Primary version shown below The secondary version has black characters on a white background FocusEM Description Primary version shown below The secondary version has black characters on a white background ...

Page 1022: ... Appendix B Image Reference FocusEMP Description Primary version shown below The secondary version has black characters on a white background FocusM00 FocusM15 Description The FocusM00 image is shown below ...

Page 1023: ...elow Test Focus adjustments Purpose An out of focus monitor displays fuzzy graphic images and poorly formed hard to read text characters Method On monitors with a single static focus adjustment adjust the control for the best average focus over the entire screen The focus at certain locations of the screen should be within specified limits Some monitors have a static and one or more dynamic focus ...

Page 1024: ...focus monitor displays fuzzy graphic images and poorly formed hard to read text characters Method On monitors with a single static focus adjustment adjust the control for the best average focus over the entire screen The focus at certain locations of the screen should be within specified limits Some monitors have a static and one or more dynamic focus controls The sequence for adjusting them and t...

Page 1025: ...n out of focus monitor displays fuzzy graphic images and poorly formed hard to read text characters Method On monitors with a single static focus adjustment adjust the control for the best average focus over the entire screen The focus at certain locations of the screen should be within specified limits Some monitors have a static and one or more dynamic focus controls The sequence for adjusting t...

Page 1026: ...racters on a black background The secondary version is drawn with black characters on a white background Focus_Oo Description In the primary version shown below the screen is filled with white Oo characters on a black background The secondary version is drawn with black characters on a white background Test Focus adjustments ...

Page 1027: ...en should be within specified limits Some monitors have a static and one or more dynamic focus controls The sequence for adjusting them and the areas of the screen that they affect depend on the monitor under test Format Description A listing of the data contained in any format The primary image lists the settings of the format driving the display The secondary image can be used to list the conten...

Page 1028: ...age Reference Geom_1 Geom_5 Description The primary version of the Geom_1 image is shown below Secondary version is drawn with black lines on a white background Gray25 Gray40 Description The Gray25 image is shown below ...

Page 1029: ...Purpose To verify that a color monitor accurately reproduces colors at all intensities Method Perform the Brightness Control Adjustment and Brightness Uniformity tests first Changes in brightness from bar to bar should be uniform All of the bars should appear as an untinted gray at all levels Test Video gain linearity monochrome monitors Purpose To check the video linearity grayscale modulation Me...

Page 1030: ...rence GrayL1 GrayL3 Description The GrayL1 image is shown below Grays5 Grays9 Grays11 Grays16 Grays32 Grays64 Description These images have the designated number of full height vertical graybars The Grays11 image is shown below ...

Page 1031: ... and white stripes The stripes are drawn at different resolutions Each of the stripes is four 4 pixels wide in the Grill_44 image and three 3 pixels wide in the Grill_33 image Each of the stripes is two 2 pixels wide in the Grill_22 image and one 1 pixel wide in the Grill_11 image The primary versions draw vertical stripes The secondary versions draw horizontal stripes The primary version of the G...

Page 1032: ...all areas of the display at all four resolutions Failure to see distinct lines at the highest resolution Grill_11 may indicate you have a defective video amplifier or picture tube Note If multi colored lines appear on a mask type color picture tube you may have a problem with convergence or you may be exceeding the resolution of the picture tube HalfArea Description Primary version shown below Sec...

Page 1033: ...882 Video Test Instrument User Guide Rev A 35 595 HalfClk Description Hat1606 Hat1610 Hat1612 Hat1615 Description Primary version of Hat1606 is shown below Secondary version is inversed ...

Page 1034: ...rence Hat1606A Hat1610A Hat1612A Hat1615A Description Primary version of Hat1606A is shown below Secondary version is inversed Hat1812 Hat1815 Description Primary version of Hat1812 is shown below Secondary version is inversed ...

Page 1035: ...nstrument User Guide Rev A 35 597 Hat1812A Hat1815A Description Primary version of Hat1812A is shown below Secondary version is inversed Hat2016 Description Primary version is shown below Secondary version is inversed ...

Page 1036: ...he currently loaded format The number in the image s name refers to the number of boxes that are formed along the minor axis for most aspect ratios The generator calculates the ratio and then finds the closest match from the table on the next page Version names indicate the drawing method as follows Versions ending in i draw from the inside center out Any partial boxes are placed around the perime...

Page 1037: ...ay This method involves turning on all three guns and adjusting the various magnets on the convergence assembly to produce all white dots in the center of the display The convergence assembly is located on the neck of the CRT Different monitors and CRT types may each require their own magnet adjustment sequence After the center of the display is properly converged the outer areas are adjusted by u...

Page 1038: ...6 Hatch_20 Description The primary version of the Hatch_16 image is shown below The secondary versions draw black lines on a white background Hatch20 Description Primary version The secondary version draws black lines on a white background ...

Page 1039: ... manufacturers test procedures The primary version consists of white crosshatch and circles on a black background The secondary version inverts the image to black lines on a white background The primary version of the Hatch4x3 image is shown below Purpose This is a general purpose test image that can be used to check and adjust video scan linearity and geometry and color convergence ...

Page 1040: ...white background Purpose Method This is a general purpose test image that can be used to check and adjust video scan linearity and geometry and color convergence The large white rectangle also allows for checking a display s high voltage regulation This is done by observing the vertical lines at the left and right edges of the image They should be fairly straight and not pull in the area of the wh...

Page 1041: ...t User Guide Rev A 35 603 Hitachi1 Description Special test image developed per customer specifications The image consists of a 2x2 cluster of Microsoft Windows screen simulations using Japanese characters HSVnRGB Description ...

Page 1042: ...604 Appendix B Image Reference Imex1 Description InFocus1 Description Special test image developed per customer specifications ...

Page 1043: ...test image developed per customer specifications KanjiKAN Description In the primary version shown below the screen is filled with white Japanese Kan characters on a black background The secondary version is drawn with black characters on a white background Test Focus adjustments ...

Page 1044: ...veloped per customer specifications Each image has three versions The primary version of the LGLCDTVB image is shown below LGRamp Description Special test image developed per customer specifications The image provides a grayscale of two objects The secondary version of the LGRamp image is shown below ...

Page 1045: ...very fifth mark is slightly longer The color of the pattern can be changed with the individual video output controls Test Linearity adjustment Purpose To present an undistorted display the horizontal and vertical sweeps of the electron beam across the face of the CRT should be at uniform speeds Any non uniformity in the sweep causes portions of an image to stretch while other portions are compress...

Page 1046: ...e format has an even number of active lines per frame A smaller box is added at the center of the image The box is one half the height and two fifths the width of one of the crosshatch boxes Current format data is shown in the lower left quadrant of the image It shows the number of active pixels H and lines V as well as the vertical and horizontal scan rates The primary version shown below consist...

Page 1047: ...een HDMI video and audio The image enables you to select between a range of intervals You can access the subimages to control the interval of each video audio synchronization event through the Content Options menu and incrementing with the keys There are 255 distinct settings different intervals available When you first select the Lipsync image the interval is set at 0 66733 sec per audio event sh...

Page 1048: ...rsion the screen is filled with blue BLU and B green GRN and G red R or white WHT and Sony EM character blocks on a black background Only the white character has a secondary version It is drawn with black characters on a white background A bitmap of a single character block is shown here The BLU_EM image is shown below ...

Page 1049: ...iption The MoireX and MoireY images consist of black lines on a white background across the active video area MoireX provides vertical lines MoireY provides horizontal lines The MoireX image is shown below The primary version of the MoireX33 and MoireY33 images provide a black frame around the black lines The secondary version draws a white frame around black lines The primary version of the Moire...

Page 1050: ...Monoscop Description MSony7 MSony8 Description Special test image developed per customer specifications Primary version of the MSony7 image is shown below The secondary version draws white boxes and characters with a black background ...

Page 1051: ...r that rotates shifts the bars to the right on an incremental basis The color bars are shifted to the right at 3 second intervals After pressing the Contents key and then the Options key you then enable More and use the increment keys to proceed through the subimages to adjust the interval between 3 10 30 and 60 seconds ...

Page 1052: ...ite corners A full size cross is centered in the image The horizontal line of the cross is one 1 pixel thick for formats with an odd number of active lines and two 2 pixels thick for formats with an even number of active lines The vertical line of the cross is one 1 pixel thick for formats with an odd number of active pixels per line and two 2 pixels thick for formats with an even number of active...

Page 1053: ... near to where the cross lines meet the border lines The markers appear at both sides of the cross lines The distance between the marker lines and the cross lines is the greater of either two 2 pixels or one 1 millimeter In the Outline2 version the two diagonal lines are removed and short marker lines are added to the corners and where cross lines meet and end ...

Page 1054: ...for the monitor If it is out of specification the yoke must be adjusted Loosen the hardware that clamps the yoke to the neck of the CRT and rotate the yoke until the line is horizontal Tighten the yoke clamp hardware Test Yoke winding orthogonality check Purpose The horizontal and vertical deflection coils on the yoke should have their axes cross at exactly 90 degrees Improper orientation of the w...

Page 1055: ...ed value Test Parallelogram distortion check Purpose Parallelogram distortion is very difficult to correct with magnets because the correction often causes barrel distortion Therefore you should decide early whether your monitor meets this specification The problem usually can be traced to the improper winding of the yoke coils If the problem is not too severe it may be corrected by adding or adju...

Page 1056: ...more corners may be pulled towards the center of the raster causing it to look like a barrel Uncorrected raster distortion carries over as distortion of the displayed image Method A slot gauge may be used to determine if the amount of pincushion or barrel distortion is within limits A basic slot gauge may consist of a piece of opaque film with at least two 2 transparent slots in it One slot is use...

Page 1057: ...t Instrument User Guide Rev A 35 619 P1 Description This image is a 6x6 white crosshatch without a border on a black background P2 Description This image is a 4x4 white crosshatch with a border on a black background ...

Page 1058: ...e Reference P3 Description This image is a 4x4 white crosshatch with a border and a small centered white patch on a black background P4 Description This image is an 8x8 white crosshatch with a border on a black background ...

Page 1059: ... User Guide Rev A 35 621 P5 Description This image is an 8x8 white crosshatch with a border and a small centered white patch on a black background P6 Description 16x12 pixel white crosshatch with a border on a black background ...

Page 1060: ...ix B Image Reference P6_Sony Description 6x12 pixel white crosshatch with a border on a black background P7 Description 16x12 white crosshatch with a border and a small centered white patch on a black background ...

Page 1061: ... Rev A 35 623 P8 Description This image is an all black active video area The secondary version draws an all white video area P9 Description This image is an all white active video area The secondary version draws an all black video area ...

Page 1062: ...se the increment keys to proceed through the subimages to select up to 4 different versions of this image PacketRx Description Displays the InfoFrame data received by HDMI receiver For more information see Testing HDMI transmit device InfoFrame capability on page 286 PacketTx Description Displays the InfoFrame data transmitted from the HDMI transmitter For more information see Viewing InfoFrame co...

Page 1063: ...scription Special test image developed per customer specifications Persist Description In the primary version 15 small white boxes move back and forth between diagonal guide lines The lines form 15 side by side tracks The size of each box is scaled to the light meter box size set by the MSIZ system parameter The image does the following ...

Page 1064: ...ning counter appears in the upper left corner of the image The number shown is the number of vertical frame refreshes that have occurred since the generator was first powered up The secondary version draws a black image on a white background An example of the primary version of the Persist image is shown below Test Phosphor persistence Purpose The phosphors on the face of most CRTs continue to glo...

Page 1065: ...table for viewing animated images PgBar64H PgBar64V Description Special test image developed per customer specifications The PgBar64H image is shown below PgCB PgCG PgCR PgCW PgCWrgb Description Special test image developed per customer specifications Primary version of PgCB is shown below The secondary versions draw all white over the last bar ...

Page 1066: ...al test image developed per customer specifications PixelRep Description Used to test HDMI pixel repetition There are 10 different versions of this image to support the different pixel repetition settings For more information see Testing HDMI video pixel repetition 882 only on page 291 ...

Page 1067: ...lity The PRN_5 image introduces 5 pixel errors per color component while the PRN_9 image introduces 9 pixel errors per color component The PRN_5 image is shown below PulseBar Description This image is intended for TV formats but can be displayed with any format up to 100 MHz The image looks like two vertical lines followed by a wide vertical bar on a display s screen The first line is a sine squar...

Page 1068: ...nSec for PAL and 125 nSec for NTSC formats The wide bar is white with sine squared edges Test Video system testing This multi purpose pattern can be used with other instruments to check television K factors The modulated pulse can be used to check chrominance to luminance delay and gain The narrow white line can be used to measure short term linear distortion K2T ...

Page 1069: ...uld be used if the display s specifications call for the brightness to be set with one fourth of the screen lit Method Place your light meter probe within the center box and adjust the monitor s brightness control to obtain the required light meter reading Notes The color of the center box is a special color named foreground The FRGB command can be used to change the default color of foreground to...

Page 1070: ...en There are 4 versions of this image one for each edge of the display When selected this image is displayed After pressing the Contents key and then the Options key You then enable More and use the increment keys to proceed through the subimages to change the image starting point to left right top or bottom RampX Description This image provides a ramp image that continuously sweeps moves to the r...

Page 1071: ...increment keys to adjust the speed Ramp_B Ramp_G and Ramp_R Description The active video area goes from full black 7 5 IRE at the left edge of the screen to full blue _B green _G or red _R at the right edge The Ramp_B image is shown below Test Video gain linearity Method When viewed on a TV screen the full range of grays should be visible There should be no color shifts visible ...

Page 1072: ...ol until the raster is just visible Adjust the raster s position and size using the size and raster centering controls The raster centering adjustment for many monochrome monitors consists of moving magnetic rings on the deflection yoke Regulate Description The image cycles between two 2 patterns In the primary version the first pattern is a white outline that defines the edges of displayed video ...

Page 1073: ...f of the image The change in border size between the two images should be within the specification limits of the monitor Samsung1 Samsung2 Description Special test images developed per customer specifications The image consists of three small simulations of Microsoft Windows screens on a blue background Samsung1 or black background Samsung2 A border and centered cross are formed with repeating ...

Page 1074: ...eating characters are also used to form a rectangular patch in the upper left hand corner and a circular area in the center of the image The secondary version of Samsung2 draws a white background Samsung3 Description Special test image developed per customer specifications ...

Page 1075: ...A 35 637 Samsung4 Description Special test image developed per customer specifications Samsung5 Description Special test image developed per customer specifications Samsung6 Description Special test image developed per customer specifications ...

Page 1076: ...ungB Description Special test image developed per customer specifications SamsungT Description Special test image developed per customer specifications There are four versions of this image When selected the following image is displayed ...

Page 1077: ...image 2 Establish a terminal session with the generator see page 30 3 Enter the following commands ISUB 1 IVER 1 IMGU DELX 10 IMGU DELX 20 IMGU SMPTE133 Description This image is based on a recommended practice RP 133 test pattern designed by the Society of Motion Picture and Television Engineers SMPTE The original application was used in testing and evaluating medical imaging monochrome displays ...

Page 1078: ...es thick Small crosses indicate the intersection of the horizontal and vertical lines when they are covered by other parts of the image All parts of the crosshatch are normally drawn using a 70 intensity level A 75 level is used in the secondary version Resolution patch The patch is made up of six 6 smaller boxes that are each about 6 25 of the height of the display The boxes are made of alternati...

Page 1079: ...he intensity level is the same as that of the crosshatch lines Circle A large circle is centered in the image It touches the top and bottom of the active video area when the aspect ratio is wider than it is high landscape type display The circle touches the left and right sides of active video when the aspect ratio is taller than it is wide portrait type display The intensity level is the same as ...

Page 1080: ...and gamma Method The individual grayscale boxes all should be at their indicated levels A small aperture photometer is usually required to get accurate and repeatable readings Test Contrast and brightness check Method On a display with properly adjusted brightness and contrast controls both the 5 and 95 contrast boxes should be clearly visible inside their larger surrounding 0 and 100 boxes Test V...

Page 1081: ...essors and color decoders The image is available on all models as a component RGB signal Some of the image s elements have some differences from the original SMPTE specification These differences are given in descriptions of the individual elements The upper 67 of the image consists of a series of color bars These bars match the order of the bars in the SMPTE and EIA patterns They are similar to t...

Page 1082: ...ormance of a video system The upper color bars as they would appear on a waveform analyzer are shown on a previous page Test Color decoder performance Purpose The image can used with a TV vectorscope to check for proper operation of a video color decoder Vectorscope signatures of the upper and lower portions of the image using NTSC encoding can be found on the previous page Method The vectorscope ...

Page 1083: ...Test Visual chroma phase adjustment Method In order to perform this test you must have a way of turning off the red and green guns in the monitor under test Turning off the red and green video components of the 801GX generator s video output will not work for this test This test uses the upper and central color bars Switch off the red and green guns on the monitor This will produce four blue bars ...

Page 1084: ...646 Appendix B Image Reference Sony6 Description Special test image developed per customer specifications Sony6WLC Description Special test image developed per customer specifications ...

Page 1085: ...per left corner of the image indicates the Microsoft name for the color that is currently being displayed for example sRGB Gray5 Note that some of the names that appear conflict with generator color names for example sRGB Gray5 is not the same as the generator color Gray5 After pressing the Contents key and then the Options key You then enable More and use the increment keys to select up to 38 dif...

Page 1086: ...also can be used with an oscilloscope or TV waveform analyzer to check the gain linearity and gamma correction of a video system Strokes0 Strokes1 Description This image may cited by some display manufacturers test procedures The Strokes0 version consists of multiple groups of separated red green and blue horizontal lines drawn on a black background The Strokes1 version consists of multiple groups...

Page 1087: ...T Text_16 Description In the primary versions the screen is filled with random paragraphs of white text on a black background The amount of text is determined by the size of the font used and the horizontal and vertical resolution of the format The Text_16 image uses a larger font than the Text_9 image The secondary versions use black text on a white background The primary version of the Text_9 im...

Page 1088: ... of text to be displayed you can use this image to simulate actual user conditions Method Select a suitable font size and text color Adjust your monitor s brightness and contrast controls to obtain the best image The characters in all areas of the display should be well formed and in focus TAARamp Description The TAARamp pattern is shown below ...

Page 1089: ...dary image is depicted below The top half of the image has three small boxes red green blue with the upper left half at 92 7 luminence and the upper right half at 50 luminence There is a series of 11 small boxes of increasing luminence left to right with the luminence identified in text The lower left quarter of the image is 28 5 luminence and the lower right is magenta at 44 3 IRE ...

Page 1090: ...nly Description The image consists of seven vertical bars that fill the entire active video area The color and order of the bars is shown in the figure below The TVBar100 image has a peak video level of 100 IRE and the TVBar_75 image has a peak video level of 75 IRE The TVBar100 image is shown below Test Color video performance ...

Page 1091: ...ect ratio The vertical lines are made using sine squared 2 T pulses T 125 nSec for NTSC and T 100 nSec for PAL Test Convergence adjustment Purpose To accurately produce an image on a color monitor the three electron beams in the CRT must meet converge at the same location at the same time Lines displayed on a mis converged monitor will appear as several multi colored lines and the transitions betw...

Page 1092: ...n beam across the face of the CRT should be at uniform speeds Any non uniformity in the sweep will cause portions of an image to be stretched while other portions will be compressed Non linearity in a monitor can show up in several ways It may be present across the entire screen a large portion of the screen or it may be localized in a very small area Method Adjust the display s linearity controls...

Page 1093: ... Rev A 35 655 TVoutLin Description Equivalent to Outline1 image but it uses anti aliasing for vertical bars and double horizontal lines which reduces flickering TVSplBar Description Special test image developed per customer specifications ...

Page 1094: ...656 Appendix B Image Reference ...

Page 1095: ...882 Video Test Instrument User Guide Rev A 35 657 C Error Messages Topics in this appendix Error code descriptions ...

Page 1096: ...ed an invalid argument value for the executed command 0006 Invalid file The generator encountered an invalid file error condition 0007 Invalid file type The generator encountered an invalid file type error condition 0008 Invalid file data The generator encountered an invalid file data error condition 0099 Internal error The generator encountered an internal error condition 2000 2999 Format errors ...

Page 1097: ...alue specified by the NPPP number of pixels per pixel to set the repetition factor for active lines is invalid 2062 Invalid pixel and clock values The value specified by the NCPP number of clocks per pixel to set the number of clocks per pixel is invalid 2063 Invalid embedded aspect ratio The value specified by the EXAR extended aspect ratio parameter is invalid 2064 HDMI 5V pin is bad The 5V pin ...

Page 1098: ...on too high The target pixel clock rate selected for justification of the video format exceeds the generator hardware configuration 2074 Pixel depth not supported The video format s pixel depth is not supported by the generator hardware configuration 2075 Analog composite sync type not supported The video format s analog video composite sync type selection is not supported by the generator hardwar...

Page 1099: ...or this specific hardware This error may be the result of an older FPGA or hardware 2085 Invalid Sampling Mode The value specified for digital video sampling mode DVSM is not valid and is inconsistent with the setting of digital video signal type DVST 2086 Invalid Video ID Code The value specified for the CEA 861 Video Identification Code VIC with the DVIC parameter is invalid 2087 Invalid Number ...

Page 1100: ... cycles in the horizontal sync pulse delay must be evenly divisible by 2 for the given video format type and generator hardware configuration 2096 Horizontal resolution not a multiple of 4 The generator hardware configuration does not support a video format with a number of active pixels per horizontal scan line that is not evenly divisible by 4 Mostly applies to video formats using serial digital...

Page 1101: ...litude SAMP is out of range 2119 Send CP info error is not zero The CP infoframe register on the transmitter is not set to zero and the infoframe is not transmitted This typically means that there is a hardware problem in the HDMI board 2120 Send AVI info error is not zero The AVI infoframe register on the transmitter is not set to zero and the infoframe is not transmitted This typically means tha...

Page 1102: ...l The video format s horizontal blanking period expressed in microseconds and or number of pixel clock cycles is not supported by the generator hardware configuration 2141 Horizontal blanking too small Same as Error number 2140 Found in some firmware releases for different generator hardware configurations 2150 Horizontal blanking too small Same as Error number 2140 Found in some firmware releases...

Page 1103: ...ent video and HDTV sync type selections 2200 Horizontal pulse width too large The generator hardware configuration does not support a horizontal sync pulse width that is greater than the horizontal blanking period 2201 Horizontal pulse delay not even The number of pixel clock cycles in the horizontal sync pulse delay must be evenly divisible by 2 at the current pixel clock rate for the video forma...

Page 1104: ...number supported by the generator hardware configuration 2270 Vertical total is even The generator hardware configuration does not support interlaced scan video formats having an even total active blanked number of horizontal scan lines per frame 2280 Vertical total too large The total active blanked number of horizontal scan lines per frame exceeds the maximum limit for the generator hardware con...

Page 1105: ...ormat is greater than the maximum supported by the generator hardware configuration 2391 Incompatible analog composite sync digital composite sync types The generator hardware configuration does not support the video format outputting both analog composite sync and digital composite sync type selections at the same time 2392 Incompatible analog composite sync digital separate sync types The genera...

Page 1106: ...tting 2400 Analog composite sync type and digital separate sync type incompatible The generator hardware configuration does not support analog composite sync and digital separate sync being active at he same time for the given analog composite sync type parameter value ASCT setting and digital separate sync type parameter value DSST setting 2401 Invalid horizontal sync pulse delay The generator ha...

Page 1107: ...support interlaced video formats having a vertical sync pulse period greater that the individual blanking periods between the fields 2465 Pixel clock pulse gate 1 and pixel depth 8 The generator hardware configuration does not support outputting a pixel clock output when the video format s pixel depth is eight bits per pixel 2466 Pixel clock pulse gate 1 not allowed The generator hardware configur...

Page 1108: ...valid horizontal physical size The video format s horizontal physical size value can not be negative 2705 Invalid physical size units The current firmware does not support the type number used for the video format s units of measure for physical size USIZ setting 2706 Invalid vertical physical size The video format s vertical physical size value can not be negative 2714 Pedestal swing out of range...

Page 1109: ...roducing NTSC TV video outputs that do not use a blanking pedestal AVPG setting of 0 as required by the NTSC specifications 2722 Blanking pedestal out of range for NTSC TV signal The generator hardware configuration does not support producing NTSC TV video outputs that do not use a nominal blanking pedestal level AVPS setting of 7 5 IRE as required by the NTSC specifications 2741 Digital video sig...

Page 1110: ...valid 2800 Pseudo random noise seed value exceeds limit The seed value for the pseudo random noise analysis exceeds its maximum value 2801 Pseudo random noise sequence exceeds limit The length of the pseudo random noise sequence exeeds maximum value 2802 Pseudo random noise type is not supported The pseudo random noise type is not supported 2803 No signal input to analyzer or TMDS error There is n...

Page 1111: ...s not allow a new custom image editing session to be started while the current custom image editing session is still running 3006 Nothing to save An attempt was made to save the contents of a custom image editing buffer when there was no open custom image editing session to save 3007 Overwrite ROM Image A user defined test image can not be saved using the same name as that of a built in test image...

Page 1112: ... found A test image of a given name could not be found as either a built in test image in the firmware or as a user defined custom image 3050 Grayscale video DAC setting out of range One or more internal calculations have resulted in an analog video DAC input grayscale setting below zero or greater than 100 video level 4000 4999 Test sequence errors 4000 Invalid format name The test sequence conta...

Page 1113: ... location that is less than zero 0 or greater than the highest index number in use 4020 No font present at given index Attempt to access a font at a valid index but the specified index is empty because of a previous delete 4030 Invalid font location Can not install a font that has not first been transferred to memory 4040 Sequence is running A sequence editing session can not be started while a se...

Page 1114: ...e to save the contents of a directory editing buffer when there was no open directory editing session to save 5009 Directory list full This occurs during DIRA and DIRS commands when attempting to save more directories than supported by the current firmware 5010 Invalid name index The value of the index parameter used for a NAMQ query is can not be zero 0 6000 6999 Bitmap errors 6006 No map to save...

Page 1115: ... session to save 7010 No LUT buffer An attempt was made to modify the contents of a color lookup table editing buffer when there was no open color lookup table buffer available 7011 Invalid LUT Index An attempt was made to recall a color lookup table at an index location that is less than zero 0 or greater than the highest index number in use for color lookup tables 7020 LUT not found 8000 8999 Fo...

Page 1116: ...g FMTW or FMTZ commands when you try to overwrite or zero out an EPROM format 9454 Bad location for format erase This occurs during FMTE command when you try to access an invalid format memory location 9456 Bad location for format read write This occurs during FMTR or FMTW commands when you try to read or write to an invalid format memory location 9457 Bad location for format name read This occurs...

Page 1117: ...not change EPROM contents This occurs when you try to remove yank one or more formats from EPROM format memory locations using the FMTY command 9475 Can not change EPROM contents One or more EPROM format locations was given as the destination location for the FMTD command 9477 Error duplicating formats The first memory location parameter used with the FMTD command is greater than the last memory l...

Page 1118: ...ssing 9499 I2C count missing There was a communications error within the generator hardware architecture because the data count was missing 9500 I2C stream too big There was a communications error within the generator hardware architecture because the data stream size exceeded the size supported by the device 9501 I2C data missing There was a communications error within the generator hardware arch...

Page 1119: ...nvalid The Tx may have production keys and the Rx public keys 9521 HDCP failed after a while The HDCP authentication started but failed after a while 9522 HDCP key combination not supported The HDCP authentication did not start 9523 HDCP production keys not supported HDCP test initiated and specified production keys where are not supported in generator option 9524 Invalid transmitter KSV HDCP vide...

Page 1120: ...538 Memory address out of range The generator encountered a memory address out of range condition 9539 Memory count missing The generator encountered a memory count missing condition 9540 Memory stream too big The generator encountered a memory stream too big condition 9541 Memory data missing The generator encountered a memory data missing condition 9542 Memory address missing The generator encou...

Page 1121: ...ed by the firmware 10025 File type The data object file that has been recalled from memory contains a file type identification that is not supported by the current firmware 10026 File size The size of the data object file that has been recalled from memory does not match the size information stored in the file s header data 10030 Feature not implemented The generator hardware configuration does no...

Page 1122: ...les in the data object 10220 Font not found An attempt was made to recall a font by name that is not stored in the generator 10225 Can not delete font in EPROM Ann attempt was made to delete a font stored in the firmware EPROM 10230 Invalid font check mode The current firmware does not support the selected test method on the contents of the font edit buffer 10235 No font definition The recalled fo...

Page 1123: ...dition 10303 CEC receive start error The generator encountered a CEC receive start error condition 10304 CEC receive drop error The generator encountered a CEC receive drop error condition 10305 CEC receive free error The generator encountered a CEC receive free error condition 10310 CEC transmit line error The generator encountered a CEC transmit line error condition 10311 CEC transmit arb lost T...

Page 1124: ...686 Appendix C Error Messages ...

Page 1125: ...720 x 480 Interlace 31 469 119 880 26 999984 480i2xL4 720 x 480 Interlace 31 500 120 000 27 027 480i2xL5 720 x 480 Interlace 62 937 239 760 53 999968 480i2xL6 720 x 480 Interlace 63 000 240 000 54 054 480i2xS1 720 x 480 Interlace 15 734 59 940 13 500 480i2xS2 720 x 480 Interlace 15 750 60 000 13 513500 480i2xS3 720 x 480 Interlace 31 469 119 880 26 999984 480i2xS4 720 x 480 Interlace 31 500 120 00...

Page 1126: ...80 Progressive 31 500 60 000 108 108 480p4xL1 2880 x 480 Progressive 31 469 59 940 108 000 480p4xL2 2880 x 480 Progressive 31 500 60 000 108 108 480p4xS1 2880 x 480 Progressive 31 469 59 940 108 000 480p4xS2 2880 x 480 Progressive 31 500 60 000 108 108 480p59 720 x 480 Progressive 31 469 59 940 27 000 480p59LH 720 x 480 Progressive 31 469 59 940 27 000 480p59SH 720 x 480 Progressive 31 469 59 940 ...

Page 1127: ... 2880 x 576 Progressive 31 250 50 000 108 000 576p4xSH 2880 x 576 Progressive 31 250 50 000 108 000 576p50 720 x 576 Progressive 31 250 50 000 27 000 576p50LH 720 x 576 Progressive 31 250 50 000 27 000 576p50SH 720 x 576 Progressive 31 250 50 000 27 000 576pWH 960 x 576 Progressive 31 250 50 000 36 000 576pWH_ 960 x 576 Progressive 31 250 50 000 37 125 576pWL 960 x 576 Progressive 31 250 50 000 36...

Page 1128: ... Interlace 33 716 59 940 74 175824 1080i30 1920 x 1080 Interlace 33 750 60 000 74 250 1080i50 1920 x 1080 Interlace 56 250 100 000 148 500 1080i59 1920 x 1080 Interlace 67 433 119 880 148 351648 1080i60 1920 x 1080 Interlace 67 500 120 000 148 500 1080p23 1920 x 1080 Progressive 26 973 23 976 74 175824 1080p24 1920 x 1080 Progressive 28 125 24 000 74 250 1080p25 1920 x 1080 Progressive 28 125 25 0...

Page 1129: ...13 94 500 DMT1175 1152 x 864 Progressive 67 500 75 000 108 000 DMT1185 1152 x 864 Progressive 77 094 84 999 121 500 DMT1243G 1280 x 1024 Interlace 46 433 86 871 78 750 DMT1260A 1280 x 960 Progressive 60 000 60 000 108 000 DMT1260G 1280 x 1024 Progressive 63 981 60 020 108 000 DMT1275A 1280 x 960 Progressive 75 000 75 000 126 000 DMT1275G 1280 x 1024 Progressive 79 976 75 025 135 000 DMT1285A 1280 ...

Page 1130: ...0 Progressive 44 444 59 979 64 000 CVR1360H 1360 x 768 Progressive 47 368 59 960 72 000 CVR1460 1400 x 1050 Progressive 64 744 59 948 101 000 CVR1560D 1536 x 960 Progressive 59 257 59 977 100 500 CVR1660 1600 x 1200 Progressive 74 006 59 924 130 250 CVR1660D 1680 x 1050 Progressive 64 674 59 883 119 000 CVR1760D 1728 x 1080 Progressive 66 605 59 950 125 750 CVR1760H 1704 x 960 Progressive 59 147 5...

Page 1131: ... 49 651 37 000 CVT0960D 960 x 600 Progressive 37 212 59 635 45 250 CVT0975D 960 x 600 Progressive 47 075 74 841 58 750 CVT0985D 960 x 600 Progressive 53 600 84 676 67 750 CVT1050 1024 x 768 Progressive 39 634 49 980 51 999996 CVT1050H 1064 x 600 Progressive 30 871 49 712 40 750 CVT1060 1024 x 768 Progressive 47 816 59 920 63 500 CVT1060H 1064 x 600 Progressive 37 352 59 859 50 500 CVT1075 1024 x 7...

Page 1132: ...0 Progressive 61 795 49 915 131 500 CVT1650D 1680 x 1050 Progressive 54 121 59 974 119 500008 CVT1660 1600 x 1200 Progressive 74 537 59 869 161 000 CVT1660D 1680 x 1050 Progressive 65 290 59 954 146 250 CVT1675 1600 x 1200 Progressive 94 095 74 976 204 750 CVT1675D 1680 x 1050 Progressive 82 306 74 892 187 000 CVT1685 1600 x 1200 Progressive 107 208 84 951 235 000 CVT1685D 1680 x 1050 Progressive ...

Page 1133: ...56 x 1536 Progressive 137 206 84 957 466 499968 CVT2550 2560 x 1920 Progressive 98 816 49 957 346 250016 CVT2550H 2560 x 1440 Progressive 74 146 49 964 256 250 CVT2560 2560 x 1920 Progressive 119 247 59 953 419 749984 CVT2560H 2560 x 1440 Progressive 89 521 59 961 312 250016 CVT2575 2560 x 1920 Progressive 150 408 74 979 534 249984 CVT2575H 2560 x 1440 Progressive 112 855 74 937 397 250016 CVT2585...

Page 1134: ... 59 987 1276 499968 CVT5175H 5120 x 2880 Progressive 225 516 74 972 1616 499968 CVT5185H 5120 x 2880 Progressive 257 064 84 980 1846 750080 Format Active HxV Scan Horizontal Rate kHz Vertical Rate Hz Pixel Rate MHz Format Active HxV Scan Horizontal Rate kHz Vertical Rate Hz Pixel Rate MHz 240p2x_1 720 x 240 Progressive 15 734 60 055 13 500 240p2x_2 720 x 240 Progressive 15 750 60 115 13 5135 240p2...

Page 1135: ...xL3 2880 x 288 Progressive 15 625 49 761 54 000 288p4xS1 2880 x 288 Progressive 15 625 50 080 54 000 288p4xS2 2880 x 288 Progressive 15 625 49 920 54 000 288p4xS3 2880 x 288 Progressive 15 625 49 761 54 000 Format Active HxV Scan Horizontal Rate kHz Vertical Rate Hz Pixel Rate MHz Format Active HxV Scan Horizontal Rate kHz Vertical Rate Hz Pixel Rate MHz DatRay5 2048 x 2560 Progressive 186 010 70 ...

Page 1136: ...27 LMC_2 640 x 480 Interlace 15 734 59 940 12 272727 LMC_3 640 x 480 Interlace 15 734 59 940 12 272727 LMC_4 640 x 480 Interlace 15 734 59 940 12 272727 MAVERIK 740 x 476 Interlace 15 734 59 940 14 318182 STANAGA 1244 x 842 Interlace 26 250 60 000 40 005 STANAGB 1560 x 574 Interlace 15 625 50 000 30 000 STANAGC 1262 x 484 Interlace 15 750 60 000 24 003 XGA2 720 x 400 Progressive 39 444 87 849 35 4...

Page 1137: ...rlace 15 625 50 000 17 750 LD6Du60 1024 x 768 Progressive 48 364 60 005 65 001216 LD8Du75 1024 x 768 Progressive 60 023 75 029 78 750 NEC0656D 640 x 400 Progressive 24 823 56 416 21 050 NEC1140B 1120 x 750 Interlace 32 857 80 042 47 840004 Format Active HxV Scan Horizontal Rate kHz Vertical Rate Hz Pixel Rate MHz RAMP160 4096 x 480 Progressive 31 469 59 941 161 121280 TEST81 1024 x 768 Progressive...

Page 1138: ...ressive 30 296 59 638 24 964 IBM0660 640 x 480 Progressive 30 296 59 638 25 024 IBM0675 640 x 480 Progressive 39 375 75 000 31 500 IBM0770U 720 x 350 Progressive 31 469 70 087 28 322 IBM0770H 720 x 400 Progressive 31 469 70 087 28 322 IBM1043 1053 x 754 Interlace 35 414 86 906 45 542 IBM1043_ 1056 x 768 Interlace 35 602 86 940 45 571 IBM1070 1024 x 768 Progressive 56 287 70 009 77 001 IBM1060Q 102...

Page 1139: ...07 856 VSC1460 1440 x 1080 Progressive 67 080 60 000 129 867 VSC1660V 1680 x 1080 Progressive 67 080 60 000 151 332 VSC1875V 1868 x 1200 Progressive 93 975 75 000 240 576 VSC1960H 1920 x 1080 Progressive 67 080 60 000 172 798 VSC1975H 1920 x 1080 Progressive 84 060 75 000 220 637 VSC1975D 1920 x 1200 Progressive 93 975 75 000 246 590 Format Active HxV Scan Horizontal Rate kHz Vertical Rate Hz Pixe...

Page 1140: ...702 Appendix D Format Reference ...

Page 1141: ...nce test 116 Component high definition television formats 46 Component SDTV formats 46 Component television format names 148 component values 227 component video 54 composite test image 61 computer IT FPDs 51 Computer display format names 149 Computer display formats 46 Configuring a file server 125 Configuring format parameters 153 Configuring special sync for FS LS or CS 123 Configuring the gene...

Page 1142: ...ront panel interface 9 FTP Browser 23 FTP server 125 function keys 19 G Generator file system 13 124 Generator FTP Browser 23 Generator media 13 Generator operational modes 14 generator s function keys 19 generator s path 17 GPIB connector 7 GPIB port address 207 H HDCP 107 HDCP compliance test 116 HDCP test 61 HDMI 1 3 deep color displays 266 HDMI 1 4 3D displays 284 HDMI compliance 12 HDMI displ...

Page 1143: ...2 render images quickly 59 Report ARC initiated 94 Report ARC terminated 94 report for the EDID 310 327 6 24 Request ARC Initiation 94 Request ARC Termination 94 resolution 52 56 58 Routing Control 62 Running a test sequence 241 Running an HDCP self test 114 Running HDCP test in step mode 116 S select the device type 41 select the interface 41 Selecting a boot device 14 Selecting a user profile 36...

Page 1144: ...epetition 276 testing luminance 55 58 testing photometry 52 55 58 testing resolution 52 56 58 Testing with Active Format Description 313 Tuner Control 62 TV 61 U upgrade a generator 97 Upgrade options and procedures 140 upgrade procedures 140 Upgrading generators over a network 140 user profiles 36 V video formats 43 260 Video interfaces 2 view analog calibration factors 76 Viewing and modifying f...

Search results

Summary of Contents for 881

Reviews:

Quantum Data 881, User Manual, Page: 116 / 1144

Search results

Summary of Contents for 881

Reviews: